Safety Information

This operation manual is intended for users with basic knowledge of electricity and electric devices.
Safety Information
Read and follow all safety instructions in this manual precisely to avoid unsafe operating conditions,
property damage, personal injury, or death.

Safety symbols in this manual

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in severe injury or death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in injury or death.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in minor injury or property
damage.
* LTVF-Sx2000 is the official name for Sx2000.

Safety information

O Do not open the cover of the equipment while it is on or operating. Likewise, do not operate the
inverter while the cover is open. Exposure of high voltage terminals or charging area to the
external environment may result in an electric shock. Do not remove any covers or touch the
internal circuit boards (PCBs) or electrical contacts on the product when the power is on or during
operation. Doing so may result in serious injury, death, or serious property damage.
O Do not open the cover of the equipment even when the power supply to the inverter has been
turned off unless it is necessary for maintenance or regular inspection. Opening the cover may
result in an electric shock even when the power supply is off.
O The equipment may hold charge long after the power supply has been turned off. Use a multi-
meter to make sure that there is no voltage before working on the inverter, motor or motor cable.

ii Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Safety Information Quick Reference Table

Quick Reference Table

O This equipment must be grounded for safe and proper operation.
O Do not supply power to a faulty inverter. If you find that the inverter is faulty, disconnect the power The following table contains situations frequently encountered by users while working with inverters.
supply and have the inverter professionally repaired. Refer to the typical and practical situations in the table to quickly and easily locate answers to your
questions.
O The inverter becomes hot during operation. Avoid touching the inverter until it has cooled to avoid
burns.
Situation Reference
O Do not allow foreign objects, such as screws, metal chips, debris, water, or oil to get inside the
inverter. Allowing foreign objects inside the inverter may cause the inverter to malfunction or result I want to run a slightly higher rated motor than the inverter’s rated capacity. p. 185
in a fire.
I want to configure the inverter to start operating as soon as the power source is
O Do not operate the inverter with wet hands. Doing so may result in electric shock. p. 74
applied.
O Check the information about the protection level for the circuits and devices.
I want to configure the motor’s parameters. p.130
The following connection terminals and devices are the Electrical Protection level 0. It means I want to set up sensorless vector control. p.133
that the circuit protection level depends on the basic insulation. If there is no basic insulation is
failed, it may cause electric shock accident. When installing or wiring the connection terminals Something seems to be wrong with the inverter or the motor. p. 204, p.303
and devices, take the same protective action as with the power wire.
What is auto tuning? p.130
- Multi-function Input: P1-P7, CM
What are the recommended wiring lengths? p. 204, p.303
- Analog Frequency Input: VR, V1, I2, TI
- Safety Function: SA, SB, SC The motor is too noisy. p. 149
- Analog Output: AO1, AO2, TO
- Contact: Q1, EG, 24, A1, B1, C1, A2, C2, S+, S-, SG I want to apply PID control on my system. p. 122
- Fan
What are the factory default settingss for P1–P7 multi-function terminals? p. 20
The protection level of this equipment (inverter) is the Electrical Protection level I.
I want to view all of the parameters I have modified. p. 159

I want to review recent fault trip and warning histories. p. 271

O Do not modify the interior workings of the inverter. Doing so will void the warranty. I want to install a frequency meter using an analog terminal. p. 21
O The inverter is designed for 3-phase motor operation. Do not use the inverter to operate a single
phase motor. I want to operate the inverter using a multi-step speed configuration. p. 68
O Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Doing so may damage the cable and result in The motor runs too hot. p. 183
an electric shock.
The inverter is too hot. p. 193

The cooling fan does not work. p. 308

I want to change the items that are monitored on the keypad. p. 179

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) iii iv Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Contents Table of Contents

4.1.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input..............................................65

Table of Contents 4.1.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication ............67
1 Preparing the Installation..............................................................................................1 4.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input .......................................................................67
1.1 Product Identification............................................................................................1 4.3 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm) .......................................................68
1.2 Part Names...........................................................................................................2 4.4 Setting Multi-step Frequency.............................................................................68
1.3 Installation Considerations...................................................................................3 4.5 Command Source Configuration.......................................................................70
1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation ....................................................4 4.5.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device ..........................................70
1.5 Cable Selection ....................................................................................................6 4.5.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev Run
Commands) .........................................................................................70
2 Installing the Inverter.....................................................................................................8
4.5.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation
2.1 Mounting the Inverter .........................................................................................10
Direction Commands) .........................................................................71
2.2 Cable Wiring .......................................................................................................13 4.5.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device ......................71
2.3 Post-Installation Checklist ..................................................................................26 4.6 Local/Remote Mode Switching..........................................................................72
2.4 Test Run..............................................................................................................28 4.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention.................................................................73
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations.....................................................................30 4.8 Power-on Run.....................................................................................................74
3.1 About the Keypad...............................................................................................30 4.9 Reset and Restart ..............................................................................................75
3.1.1 Operation Keys .....................................................................................30 4.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ...................................................76
3.1.2 About the Display..................................................................................32 4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency ..................................76
3.1.3 Display Modes ......................................................................................35 4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency ..................................77
3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad ..............................................................................38 4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration................................................78
3.2.1 Display Mode Selection........................................................................38 4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency.....................................79
3.2.2 Switching Groups..................................................................................41 4.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration ..........................................................................80
3.2.3 Navigating through the Codes (Functions)..........................................43 4.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation .......................................................................83
3.2.4 Navigating Directly to Different Codes.................................................45 4.13 V/F(Voltage/Frequency) Control........................................................................83
3.2.5 Parameter settings................................................................................46
4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation ...............................................................83
3.2.6 Monitoring the Operation......................................................................48
4.13.2 Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation............................................84
3.3 Fault Monitoring..................................................................................................51
4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation..................................................................85
3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation........................................51 4.14 Torque Boost.......................................................................................................86
3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips .............................................................52
4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost............................................................................86
3.4 Parameter Initialization.......................................................................................54
4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost ................................................................................87
4 Learning Basic Features.............................................................................................55 4.15 Output Voltage Setting .......................................................................................87
4.1 Setting Frequency Reference............................................................................58 4.16 Start Mode Setting..............................................................................................88
4.1.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)..........................................58 4.16.1 Acceleration Start..................................................................................88
4.1.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)..........................................58 4.16.2 Start After DC Braking ..........................................................................88
4.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source ...................................................................59 4.17 Stop Mode Setting..............................................................................................89
4.1.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal I2).......65 4.17.1 Deceleration Stop .................................................................................89
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) v vi Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Contents Table of Contents

4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking ..........................................................................89 5.13 Energy Saving Operation.................................................................................144

4.17.3 Free Run Stop.......................................................................................91 5.13.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation......................................................144
4.17.4 Power Braking.......................................................................................91 5.13.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation .................................................144
4.18 Frequency Limit ..................................................................................................92 5.14 Speed Search Operation .................................................................................145
4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency ..92 5.15 Auto Restart Settings .......................................................................................148
4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency Values....92 5.16 Operational Noise Settings (carrier frequency settings).................................149
4.18.3 Frequency Jump...................................................................................93 5.17 2nd Motor Operation..........................................................................................151
4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting ...............................................................................94 5.18 Supply Power Transition ..................................................................................152
4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control .................................................................95 5.19 Cooling Fan Control .........................................................................................153
4.21 P2P Setting.........................................................................................................96 5.20 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings ................................................154
4.22 Multi-keypad Setting...........................................................................................97 5.21 Read, Write, and Save Parameters ................................................................155
4.23 User Sequence Setting ......................................................................................98 5.22 Parameter Initialization.....................................................................................156
4.24 Fire Mode Operation ........................................................................................104 5.23 Parameter View Lock.......................................................................................157
5 Learning Advanced Features ...................................................................................106 5.24 Parameter Lock ................................................................................................158
5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References ...............................................................108 5.25 Changed Parameter Display ...........................................................................159
5.2 Jog operation....................................................................................................112 5.26 User Group .......................................................................................................159
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal.................112 5.27 Easy Start On ...................................................................................................162
5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-function Terminal................114 5.28 Config (CNF) Mode ..........................................................................................163
5.2.3 Jog Operation by Keypad...................................................................115 5.29 Timer Settings...................................................................................................164
5.3 Up-down Operation ..........................................................................................115 5.30 Brake Control....................................................................................................165
5.4 3-Wire Operation ..............................................................................................117 5.31 Multi-Function Output On/Off Control..............................................................166
5.5 Safe Operation Mode.......................................................................................118 5.32 Press Regeneration Prevention.......................................................................167
5.6 Dwell Operation................................................................................................119 5.33 Analog Output...................................................................................................168
5.7 Slip Compensation Operation..........................................................................121 5.33.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output...................................................168
5.8 PID Control .......................................................................................................122 5.33.2 Analog Pulse Output...........................................................................171
5.8.1 PID Basic Operation ...........................................................................122 5.34 Digital Output ....................................................................................................172
5.8.2 Pre-PID Operation ..............................................................................128 5.34.1 Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Settings...........................172
5.8.3 PID Operation Sleep Mode ................................................................129 5.34.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-Function Output Terminal and Relay .177
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop)...........................................................129 5.34.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings .........................178
5.9 Auto Tuning.......................................................................................................130 5.35 Keypad Language Settings .............................................................................179
5.10 Sensorless Vector Control ...............................................................................133 5.36 Operation State Monitor...................................................................................179
5.10.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting....................................135 5.37 Operation Time Monitor ...................................................................................182
5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide .....................................139 6 Learning Protection Features ..................................................................................183
5.11 Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation .................................................................140 6.1 Motor Protection ...............................................................................................183
5.12 Torque Control ..................................................................................................141 6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH)................183
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) vii viii Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Contents Table of Contents

6.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip.......................................................185 7.5.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/ Write) ..............................................226
6.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking......................................................187 7.5.3 Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write)............228
6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection...................................................................191 8 Table of Functions......................................................................................................230
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection ......................................................................191 8.1 Drive group (PAR→DRV) ................................................................................230
6.2.2 External Trip Signal.............................................................................192 8.2 Basic Function group (PAR→BAS).................................................................235
6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection ..............................................................193 8.3 Advanced Function group (PAR→ADV) .........................................................240
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss ......................................................................193 8.4 Control Function group (PAR→CON) .............................................................245
6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration..................................196 8.5 Input Terminal Block Function group (PAR→IN) ............................................251
6.3 Underload Fault Trip and Warning...................................................................198 8.6 Output Terminal Block Function group (PAR→OUT) .....................................256
6.3.1 Fan Fault Detection ............................................................................199 8.7 Communication Function group (PAR→COM)...............................................260
6.3.2 Lifetime diagnosis of components .....................................................200 8.8 Application Function group (PAR→APP)........................................................264
6.3.3 Low Voltage Fault Trip ........................................................................202 8.9 Protection Function group (PAR→PRT) .........................................................266
6.3.4 Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal...........................................202 8.10 2nd Motor Function group (PAR→M2) ...........................................................271
6.3.5 Trip Status Reset ................................................................................203
8.11 User Sequence group (USS)...........................................................................273
6.3.6 Inverter Diagnosis State .....................................................................203
8.12 User Sequence Function group(USF).............................................................276
6.3.7 Operation Mode on Option Card Trip ................................................203
8.13 Groups for LCD Keypad Only..........................................................................295
6.3.8 No Motor Trip ......................................................................................204
8.13.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x) ......................................................................295
6.3.9 Low voltage trip 2................................................................................204
8.13.2 Config Mode (CNF) ............................................................................295
6.4 Fault/Warning List.............................................................................................205
9 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................299
7 RS-485 Communication Features ...........................................................................206
9.1 Trips and Warnings ..........................................................................................299
7.1 Communication Standards ..............................................................................206
9.1.1 Fault Trips............................................................................................299
7.2 Communication System Configuration............................................................207
9.1.2 Warning Messages.............................................................................302
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection.......................................................207
9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips..............................................................................303
7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters..................................................208
9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults ..........................................................................305
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency ...................................209
10 Maintenance................................................................................................................309
7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation ...............................................210
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists...................................................................................309
7.2.5 Setting Virtual Multi-Function Input ....................................................211
10.1.1 Daily Inspections.................................................................................309
7.2.6 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication...............................212
10.1.2 Annual Inspections .............................................................................311
7.2.7 Total Memory Map for Communication .............................................212
10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspections .........................................................................313
7.2.8 Parameter Group for Data Transmission ..........................................212
10.2 Replacing Major Components .........................................................................313
7.3 Communication Protocol..................................................................................214
10.2.1 Exchange Cycle for Major Components............................................313
7.3.1 Modbus-RTU Protocol........................................................................214
10.2.2 How to Replace the Cooling Fans .....................................................314
7.4 Compatible Common Area Parameter............................................................217
10.3 Storage and Disposal.......................................................................................315
7.5 SX2000 Expansion Common Area Parameter...............................................220
10.3.1 Storage................................................................................................315
7.5.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only)...........................................220
10.3.2 Disposal...............................................................................................315
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) ix x Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Contents

11 Technical Specification .............................................................................................316

11.1 Input and Output Specification.........................................................................316
11.2 Product Specification Details ...........................................................................316
11.3 External Dimensions (IP 20 Type)...................................................................319
11.4 Peripheral Devices ...........................................................................................321
11.5 Fuse and Reactor Specifications.....................................................................321
11.6 Terminal Screw Specification...........................................................................322
11.7 Braking Resistor Specification .........................................................................323
11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating................................................................323
11.9 Heat Emmission ...............................................................................................325
Index.....................................................................................................................................326

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) xi
 Preparing the Installation Preparing the Installation

1.2 Part Names

1 Preparing the Installation The illustration below displays part names. Details may vary between product groups.
This chapter provides details on product identification, part names, correct installation and cable
specifications. To install the inverter correctly and safely, carefully read and follow the instructions.

1.1 Product Identification

The SX2000 Inverter is manufactured in a range of product groups based on drive capacity and
power source specifications. Product name and specifications are detailed on the rating plate. The
illustration on the next page shows the location of the rating plate. Check the rating plate before
installing the product and make sure that the product meets your requirements. For more detailed
product specifications, refer to 11.1 Input and Output Specification on page 319.

Note
Check the product name, open the packaging, and then confirm that the product is free from defects.
Contact your supplier if you have any issues or questions about your product.

Example of a nameplate on the right side of the product :

Part Number Description :

LTVF –S 4 0010 B AA

L&T Variable 1 : Single Phase

Sx2000 Normal Duty B : IP20
Frequency 2 : Three Phase 230V AA : Reserved
Series Amp X : IP66
Drive 4 : Three Phase 415V

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 1 2 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Preparing the Installation Preparing the Installation

1.3 Installation Considerations 1.4 Selecting and Preparing a Site for Installation
Inverters are composed of various precision, electronic devices, and therefore the installation When selecting an installation location consider the following points:
environment can significantly impact the lifespan and reliability of the product. The table below details
the ideal operation and installation conditions for the inverter. O The inverter must be installed on a wall that can support the inverter’s weight.
O The location must be free from vibration. Vibration can adversely affect the operation of the
Items Description inverter.
Ambient Temperature* Heavy Duty: 14–104°F (-10–50Ԩ) Normal Duty: 14–122°F (-10– 40Ԩ) O The inverter can become very hot during operation. Install the inverter on a surface that is fire-
Ambient Humidity 90% relative humidity (no condensation) resistant or flame-retardant and with sufficient clearance around the inverter to allow air to
Storage Temperature - 4–149°F (-20–65Ԩ) circulate. The illustrations below detail the required installation clearances.
An environment free from corrosive or flammable gases, oil residue or
Environmental Factors
dust
Altitude/Vibration Lower than 3,280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level/less than 9.8m/sec² (1G)
Air Pressure 70 –106kPa
* The ambient temperature is the temperature measured at a point 2” (5 cm) from the surface of the
inverter.

Do not allow the ambient temperature to exceed the allowable range while operating the inverter.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 3 4 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Preparing the Installation Preparing the Installation

O Ensure sufficient air circulation is provided around the inverter when it is installed. If the inverter is 1.5 Cable Selection
to be installed inside a panel, enclosure, or cabinet rack, carefully consider the position of the
inverter’s cooling fan and the ventilation louver. The cooling fan must be positioned to efficiently When you install power and signal cables in the terminal blocks, only use cables that meet the
transfer the heat generated by the operation of the inverter. required specification for the safe and reliable operation of the product. Refer to the following
information to assist you with cable selection.

O Wherever possible use cables with the largest cross-sectional area for mains power wiring, to
ensure that voltage drop does not exceed 2%.
O Use copper cables rated for 600 V, 90Ԩ for power terminal wiring.
O Use copper cables rated for 300 V, 75Ԩ for control terminal wiring.

Signal (Control) Cable Specifications

Recommended wire thickness

2
mm (AWG)
With Crimp Terminal Torque
Terminal Without Crimp Electrical Specifications
Terminal screw [Nm]
Terminal
Connectors
Connections
(Bootlace
(Bare wire)
Ferrule)
P1–P7, CM -
Output current/voltage: 12 V,
O If you are installing multiple inverters, of different ratings, provide sufficient clearance to meet the VR
20 mA volume resistance: 1–5 kΩ
clearance specifications of the larger inverter. Maximum input voltage: -12V –
V1
+12 V
0–24 mA input (internal resistance:
I2
249 Ω)
Maximum output current/voltage:
AO1, AO2
12 V, 24 mA
Q1 Less than DC 26 V, 100 mA
EG 1.0 (17) 1.5 (15) M2-6 0.4 -
Maximum output current:
24
100 mA
TI 0–32 kHz, 0–12 V
TO 0–32 kHz, 0–12 V
SA, SB, SC Less than DC 24 V, 25 mA
Less than AC 250 V, 1 A
S+, S-, SG
Less than DC 30 V, 1 A
A1, B1, C1 Less than AC 250 V, 5 A
A2, C2 Less than DC 30 V, 5 A

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 5 6 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Preparing the Installation Installing the Inverter

Ground Cable and Power Cable Specifications

2 Installing the Inverter
Ground Power I/O
2 This chapter describes the physical and electrical installation methods, including mounting and wiring
Load (kW) 2 mm AWG
mm AWG of the product. Refer to the flowchart and basic configuration diagram provided below to understand
R/S/T U/V/W R/S/T U/V/W the procedures and installation methods to be followed to install the product correctly.
30
25 25 4 4
37 16 5 Installation Flowchart
3–Phase 400
45
V
55 3 70 70 1/0 1/0 The flowchart lists the sequence to be followed during installation. The steps cover equipment
35 installation and testing of the product. More information on each step is referenced in the steps.
75 2

* Product Identification (p.1)

Select the Installation Location (p.3)

Mounting the Inverter (p.10)

Wiring the Ground Connection (p.15)

Power and Signal Wiring (p.16)

Post-Installation Checks (p.26)

Turning on the Inverter

Parameter Configuration (p.46)

Testing (p.28)

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 7 8 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Basic Configuration Diagram

2.1 Mounting the Inverter
The reference diagram below shows a typical system configuration showing the inverter and
Mount the inverter on a wall or inside a panel following the procedures provided below. Before
peripheral devices.
installation, ensure that there is sufficient space to meet the clearance specifications, and that there
Prior to installing the inverter, ensure that the product is suitable for the application (power rating, are no obstacles impeding the cooling fan’s air flow.
capacity, etc). Ensure that all of the required peripherals and optional devices (resistor brakes,
Select a wall or panel suitable to support the installation. Refer to 11.3 External Dimensions (IP 20
contactors, noise filters, etc.) are available. For more details on peripheral devices, refer to 11.4
Type) on page 319 and check the inverter’s mounting bracket dimensions.
Peripheral Devices on page 321.
1 Use a level to draw a horizontal line on the mounting surface, and then carefully mark the fixing
points.
2 Drill the two upper mounting bolt holes, and then install the mounting bolts. Do not fully tighten
the bolts at this time. Fully tighten the mounting bolts after the inverter has been mounted.

O Figures in this manual are shown with covers or circuit breakers removed to show a more detailed
view of the installation arrangements. Install covers and circuit breakers before operating the
inverter. Operate the product according to the instructions in this manual.
O Do not start or stop the inverter using a magnetic contactor, installed on the input power supply.
O If the inverter is damaged and loses control, the machine may cause a dangerous situation. Install
an additional safety device such as an emergency brake to prevent these situations.
O High levels of current draw during power-on can affect the system. Ensure that correctly rated
circuit breakers are installed to operate safely during power-on situations.
O Reactors can be installed to improve the power factor. Note that reactors may be installed within
30 ft (9.14 m) from the power source if the input power exceeds 1000KVA. Refer to 11.5 Fuse and
Reactor Specifications on page 321 and carefully select a reactor that meets the requirements.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 9 10 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

3 Mount the inverter on the wall or inside a panel using the two upper bolts, and then fully tighten
the mounting bolts. Ensure that the inverter is placed flat on the mounting surface, and that the
installation surface can securely support the weight of the inverter. O Do not transport the inverter by lifting with the inverter’s covers or plastic surfaces. The inverter
may tip over if covers break, causing injuries or damage to the product. Always support the inverter
using the metal frames when moving it.
O Hi-capacity inverters are very heavy and bulky. Use an appropriate transport method that is
suitable for the weight.
O Do not install the inverter on the floor or mount it sideways against a wall. The inverter MUST be
installed vertically, on a wall or inside a panel, with its rear flat on the mounting surface.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 11 12 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

2.2 Cable Wiring Step 1 Front Cover, Control Terminal Cover and Cable Guide

The front cover, control terminal cover and cable guide must be removed to install cables. Refer to the
Open the front cover, remove the cable guides and control terminal cover, and then install the ground
following procedures to remove the covers and cable guide. The steps to remove these parts may
connection as specified. Complete the cable connections by connecting an appropriately rated cable
vary depending on the inverter model.
to the terminals on the power and control terminal blocks.
1 Loosen the bolt that secures the terminal cover (Œ). Push and hold the latch on the right side of
Read the following information carefully before carrying out wiring connections to the inverter. All
the cover (). Then remove the cover by lifting it from the bottom and moving it away from the
warning instructions must be followed.
front of the inverter.

O Install the inverter before carrying out wiring connections.

O Ensure that no small metal debris, such as wire cut-offs, remain inside the inverter. Metal debris in
the inverter may cause inverter failure.
O Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal block screws may allow the
cables to disconnect and cause short circuit or inverter failure. Refer to 11.6 Terminal Screw
Specification on page 321 for torque specifications.
O Do not place heavy objects on top of electric cables. Heavy objects may damage the cable and
result in electric shock.
O The power supply system for this equipment (inverter) is a grounded system. Only use a grounded
power supply system for this equipment (inverter). Do not use a TT, TN, IT, or corner grounded
system with the inverter.
O The equipment may generate direct current in the protective ground wire. When installing the
residual current device (RCD) or residual current monitoring (RCM), only Type B RCDs and RCMs
can be used.
O Use cables with the largest cross-sectional area, appropriate for power terminal wiring, to ensure 2 Connect the cables to the power terminals and the control terminals. For cable specifications,
that voltage drop does not exceed 2%. refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 6.
O Use copper cables rated at 600 V, 90Ԩ for power terminal wiring.
O Use copper cables rated at 300 V, 75Ԩ for control terminal wiring.
O Check for short circuits or wiring failure in the control circuit. They could cause system failure or
device malfunction.
O Use shielded cables when wiring the control circuit. Failure to do so may cause malfunction due to
interference. If a ground is needed, use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables.
O If you need to re-wire the terminals due to wiring-related faults, ensure that the inverter keypad
display is turned off and the charge lamp under the front cover is off before working on wiring
connections. The inverter may hold a high voltage electric charge long after the power supply has
been turned off.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 13 14 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Step 2 Ground Connection Step 3 Power Terminal Wiring

Remove the front cover, cable guide, and the control terminal cover. Then follow the instructions The following illustration shows the terminal layout on the power terminal block. Refer to the detailed
below to install the ground connection for the inverter. descriptions to understand the function and location of each terminal before making wiring
connections. Ensure that the cables selected meet or exceed the specifications in 1.5 Cable Selection
1 Locate the ground terminal and connect an appropriately rated ground cable to the terminals. on page 6 before installing them.
Refer to 1.5 Cable Selection on page 6 to find the appropriate cable specification for your
installation.
O Tighten terminal screws to their specified torque. Loose terminal screws may allow the cables
to disconnect and cause short circuit or inverter failure. Over tightening terminal screws may
damage the terminals and cause short circuits and malfunctions.
O Use copper cables rated for 600 V, 90Ԩ for power terminal wiring.
O Use copper cables rated for 300 V, 75Ԩ for control terminal wiring.
O Do not connect two wires in a single terminal for power cable connections.
O Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power cables
to the U, V, and W terminals will cause internal damage to the inverter. Connect motors to the
U, V, and W terminals. Phase sequence arrangement is not necessary.

2 Connect the other ends of the ground cables to the supply earth (ground) terminal.

Note
400 V products require Special Class 3 grounding. Resistance to ground must be < 10 Ω.

Power Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Terminal Labels Name Description
Install ground connections for the inverter and the motor by following the correct specifications to R(L1)/S(L2)/T(L3) AC power input terminal Mains supply AC power connections.
ensure safe and accurate operation. Using the inverter and the motor without the specified grounding P2+ + DC link terminal
DC voltage output terminals.
connections may result in electric shock. N- - DC link terminal
P3+ Brake resistor terminals Brake resistor wiring connection.
3-phase induction motor wiring
U/V/W Motor output terminals
connections.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 15 16 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Note Step 4 Control Terminal Wiring

O Use STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cables to connect a remotely located motor with the inverter. Do The illustrations below show the detailed layout of control wiring terminals, and control board switches.
not use 3 core cables. Refer to the detailed information provided below and 1.5 Cable Selection on page 6 before installing
O Make sure that the total cable length does not exceed 665ft (202m). control terminal wiring and ensure that the cables used meet the required specifications.
O Long cable runs can cause reduced motor torque in low frequency applications due to voltage
drop. Long cable runs also increase a circuit’s susceptibility to stray capacitance and may trigger
over-current protection devices or result in malfunction of equipment connected to the inverter.
O Voltage drop is calculated by using the following formula:

Voltage Drop (V) = [ξ͵ X cable resistance (mΩ/m) X cable length (m) X current(A)] / 1000

O Use cables with the largest possible cross-sectional area to ensure that voltage drop is minimized
over long cable runs. Lowering the carrier frequency and installing a micro surge filter may also
help to reduce voltage drop.

Distance < 330ft (100m) > 330ft (100m)

Allowed Carrier Frequency < 5 kHz < 2.5 kHz

Do not connect power to the inverter until installation has been fully completed and the inverter is
ready to be operated. Doing so may result in electric shock.

Control Board Switches

O Power supply cables must be connected to the R, S, and T terminals. Connecting power cables to Switch Description
other terminals will damage the inverter. SW PNP/NPN mode selection switch
O Use insulated ring lugs when connecting cables to R/S/T and U/V/W terminals. SW2 analog voltage/current input terminal selection switch
O The inverter’s power terminal connections can cause harmonics that may interfere with other SW3 analog voltage/current output terminal selection switch
communication devices located near to the inverter. To reduce interference the installation of noise SW4 Terminal resistor DIP switch
filters or line filters may be required.
O To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install phase-advanced
condensers, surge protection, or electronic noise filters on the output side of the inverter.
O To avoid circuit interruption or damaging connected equipment, do not install magnetic contactors
on the output side of the inverter.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 17 18 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Input Terminal Labels and Descriptions

Function Label Name Description
Multi-function Input
Multi-function P1–P7 1-7 Configurable for multi-function input terminals.
terminal
configuration CM Common Common terminal for analog terminal inputs and
Sequence outputs.
Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
Potentiometer analog voltage or current input.
VR frequency O Maximum Voltage Output: 12 V
reference input O Maximum Current Output: 100 mA,
O Potentiometer: 1–5 kΩ
Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
Voltage input for analog voltage input terminal.
V1 frequency
O Unipolar: 0–10 V (12 V Max.)
reference input
O Bipolar: -10–10 V (±12 V Max.)
Used to setup or modify a frequency reference via
analog voltage or current input terminals.
Switch between voltage (V2) and current (I2) modes
Analog input using a control board switch (SW2).
configuration
Voltage/current V2 Mode:
V2/I2 input for frequency O Unipolar: 0–10 V (12 V Max.)
reference input O Bipolar: -10–10 V (±12 V Max.)

I2 Mode
O Input current: 4–20 mA
O Maximum Input current: 24 mA
O Input resistance: 249 Ω
Pulse input for Setup or modify frequency references using pulse
frequency inputs from 0 to 32 kHz.
TI
reference input O Low Level: 0–0.8 V
(pulse train) O High Level: 3.5–12 V
SA Safety input A Used to block the output from the inverter in an
emergency.
Conditions:
Safety O Normal Operation: Both the SA and SB terminals are
SB Safety input B connected to the SC terminal.
functionality
configuration O Output Block: One or both of the SA and SB
terminals lose connection with the SC terminal.
Safety input power
SC DC 24 V, < 25 mA
source

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 19 20 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Output/Communication Terminal Labels and Descriptions Preinsulated Crimp Terminal Connectors (Bootlace Ferrule) .
Function Label Name Description
Use preinsulated crimp terminal connectors to increase reliability of the control terminal wiring. Refer
Used to send inverter output information to external to the specifications below to determine the crimp terminals to fit various cable sizes.
devices: output frequency, output current, output
voltage, or a DC voltage.
Operate switch (SW2) to select the signal output type
(voltage or current) at the AO terminal.
Voltage/Current Output Signal Specifications:
AO1
Output O Output voltage: 0–10 V
O Maximum output voltage/current: 12 V/10 mA
O Output current: 0–20 mA (Load resistance: Less than
500 Ω)
Analog O Maximum output current: 24 mA
output Use to send inverter output information, such as output
frequency, output current, output voltage, or DC voltage
Analog voltage to external devices.
AO2
output terminal
O Output voltage: 0–10 V
Cable Spec. Dimensions (inches/mm)
O Maximum output voltage/current: 12V/10 mA P/N 2 Manufacturer
AWG mm L* P d1 D
Sends pulse signals to external devices to provide a CE002506 10.4 0.4 / 6.0
single output value from the inverter of either: output 26 0.25 0.04 / 1.1 0.1 / 2.5
CE002508 12.4 0.5 / 8.0 JEONO
frequency, output current, output voltage, or DC voltage.
TO Pulse Output 0.125 / (Jeono Electric,
Output Signal Specifications: CE005006 22 0.50 12.0 0.45 / 6.0 0.05 / 1.3
3.2 http://www.jeono.com/)
O Output frequency: 0–32 kHz CE007506 20 0.75 12.0 0.45 / 6.0 0.06 / 1.5 0.13 / 3.4
O Output voltage: 0–12V * If the length (L) of the crimp terminals exceeds 0.5” (12.7mm) after wiring, the control terminal cover
Multi-functional may not close fully.
Q1 DC 26V, 100 mA or less
(open collector)
Common ground contact for an open collector (with
EG Common
external power source) To connect cables to the control terminals without using crimp terminals, refer to the following
External 24V power illustration detailing the correct length of exposed conductor at the end of the control cable.
24 Maximum output current: 150 mA
source
Sends out alarm signals when the inverter’s safety
features are activated (AC 250 V <1A, DC 30 V < 1A).
Terminal O Fault condition: A1 and C1 contacts are connected
A1/C1/B1 Fault signal output
contacts (B1 and C1 open connection)
O Normal operation: B1 and C1 contacts are
connected (A1 and C1 open connection)
The signal is generated while operating. Define and use
Multi-functional relay
A2, C2 the multi-functional relay output terminal (Less than
output terminal
AC250 V 5A, Less than DC30 V 5A).
Used to send or receive RS-485 signals. Refer to 7 RS-
S+/S-/SG
RS-485 signal line 485 Communication Features on page 206 for more
details.
NC NC Not in use.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 21 22 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Note
O While making wiring connections at the control terminals, ensure that the total cable length does
not exceed 165ft (50m).
O Ensure that the length of any safety related wiring does not exceed 100ft (30m).
O Ensure that the cable length between an LCD keypad and the inverter does not exceed 10ft
(3.04m). Cable connections longer than 10ft (3.04m) may cause signal errors.
O Use ferrite material to protect signal cables from electro-magnetic interference.
O Take care when supporting cables using cable ties, to apply the cable ties no closer than 6 inches
from the inverter. This provides sufficient access to fully close the front cover.
O When making control terminal cable connections, use a small flat-tip screw driver (0.1in wide
(2.5mm) and 0.015in thick (0.4mm) at the tip).

NPN Mode (Sink)

Select NPN using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1). Note that the factory default setting is NPN
mode. CM is is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal, and P24 is 24V
internal source.

Step 5 PNP/NPN Mode Selection

The SX2000 inverter supports both PNP (Source) and NPN (Sink) modes for sequence inputs at the
terminal. Select an appropriate mode to suit requirements using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1)
on the control board. Refer to the following information for detailed applications.

PNP Mode (Source)

Select PNP using the PNP/NPN selection switch (SW1). Note that the factory default setting is NPN
mode. CM is is the common ground terminal for all analog inputs at the terminal, and P24 is 24V
internal source. If you are using an external 24V source, build a circuit that connects the external
source (-) and the CM terminal.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 23 24 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Step 7 Selecting the braking unit 2.3 Post-Installation Checklist

Select the braking unit as following:
After completing the installation, check the items in the following table to make sure that the inverter
has been safely and correctly installed.
Applicable motor capacity Braking unit
30-37 kW LTDBU-0370 Items Check Point Ref. Result
Is the installation location appropriate? p.3
45-55 kW LTDBU-0550 Does the environment meet the inverter’s operating
p.4
conditions?
75 kW LTDBU-0750
Installation Does the power source match the inverter’s rated input? p.316
Location/Power Is the inverter’s rated output sufficient to supply the
I/O Verification equipment?
(Degraded performance will result in certain circumstances. p.316
Refer to 11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating on page
323 for details.
Is a circuit breaker installed on the input side of the inverter? p.9
Is the circuit breaker correctly rated? p.316
Are the power source cables correctly connected to the
R/S/T terminals of the inverter?
p.16
(Caution: connecting the power source to the U/V/W
terminals may damage the inverter.)
Are the motor output cables connected in the correct phase
rotation (U/V/W)?
p.16
(Caution: motors will rotate in reverse direction if three phase
cables are not wired in the correct rotation.)
Are the cables used in the power terminal connections
Power Terminal p.6
correctly rated?
Wiring
Is the inverter grounded correctly? p.15
Are the power terminal screws and the ground terminal
p. 16
screws tightened to their specified torques?
Are the overload protection circuits installed correctly on the
-
motors (if multiple motors are run using one inverter)?
Step 8 Re-assembling the Covers and Routing Bracket Is the inverter separated from the power source by a
p.9
magnetic contactor (if a braking resistor is in use)?
Re-assemble the cable routing bracket and the covers after completing the wiring and basic Are advanced-phase capacitors, surge protection and
configurations. Note that the assembly procedure may vary according to the product group or frame electromagnetic interference filters installed correctly?
size of the product. p.16
(These devices MUST not be installed on the output side of
the inverter.)
Are STP (shielded twisted pair) cables used for control
-
terminal wiring?
Is the shielding of the STP wiring properly grounded? -
If 3-wire operation is required, are the multi-function input
Control Terminal
terminals defined prior to the installation of the control wiring p.18
Wiring
connections?
Are the control cables properly wired? p18
Are the control terminal screws tightened to their specified
p.13
torques?

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 25 26 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Installing the Inverter

Items Check Point Ref. Result 2.4 Test Run

Is the total cable length of all control wiring < 165ft (100m)? p.23
Is the total length of safety wiring < 100ft (30m)? p.23 After the post-installation checklist has been completed, follow the instructions below to test the
Are optional cards connected correctly? - inverter.
Is there any debris left inside the inverter? p.13
Are any cables contacting adjacent terminals, creating a 1 Before starting a test drive, check the wiring conditions.
-
potential short circuit risk? 2 Turn on the power supply to the inverter. Ensure that the keypad display light is on.
Are the control terminal connections separated from the
- 3 Select the command source (Set the DRV code).
power terminal connections?
Miscellaneous If capacitors have been in use for more than two years, have 4 Set a frequency reference, and then check the following:
-
they been replaced?
O If V1 is selected as the frequency reference source, does the reference change according to
Has a fuse been installed for the power source? p.321
the input voltage at VR?
Are the connections to the motor separated from other
connections?
- O If V2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector switch
If the fans have been in operation for more than three years, (SW2) set to voltage, and does the reference change according to the input voltage?
p. 314 O If I2 is selected as the frequency reference source, is the voltage/current selector switch (SW2)
have they been replaced?
set to current, and does the reference change according to the input current?
5 Set the acceleration (ACC) time and deceleration (Dec) time.
Note
6 Start the motor and check the following:
STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) cable has a highly conductive, shielded screen around twisted cable O Ensure that the motor rotates in the correct direction (refer to the note below).
pairs. STP cables protect conductors from electromagnetic interference.
O Ensure that the motor accelerates and decelerates according to the set times, and that the
motor speed reaches the frequency reference.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 27 28 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Installing the Inverter Learning to Perform Basic Operations

Note
3 Learning to Perform Basic Operations
If the forward command (Fx) is on, the motor should rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the
load side of the motor. If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, switch the cables at the U and V This chapter describes the keypad layout and functions. It also introduces parameter groups and
terminals. codes required to perform basic operations. The chapter also outlines the correct operation of the
inverter before advancing to more complex applications. Examples are provided to demonstrate how
the inverter actually operates.
Verifying the Motor Rotation
1 On the keypad, set the DRV-06 (Frequency reference source) code to 0(Keypad).
2 Set a frequency reference.
3.1 About the Keypad
3 Press the [RUN] key. Motor starts forward operation.
The keypad is composed of two main components – the display and the operation (input) keys. Refer
4 Observe the motor’s rotation from the load side and ensure that the motor rotates
counterclockwise (forward). to the following illustration to identify part names and functions.

If the motor rotates in the reverse direction, two of the U/V/W terminals need to be switched.
3.1.1 Operation Keys
The following table lists the names and functions of the keypad’s operation keys.

O Check the parameter settings before running the inverter. Parameter settings may have to be
adjusted depending on the load.
O To avoid damaging the inverter, do not supply the inverter with an input voltage that exceeds the
rated voltage for the equipment.
O Before running the motor at maximum speed, confirm the motor’s rated capacity. As inverters can
be used to easily increase motor speed, use caution to ensure that motor speeds do not accidently
exceed the motor’s rated capacity.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 29 30 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

3.1.2 About the Display

Key Name Description
Monitor mode display
[MODE] Key Used to switch between modes.

[PROG / Ent] Key Used to select, confirm, or save a parameter value.

[UP] key
Switch between codes or increase or decrease parameter values.
[DOWN] key
[LEFT] key Switch between groups or move the cursor during parameter
[RIGHT] key setup or modification.

[MULTI] Key Used to perform special functions, such as user code registration.

Used to cancel an input during parameter setup.

O Pressing the [ESC] key before pressing the [PROG / ENT] key
reverts the parameter value to the previously set value. Parameter settings display
O Pressing the [ESC] key while editing the codes in any function
[ESC] Key
group makes the keypad display the first code of the function
group.
O Pressing the [ESC] key while moving through the modes
makes the keypad display Monitor mode.

[FWD] Key Used to operate the motor in the forward direction.

[REV] Key Used to operate the motor in the reversed direction.

[STOP/RESET] Used to stop motor operation.

Key Used to reset the inverter following fault or failure condition.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 31 32 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

Names displayed in monitor mode and parameter settings No. Name Display Description
No. Names displayed in monitor mode No. Names displayed in parameter settings
J Jog frequency command
1 Mode 1 Mode
R Int 485 frequency command
2 Operating/frequency command 2 Group
1 ~9, A~F Multi-step frequency command
3 Multi-functional key settings 3 Multi-functional key settings
JOG Key Keypad JOG operation mode
4 Inverter operation status 4 Inverter operation status
Multi-functional Local/Remote Able to select either local or remote operation
3
5 Items displayed in the status window 5 Items displayed in the status window key settings
Register or delete user group parameters in parameter
6 Monitor mode display 1 6 Display parameters UserGrpSelKey
mode
7 Monitor mode display 2 7 Available settings range STP Motor stopped
8 Monitor mode display 3 8 Existing setting values FWD Operating in forward direction
9 Monitor mode cursor 9 Factory default values REV Operating in reverse direction
10 Code numbers and names DC DC output
Inverter WAN Warning
4 operation
Display details status STL Stall
No. Name Display Description SPS Speed Search
MON Monitor Mode OSS S/W overcurrent protective function is on
PAR Parameter Mode OSH H/W overcurrent protective function is on
1 Mode
TRP Trip Mode TUN Auto Tuning
CNF Config Mode
K Keypad operation command
O Field Bus communication option operation command
Operation
A Application option operation command
commands
R Internal 485 operation command
T Terminal operation command
K Keypad frequency command

2 V V1 input frequency command

P Pulse input frequency command
Frequency command for UP operation (Up - Down
Frequency U
operation)
commands
Frequency command for DOWN operation (Up - Down
D
operation)
Frequency command for STOP operation (Up - Down
S
operation)
O FBus Option frequency command

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 33 34 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

3.1.3 Display Modes Table of Display Modes

The SX2000 inverter uses 5 modes to monitor or configure different functions. The parameters in The following table lists the 5 display modes used to control the inverter functions.
Parameter mode are divided into smaller groups of relevant functions. Press the [Mode] key to
change to Parameter mode. Keypad
Mode Name Description
Display
Displays the inverter’s operation status information. In this
mode, information including the inverter’s frequency
Monitor mode MON
reference, operation frequency, output current, and voltage
may be monitored.
Used to configure the functions required to operate the
Parameter mode PAR inverter. These functions are divided into 14 groups based
on purpose and complexity.
Used to monitor the inverter’s fault trip information, including
the previous fault trip history.
When a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the
Trip mode TRP operation frequency, output current, and output voltage of
the inverter at the time of the fault may be monitored.
This mode is not displayed if the inverter is not at fault and
fault trip history does not exist.
Used to configure the inverter features that are not directly
related to the operation of the inverter. The settings you can
configure in the Config mode include keypad display
Config mode CNF
language options, monitor mode environment settings,
communication module display settings, and parameter
duplication and initialization.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 35 36 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

Parameter Setting Mode

3.2 Learning to Use the Keypad
The following table lists the functions groups under Parameter mode.
The keypad enables movement between groups and codes. It also enables users to select and
Function Group Name Keypad Display Description configure functions. At code level, you can set parameter values to turn specific functions on or off or
decide how the functions will be used. For detailed information on the codes in each function group,
Configures basic operation parameters. These include refer to 8. Table of Functions on page 230. Confirm the correct values (or the correct range of the
Drive DRV ACC/Dec time settings, operation command settings, values), then follow the examples below to configure the inverter with the keypad.
and functions necessary for operation.
Configures basic operation parameters. These
Basic BAS parameters include motor parameters and multi-step
frequency parameters. 3.2.1 Display Mode Selection
Configures acceleration or deceleration patterns,
Advanced ADV frequency limits, energy saving features, and, The following figure illustrates how the display modes change when you press the [Mode] button on
regeneration prevention features. the keypad. You can continue to press the [Mode] key until you get to the desired mode.
Configures the features related to speed search and
Control CON
KEB (kinetic energy buffering). User mode and Trip mode are not displayed when all the inverter settings are set to the factory
Configures input terminal–related features, including default (User mode must be configured before it is displayed on the keypad, and Trip mode is
Input Terminal IN
digital multi–functional inputs and analog inputs. displayed only when the inverter is at fault, or has previous trip fault history).
Configures output terminal–related features, including
Output Terminal OUT
digital multi–functional outputs and analog outputs.
Configures the USB-related features and communication
features for the RS-485, Modbus-RTU, Metasys N2, and
Communication COM
BACnet. Optional communication module related
features may be configured as well, if one is installed.
Configures functionsrelated to auto sequence operation
Application APP
and PID control.
Protection PRT Configures motor and inverter protection features.
Motor 2 (Secondary
M2 Configures the secondary motor-related features.
motor)
User Sequence USS
Used to implement simple sequences with various
User Sequence
USF function blocks.
Function

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 37 38 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

Mode selection in factory default condition O Parameter mode

O Press the [MODE] key.
O When the power is turned on, Monitor mode is displayed.
O Press the [MODE] key.

O Trip mode
O Press the [MODE] key.
O Parameter mode
O Press the [MODE] key.

O CNF mode
O Press the [MODE] key.
O Config (CNF) mode
O Press the [MODE] key.

O Monitor mode is displayed again.

O Monitor mode is displayed again.

Switching between groups when Trip mode is added

Trip mode is accessible only when the inverter has trip fault history. Refer to 4 Learning Basic
Features on page 55 for information about monitoring faults.

O When the power is turned on, Monitor mode is displayed.

O Press the [MODE] key.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 39 40 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

3.2.2 Switching Groups

Switching between Groups in Parameter Display Mode
Press the [MODE] key to display a specific mode. Modes displayed change in the following order:
After entering Parameter mode from Monitor mode, press the [‫ ]ڼ‬key to change the display as shown
below. Press the [‫ ]ۆ‬key to return to the previous mode.

O When the power is turned on, Monitor mode is displayed.

O Press the [MODE] key.

O Parameter mode
O Drive group is displayed.
O Press the [‫ ]ڼ‬key.

O Basic group (BAS)

O Press the [‫ ]ڼ‬key.

O Advanced group (ADV)

O Press the [‫ ]ڼ‬key seven times.

O Protection group (PRT)

O Press the [‫ ]ڼ‬key.

O Parameter mode Drive group (DRV) is displayed again.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 41 42 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

3.2.3 Navigating through the Codes (Functions) O Information about the first item in Monitor mode
(Frequency) is displayed.
Code Navigation in Monitor mode

In monitor mode, press the [▲], [▼] key to display frequency, the output current, or voltage according
to the cursor position.

O When the power is turned on, Monitor mode is displayed.

O Information about the first item in Monitor mode
O The cursor appears to the left of the frequency (Frequency) disappears and the cursor appears to the left
information. of the first item.
O Press the [▼] key.

O Information about the second item in Monitor mode

(Output Current) is displayed. Code Navigation in Parameter mode
O Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
The following examples show you how to move through codes in different function groups (Drive
disappears.
group and Basic group) in Parameter mode. In parameter mode, press the [▲] or [▼] key to move to
the desired functions.

O When the power is on, monitor mode is displayed.

O Information about the second item in Monitor mode
O Press the [MODE] key.
(Output Current) disappears and the cursor reappears to
the left of the second item.
O Press the [▼] key.

O Drive group (DRV) in Parameter mode is displayed. If any

O Information about the third item in Monitor mode (Output
other group is displayed, press the [MODE] key until the
Voltage) is displayed.
Drive group is displayed, or press the [ESC] key.
O Wait for 2 seconds until the information on the display
disappears.

O Press the [▼] key to move to the second code (DRV-01)

O Information about the third item in Monitor mode (Output
of Drive group.
Voltage) disappears and the cursor appears to the left of
the third item. O Press the [‫ ]ڼ‬key
O Press the [▼] key twice.

O Basic group is displayed.

O Press the [▲] or [▼] key to move to the desired codes
and configure the inverter functions.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 43 44 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

3.2.4 Navigating Directly to Different Codes 3.2.5 Parameter settings

Parameter mode and Config mode allow direct jumps to specific codes. The code used for this Parameter settings available in Monitor mode
feature is called the Jump Code. The Jump Code is the first code of each mode. The Jump Code
feature is convenient when navigating for a code in a function group that has many codes. The SX2000 inverter allows basic parameters to be modified in Monitor mode. The following example
shows how to set the frequency.
The following example shows how to navigate directly to code DRV- 09 from the initial code (DRV-00
Jump Code) in the Drive group. O Make sure that the cursor is at the frequency reference
item and that the frequency setting is set to ‘Keypad’ in
O The Drive group (DRV) is displayed in Parameter mode. DRV-09.
Make sure that the fist code in the Drive group (DRV 00 O Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
Jump Code) is currently selected.
O Press the [PROG/ENT] key.

O When the cursor is on the frequency reference item,

detailed information is displayed and the cursor flashes
O The Code input screen is displayed and the cursor on the input line.
flashes. A flashing cursor indicates that it is waiting for
O Press the shift key to go to the desired frequency.
user input.

O Press the [▲] key to set the frequency to 10 Hz.

O Press the [▲] key to increase the number to 9, and then O Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
press the [PROG/ENT] key.

O The frequency is set to 10 Hz.

O DRV-09 (Control Mode) is displayed.

O Press the [ESC] key to go back to the initial code of the

Drive group.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 45 46 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

Parameter settings in other modes and groups 3.2.6 Monitoring the Operation
The following example shows how to change the frequency in the Drive group. This example can also How to use Monitor mode
be applied to other modes and groups.
There are 3 types of items that may be monitored in Monitor mode. Some items, including frequency,
O This is the initial display for Parameter mode. may be modified. Users can select the items to be displayed in Config mode (CNF).
O Press the [▼] key.
O Monitor mode
O Frequency, current, and voltage are set as the default
monitored items.
O The target frequency is displayed when the inverter is
stopped. The operation frequency is displayed while
O DRV-01 code is selected. operating.
O Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
O Configure the items to be displayed in Config mode
(CNF) 21~23.
O Press the [▼] key to go to 23.

O The frequency can be changed at the flashing digit.

O Press the [‫]ۆ‬/ [‫ ]ڼ‬key to move the cursor to the desired
digit. O Press the[PROG/ENT] key to change 23 to output
power.

O Press the [▲] key to enter 10 Hz, and then press the
[PROG/ENT] key.
O Press the[ESC] key to ensure that the third item in
Monitor mode is changed to output power.

O The frequency is changed to 10 Hz.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 47 48 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

Items available for monitoring How to use the status bar

Mode Number Display Setting Range Initial value
On the top-right corner of the display, there is a display item. This item is displayed as long as the
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0: Frequency inverter is on, regardless of the mode the inverter is operating in.
21 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0: Frequency
O Monitor mode
22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current 2:Output Current O In the top-right corner of the display, the frequency
3 Output Voltage reference is displayed (factory default).

4 Output Power
5 WHour Counter
6 DCLink Voltage O Enter Config mode and go to CNF-20 to select the item
7 DI State to display.
O Press the [PROG/ENT] key to change the item to ‘Output
8 DO State
Current.’
9 V1 Monitor[V] O On the top-right corner of the display, the unit changes
10 V1 Monitor[%] from ‘Frequency’ to ‘Current.’
CNF
13 V2 Monitor[V] O In monitor mode, the status bar item is changes to
23 Monitor Line-3 14 V2 Monitor[%] 3:Output Voltage ‘Current.’

15 I2 Monitor[mA]
16 I2 Monitor[%]
17 PID Output
18 PID ref Value
19 PID Fbk Value
20 Torque
21 Torque Limit
22 Trq Bias Ref
23 Speed Limit

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 49 50 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

3.3 Fault Monitoring 3.3.2 Monitoring Multiple Fault Trips

The following example shows how to monitor multiple faults that occur at the same time.

O If multiple fault trips occur at the same time, the number of

3.3.1 Monitoring Faults during Inverter Operation fault trips occurred is displayed on the right side of the fault
trip type.
The following example shows how to monitor faults that occurred during inverter operation.

O If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the inverter O Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
enters Trip mode automatically and displays the type of
fault trip that occurred.
O The types of fault trips that occurred are displayed.

O Press the [PROG/ENT] key.

O Press the [▼] key to view the information on the inverter at

the time of fault, including the output frequency, output
current, and operation type.
O The display returns to the screen it was at when the fault
trip occurred.

O When the inverter is reset and the fault trip is released, the
keypad display returns to the screen it was at when the
fault trip occurred.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 51 52 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning to Perform Basic Operations Learning to Perform Basic Operations

Fault trip history saving and monitoring

3.4 Parameter Initialization
When fault trips occur, the trip mode saves the content. Up to five fault trips are saved in the history.
The following example demonstrates how to revert all the parameter settings back to the factory
Trip mode saves when the inverter is reset, and when a Low Voltage fault trip occurs due to power
default (Parameter Initialization). Parameter initialization may be performed for separate groups in
outages. If a trip occurs more than five times, the information for the five previous trips are
Parameter mode as well.
automatically deleted.
O Monitor mode is displayed.
O If a fault trip occurs during inverter operation, the inverter
enters Trip mode automatically and displays the type of
fault trip that occurred.

O Press the [MODE] key to move to the Config (CNF) mode.

O After the [RESET] key or terminal is pressed, the fault trip
is saved automatically and returns to the screen it was on
before the fault trip occurred.

O Press the [MODE] key toenterTrip mode.

O Press the [▼] key to go to CNF-40 (Parameter Init).

O The most recent fault trip is saved in Last-1 code. O Press the [PROG/ENT] key.
O Press the [‫ ]ڼ‬key.

O In the list of options, select All Groups, and then press the
O The fault trip changes position and is saved in Last-2 [PROG/ENT] key.
code.

O When a fault trip occurs again, the content in Last-2 is

moved to Last-3.
O The parameter initialization option is displayed again when
the initialization is complete.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 53 54 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Basic Tasks Description Ref.

4 Learning Basic Features on this configuration, the inverter begins to run and the motor
accelerates as soon as power is supplied to the inverter. To
This chapter describes the basic features of the SX2000 inverter. Check the reference page in the use automatic start-up configuration, the operation command
table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features. terminals at the terminal block must be turned on.
Configures the inverter to start operating when the inverter is
Basic Tasks Description Ref.
reset following a fault trip. In this configuration, the inverter
Frequency reference source Configures the inverter to allow you to setup or modify
p.58 Automatic restart after reset starts to run and the motor accelerates as soon as the
configuration for the keypad frequency reference using the Keypad. p.75
of a fault trip condition inverter is reset following a fault trip condition.
Frequency reference source For automatic start-up configuration to work, the operation
configuration for the Configures the inverter to allow input voltages at the terminal p.59,
command terminals at the terminal block must be turned on.
terminal block (input block (V1, V2) and to setup or modify a frequency reference. p.65
Acc/Dec time configuration
voltage) Configures the acceleration and deceleration times for a
based on the Max. p.76
Frequency reference source motor based on a defined maximum frequency.
Frequency
configuration for the Configures the inverter to allow input currents at the terminal
p.63 Acc/Dec time configuration
terminal block (input block (I2) and to setup or modify a frequency reference. Configures acceleration and deceleration times for a motor
based on the frequency p.77
current) based on a defined frequency reference.
reference
Frequency reference source
Configures the inverter to allow input pulse at the terminal Multi-stage Acc/Dec time Configures multi-stage acceleration and deceleration times for
configuration for the p.65
block (TI) and to setup or modify a frequency reference. configuration using the a motor based on defined parameters for the multi-function p.78
terminal block (input pulse)
multi-function terminal terminals.
Frequency reference source Configures the inverter to allow communication signals from
Acc/Dec time transition
configuration for RS-485 upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs, and to setup or p.67 Enables modification of acceleration and deceleration
speed (frequency) p.79
communication modify a frequency reference. gradients without configuring the multi-functional terminals.
configuration
Frequency control using Enables the user to hold a frequency using analog inputs at
p.67 Enables modification of the acceleration and deceleration
analog inputs terminals. Acc/Dec pattern
gradient patterns. Basic patterns to choose from include linear p.80
Motor operation display Configures the display of motor operation values. Motor configuration
p.68 and S-curve patterns.
options operation is displayed either in frequency (Hz) or speed (rpm).
Stops the current acceleration or deceleration and controls
Multi-step speed Configures multi-step frequency operations by receiving an Acc/Dec stop command motor operation at a constant speed. Multi-function terminals p.83
p.68
(frequency) configuration input at the terminals defined for each step frequency. must be configured for this command .
Command source
Configures the inverter to allow the manual operation of the Configures the inverter to run a motor at a constant torque. To
configuration for keypad p.70
[FWD], [REV] and [Stop] keys. Linear V/F pattern operation maintain the required torque, the operating frequency may p.83
buttons
vary during operation.
Command source
Configures the inverter to accept inputs at the FX/RX Configures the inverter to run the motor at a square reduction
configuration for terminal p.70 Square reduction V/F
terminals. V/F pattern. Fans and pumps are appropriate loads for p.84
block inputs pattern operation
square reduction V/F operation.
Command source
Configures the inverter to accept communication signals from Enables the user to configure a V/F pattern to match the
configuration for RS-485 p.71 User V/F pattern
upper level controllers, such as PLCs or PCs. characteristics of a motor. This configuration is for special- p.85
communication configuration
purpose motor applications to achieve optimal performance.
Configures the inverter to switch between local and remote
Manual configuration of the inverter to produce a momentary
operation modes when the [ESC] key is pressed. p.86
Manual torque boost torque boost. This configuration is for loads that require a
When the inverter is operated using remote inputs (any input
large amount of starting torque, such as elevators or lifts.
Local/remote switching via other than one from the keypad), this configuration can be
p.72 Automatic configuration of the inverter that provides “auto
the [ESC] key used to perform maintenance on the inverter, without losing or
tuning” that produces a momentary torque boost. This
altering saved parameter settings. It can also be used to Automatic torque boost p.87
configuration is for loads that require a large amount of
override remotes and use the keypad immediately in
starting torque, such as elevators or lifts.
emergencies.
Adjusts the output voltage to the motor when the power
Motor rotation control Configures the inverter to limit a motor’s rotation direction. p.73
Output voltage adjustment supply to the inverter differs from the motor’s rated input p.87
Automatic start-up at power- Configures the inverter to start operating at power-on. With p.74
voltage.
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 55 56 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Basic Tasks Description Ref. 4.1 Setting Frequency Reference

Accelerating start is the general way to start motor operation.
The typical application configures the motor to accelerate to a The SX2000 inverter provides several methods to setup and modify a frequency reference for an
Accelerating start p.88
target frequency in response to a run command, however operation. The keypad, analog inputs [for example voltage (V1, V2) and current (I2) signals], or RS-
there may be other start or acceleration conditions defined. 485 (digital signals from higher-level controllers, such as PC or PLC) can be used.
Configures the inverter to perform DC braking before the
motor starts rotating again. This configuration is used when Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Start after DC braking p.88
the motor will be rotating before the voltage is supplied from 0 KeyPad-1
the inverter. 1 KeyPad-2
Deceleration stop is the typical method used to stop a motor. 2 V1
The motor decelerates to 0 Hz and stops on a stop Frequency 4 V2
Deceleration stop p.89 DRV 07 Ref Freq Src 0–12 -
command, however there may be other stop or deceleration reference source 5 I2
conditions defined. 6 Int 485
Configures the inverter to apply DC braking during motor 8 Field Bus
deceleration. The frequency at which DC braking occurs must 12 Pulse
Stopping by DC braking p.89
be defined and during deceleration, when the motor reaches
the defined frequency, DC braking is applied.
Configures the inverter to stop output to the motor using a
Free-run stop stop command. The motor will free-run until it slows down and p.91
stops.
4.1.1 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-1 setting)
Configures the inverter to provide optimal, motor deceleration, You can modify frequency reference by using the keypad and apply changes by pressing the [ENT]
Power braking p.91
without tripping over-voltage protection. key. To use the keypad as a frequency reference input source, go to 07 (Frequency reference source)
Start/maximum frequency Configures the frequency reference limits by defining a start code in the DRV group and change the parameter value to 0 (Keypad-1). Input the frequency
p.92
configuration frequency and a maximum frequency. reference for an operation.
Upper/lower frequency limit Configures the frequency reference limits by defining an
p.92
configuration upper limit and a lower limit. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Configures the inverter to avoid running a motor in Frequency
Frequency jump p.93 DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–12
mechanically resonating frequencies. reference source
nd
nd Used to configure the 2 operation mode and switch between * You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with DRV-20.
2 Operation Configuration p.94
the operation modes according to your requirements.
Multi-function input terminal Enables the user to improve the responsiveness of the multi-
p.95
control configuration function input terminals.
P2P communication Configures the inverter to share input and output devices with 4.1.2 Keypad as the Source (KeyPad-2 setting)
p.96
configuration other inverters.
Enables the user to monitor multiple inverters with one You can use the [▲] and [▼] keys to modify a frequency reference. To use this as a second option,
Multi-keypad configuration p.96
monitoring device. set the keypad as the source of the frequency reference, by going to 07 (Frequency reference source)
User sequence Enables the user to implement simple sequences using code in the DRV group and change the parameter value to 1 (Keypad-2). This allows frequency
p.98
configuration various function blocks. reference values to be increased or decreased by pressing the [▲] and [▼] keys.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 1 KeyPad-2 0–12 -
reference source
* You cannot set a frequency reference that exceeds the Max. Frequency, as configured with DRV-20.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 57 58 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.1.3 V1 Terminal as the Source 0–10 V Input Voltage Setting Details

Code Description
You can set and modify a frequency reference by setting voltage inputs when using the V1 terminal.
Configures the frequency reference at the maximum input voltage when a potentiometer
Use voltage inputs ranging from 0 to 10 V (unipolar) for forward only operation. Use voltage inputs
is connected to the control terminal block. A frequency set with code IN-01 becomes the
ranging from -10 to +10 V (bipolar) for both directions, where negative voltage inputs are used
maximum frequency only if the value set in code IN-11 (or IN-15) is 100(%).
reverse operations.
IN-01 Freq
O Set code IN-01 to 40.00 and use default values for codes IN-02–IN-16. Motor will run
at 100%
at 40.00 Hz when a 10 V input is provided at V1.
4.1.3.1 Setting a Frequency Reference for 0–10 V Input O Set code IN-11 to 50.00and use default values for codes IN-01–IN-16. Motor will run
at 30.00 Hz (50% of the default maximum frequency–60 Hz) when a 10 V input is
Set code 06 (V1 Polarity) to 0 (unipolar) in the Input Terminal group (IN). Use a voltage output from an provided at V1.
external source or use the voltage output from the VR terminal to provide inputs to V1. Refer to the IN-05 V1
diagrams below for the wiring required for each application. Configures the inverter to monitor the input voltage at V1.
Monitor[V]
V1 Filter may be used when there are large variations between reference frequencies.
Variations can be mitigated by increasing the time constant, but this will require an
increased response time.
The value t (time) indicates the time required for the frequency to reach 63% of the
reference, when external input voltages are provided in multiple steps.
[External source application] [Internal source (VR) application]

IN-07 V1
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Filter
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–12 -
source
0.00–
Frequency at maximum Maximum
01 Freq at 100% Max. Hz
analog input frequency
Frequency
V1 Monitor
05 V1 input monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
[V]
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 0 Unipolar 0–1 - [V1 Filter ]
V1 input filter time
07 V1 Filter 10 0–10000 ms These parameters are used to configure the gradient level and offset values of the
constant
Output Frequency, based on the Input Voltage.
V1 minimum input
08 V1 volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage
In
V1 output at minimum
09 V1 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
voltage (%)
V1 maximum input IN-08 V1
10 V1 Volt x2 10.00 0 .00– 12.00 V
voltage Volt x1–
V1 output at maximum IN-11 V1
11 V1 Perc y2 100.00 0–100 %
voltage (%) Perc y2
Rotation direction
16 V1 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
options
V1 0.00*, 0.04–
17 V1 Quantizing level 0.04 %
Quantizing 10.00
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected. [Volt x1–IN-11 V1 Perc y2]

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 59 60 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Code Description 4.1.3.2 Setting a Frequency Reference for -10–10 V Input

IN-16 V1 Inverts the direction of rotation. Set this code to 1 (Yes) if you need the motor to run in the
Set the 07 (Frequency reference source) code in the DRV group to 2 (V1), and then set code 06 (V1
Inverting opposite direction from the current rotation.
Polarity) to 1 (bipolar) in the Input Terminal group (IN). Use the output voltage from an external source
Quantizing may be used when the noise level is high in the analog input (V1 terminal) to provide input to V1.
signal.
Quantizing is useful when you are operating a noise-sensitive system, because it
suppresses any signal noise. However, quantizing will diminish system sensitivity
(resultant power of the output frequency will decrease based on the analog input).
You can also turn on the low-pass filter using code IN-07 to reduce the noise, but
[V1 terminal wiring]
increasing the value will reduce responsiveness and may cause pulsations (ripples) in
the output frequency.

Parameter values for quantizing refer to a percentage based on the maximum input.
Therefore, if the value is set to 1% of the analog maximum input (60 Hz), the output
frequency will increase or decrease by 0.6 Hz per 0.1V difference.

When the analog input is increased, an increase to the input equal to 75% of the set
value will change the output frequency, and then the frequency will increase according to
the set value. Likewise, when the analog input decreases, a decrease in the input equal
to 75% of the set value will make an initial change to the output frequency.
IN-17 V1
Quantizing As a result, the output frequency will be different at acceleration and deceleration,
mitigating the effect of analog input changes over the output frequency.

[Bipolar input voltage and output frequency]

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–12 -
source
Frequency at maximum Freq at 0– Max
01 60.00 Hz
analog input 100% Frequency
05 V1 input monitor V1 Monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V V
06 V1 polarity options V1 Polarity 1 Bipolar 0–1 -
12 V1 minimum input voltage V1- volt x1 0.00 10.00–0.00 V V
[V1 Quantizing] In V1 output at minimum -100.00–
13 V1- Perc y1 0.00 %
voltage (%) 0.00%
-12.00 –0.00
14 V1maximum input voltage V1- Volt x2 -10.00 V
V
V1 output at maximum -100.00–
15 V1- Perc y2 -100.00 %
voltage (%) 0.00%

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 61 62 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Rotational Directions for Different Voltage Inputs Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Command / Voltage Input voltage 50 I2 input monitor I2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–24.00 mA
Input 0–10 V -10–0 V 52 I2 input filter time constant I2 Filter 10 0–10000 ms
FWD Forward Reverse IN 53 I2 minimum input current I2 Curr x1 4.00 0.00–20.00 mA
REV Reverse Forward I2 output at minimum
54 I2 Perc y1 0.00 0–100 %
current (%)
55 I2 maximum input current I2 Curr x2 20.00 0.00–24.00 mA
-10–10 V Voltage Input Setting Details I2 output at maximum
56 I2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
Code Description current (%)
Sets the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency in relation to the 61 I2 rotation direction options I2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
input voltage. These codes are displayed only when IN-06 is set to 1 (bipolar). 0*, 0.04–
62 I2 Quantizing level I2 Quantizing 0.04 %
As an example, if the minimum input voltage (at V1) is set to -2 (V) with 10% 10.00
output ratio, and the maximum voltage is set to -8 (V) with 80% output ratio * Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
respectively, the output frequency will vary within the range of 6 - 48 Hz.

Input Current (I2) Setting Details

Code Description
Configures the frequency reference for operation at the maximum current (when
IN-56 is set to 100%).
O If IN-01 is set to 40.00 Hz, and default settings are used for IN-53–56, 20 mA
IN-12 V1- volt x1– IN-01 Freq at
input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency reference of 40.00 Hz.
IN-15 V1- Perc y2 100%
O If IN-56 is set to 50.00 (%), and default settings are used for IN-01 (60 Hz)
and IN-53–55, 20 mA input current (max) to I2 will produce a frequency
reference of 30.00 Hz (50% of 60 Hz).
IN-50 I2 Monitor Used to monitor input current at I2.
Configures the time for the operation frequency to reach 63% of target
IN-52 I2 Filter
frequency based on the input current at I2.
Configures the gradient level and off-set value of the output frequency.
[IN-12 V1-volt X1–IN-15 V1 Perc y]

For details about the 0 to +10 V analog inputs, refer to the code descriptions IN-
08 V1 volt x1–IN-11 V1 Perc y2 on page 60.

IN-53 I2 Curr x1–

4.1.3.3 Setting a Reference Frequency using Input Current (I2) IN-56 I2 Perc y2

You can set and modify a frequency reference using input current at the I2 terminal after selecting
current input at SW 2. Set the 07 (Frequency reference source) code in the DRV group to 5 (I2) and
apply 4–20 mA input current to I2.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency reference [Gradient and off-set configuration based on output frequency]
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 5 I2 0–12 -
source
Frequency at maximum 0– Maximum
01 Freq at 100% 60.00 Hz
IN analog input Frequency

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 63 64 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.1.4 Setting a Frequency Reference with Input Voltage (Terminal I2) Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
pulse
Set and modify a frequency reference using input voltage at I2 (V2) terminal by setting SW2 to V2. Output% at TI
Set the Frq (Frequency reference source) code in the DRV group to 4 (V2) and apply 0–12V input 96 TI Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 %
maximum pulse
voltage to I2 (=V2, Analog current/voltage input terminal). Codes IN-35–47 will not be displayed when Invert TI direction of
I2 is set to receive current input (07 code parameter is set to 5). 97 TI Inverting 0 No 0–1 -
rotation
0.00*, 0.04–
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit 98 TI quantizing level TI Quantizing 0.04 %
10.00
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 4 V2 0–12 - *Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.
source
35 V2 input display V2 Monitor 0.00 0.00–12.00 V
V2 input filter time
37 V2 Filter 10 0–10000 ms TI Pulse Input Setting Details
constant
Minimum V2 input Code Description
38 V2 Volt x1 0.00 0.00–10.00 V
voltage Configures the frequency reference at the maximum pulse input. The frequency
Output% at minimum reference is based on 100% of the value set with IN-96.
39 V2 Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
V2 voltage
IN-01 Freq at O If IN-01 is set to 40.00 and codes IN-93–96 are set at default, 32 kHz input to
IN Maximum V2 input
40 V2 Volt x2 10.00 0.00–10.00 V 100% TI yields a frequency reference of 40.00 Hz.
voltage
O If IN-96 is set to 50.00 and codes IN-01, IN-93–95 are set at default, 32 kHz
Output% at maximum
41 V2 Perc y2 100.00 0.00–100.00 % input to the TI terminal yields a frequency reference of 30.00 Hz.
V2 voltage
IN-91 Pulse
Invert V2 rotational Displays the pulse frequency supplied at TI.
46 V2 Inverting 0 No 0–1 - Monitor
direction
Sets the time for the pulse input at TI to reach 63% of its nominal frequency
0.00*, 0.04– IN-92 TI Filter
47 V2 quantizing level V2 Quantizing 0.04 % (when the pulse frequency is supplied in multiple steps).
10.00
Configures the gradient level and offset values for the output frequency.
* Quantizing is disabled if ‘0’ is selected.

4.1.5 Setting a Frequency with TI Pulse Input

Set a frequency reference by setting the 07 (Frequency reference source) code in the DRV group to IN-93 TI Pls x1–
12 (Pulse) and providing 0–32.00 kHz pulse frequency to TI. IN-96 TI Perc y2

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Frequency reference
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 12 Pulse 0–12 -
source
Frequency at 0.00–
01 maximum analog Freq at 100% 60.00 Maximum Hz
input frequency
IN-97 TI Inverting–
91 Pulse input display Pulse Monitor 0.00 0.00–50.00 kHz Identical to IN-16–17 (refer to IN-16 V1 Inverting/IN-17. V1 Quantizing on page
IN-98 TI
TI input filter time 60).
92 TI Filter 10 0–9999 ms Quantizing
IN constant
TI input minimum
93 TI Pls x1 0.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
pulse
Output% at TI
94 TI Perc y1 0.00 0.00–100.00 %
minimum pulse
95 TI Input maximum TI Pls x2 32.00 0.00–32.00 kHz
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 65 66 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.1.6 Setting a Frequency Reference via RS-485 Communication 4.3 Changing the Displayed Units (Hz↔Rpm)
Control the inverter with upper-level controllers, such as PCs or PLCs, via RS-485 communication. You can change the units used to display the operational speed of the inverter by setting Dr. 21
Set 07 code in the DRV group to 6 (Int 485) and use the RS-485 signal input terminals (S+/S-/SG) for (Speed unit selection) to 0 (Hz) or 1 (Rpm). This function is available only with the LCD keypad.
communication. Refer to 7 RS-485 Communication Features on page 206.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Speed unit 0 Hz Display
Frequency reference DRV 21 Hz/Rpm Sel 0–1 -
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0–12 - selection 1 Rpm Display
source
Integrated RS-485
01 Int485 St ID - 1 1–250 -
communication inverter ID
0 ModBus RTU
02
Integrated communication
Int485 Proto 0
- 4.4 Setting Multi-step Frequency
protocol 1 Reserved
COM Integrated communication Int485
03 3 9600 bps 0–7 -
speed BaudR Multi-step operations can be carried out by assigning different speeds (or frequencies) to the Px
0 D8/PN/S1 terminals. Step 0 uses the frequency reference source set with the 07 code in the DRV group. Px
Integrated communication 1 D8/PN/S2 terminal parameter values 7 (Speed-L), 8 (Speed-M) and 9 (Speed-H) are recognized as binary
04 Int485 Mode 0–3 -
frame configuration 2 D8/PE/S1 commands and work in combination with Fx or Rx run commands. Select the frequency set in the
3 D8/PO/S1 BAS-50-BAS-60 (Multi-step frequency 1-7) code to operate the system.

4.2 Frequency Hold by Analog Input

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
If you set a frequency reference via analog input at the control terminal block, you can hold the
operation frequency of the inverter by assigning a multi-function input as the analog frequency hold Multi-step frequency Step Freq - 1– 0–Maximum
BAS 50–56 - Hz
terminal. The operation frequency will be fixed upon an analog input signal. 1–7 7 frequency
7 Speed-L -
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Px terminal Px Define (Px:
0 Keypad-1 65–71 8 Speed-M 0–54 -
configuration P1–P7)
1 Keypad-2 IN 9 Speed-H -
2 V1
Frequency 4 V2 Multi-step command
DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0–12 - 89 InCheck Time 1 1–5000 ms
reference source 5 I2 delay time
6 Int 485
8 Field Bus
12 Pulse
Px terminal Px Define(Px:
IN 65–71 21 Analog Hold 0–54 -
configuration P1–P7)

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 67 68 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Multi-step Frequency Setting Details

4.5 Command Source Configuration
Code Description Various devices can be selected as command source for SX2000 inverter. Input devices available to
BAS-50–56 select include keypad, multi-function input terminal, RS-485 communication and field bus adapter.
Configure multi-step frequency 1–7.
Step Freq - 1–7
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Choose the terminals to setup as multi-step inputs, and then set the relevant 0 Keypad
codes (IN-65–71) to 7(Speed-L), 8(Speed-M), or 9(Speed-H). 1 Fx/Rx-1
DRV 06 Command Source Cmd Source* 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–4 -
Provided that terminals P3, P4 and P5 have been set to Speed-L, Speed-M and 3 Int 485
Speed-H respectively, the following multi-step operation will be available. 4 Field Bus

4.5.1 The Keypad as a Command Input Device

The keypad can be selected as a command input device to send command signals to the inverter.
This is configured by setting the drv (command source) code to 0 (Keypad). Press the [RUN] key on
the keypad to start an operation, and the [STOP/RESET] key to end it.

group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source* 0 KeyPad 0–4 -

4.5.2 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Fwd/Rev Run Commands)

IN-65–71 Px Define Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by setting the
06 (command source) code in the DRV group to 1(Fx/Rx). Select 2 terminals for the forward and
reverse operations, and then set the relevant codes (2 of the 7 multi-function terminal codes, IN-65–
71 for P1–P7) to 1(Fx) and 2(Rx) respectively. This application enables both terminals to be turned on
or off at the same time, constituting a stop command that will cause the inverter to stop operation.
[An example of a multi-step operation]
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Speed Fx/Rx P7 P6 P5 DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–4 -
65–71 Px terminal Px Define(Px: 1 Fx
0 ü - - - IN 0–54 -
configuration P1– P7) 2 Rx
1 ü - - ü
2 ü - ü - Fwd/Rev Command by Multi-function Terminal – Setting Details
3 ü - ü ü Code Description
4 ü ü - - DRV-06 Cmd Source Set to 1(Fx/Rx-1).
Assign a terminal for forward (Fx) operation.
5 ü ü - ü IN-65–71 Px Define
Assign a terminal for reverse (Rx) operation.
6 ü ü ü -
7 ü ü ü ü
Set a time interval for the inverter to check for additional terminal block inputs
after receiving an input signal.
IN-89 InCheck
After adjusting IN-89 to 100ms and an input signal is received at P6, the inverter
Time
will search for inputs at other terminals for 100ms, before proceeding to
accelerate or decelerate based on P6’s configuration.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 69 70 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.5.3 Terminal Block as a Command Input Device (Run and Rotation 4.6 Local/Remote Mode Switching
Direction Commands)
Local/remote switching is useful for checking the operation of an inverter or to perform an inspection
Multi-function terminals can be selected as a command input device. This is configured by setting the while retaining all parameter values. Also, in an emergency, it can also be used to override control
06 (command source) code in the DRV group to 2 (Fx/Rx-2). Select 2 terminals for run and rotation and operate the system manually using the keypad.
direction commands, and then select the relevant codes (2 of the 7 multi-function terminal codes, IN-
65–71 for P1–P7) to 1(Fx) and 2(Rx) respectively. This application uses an Fx input as a run The [ESC] key is a programmable key that can be configured to carry out multiple functions.
command, and an Rx input to change a motor’s rotation direction (On-Rx, Off-Fx).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit DRV 90 [ESC] key functions - 2 Local/Remote 0–2 -
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source* 2 Fx/Rx-2 0–4 - Cmd
DRV 06 Command source 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–4 -
65–71 Px terminal Px Define (Px: P1 1 Fx Source*
IN 0–54 -
configuration – P7) 2 Rx

Run Command and Fwd/ Rev Change Command Using Multi-function Terminal Local/Remote Mode Switching Setting Details
Code Description
Setting Details Set DRV-90 to 2(Local/Remote) to perform local/remote switching using the [ESC] key.
Code Description Once the value is set, the inverter will automatically begin operating in remote mode.
DRV-06 Changing from local to remote will not alter any previously configured parameter
Set to 2 (Fx/Rx-2). DRV-90
Cmd Source values and the operation of the inverter will not change.
[ESC] key
IN-65–71 Px Assign a terminal for run command (Fx). Press the [ESC] key to switch the operation mode back to “local.” The SET light will
functions
Define Assign a terminal for changing rotation direction (Rx). flash, and the inverter will operate using the [RUN] key on the keypad. Press the [ESC]
key again to switch the operation mode back to “remote.” The SET light will turn off
and the inverter will operate according to the previous drv code configuration.

Note
Local/Remote Operation
O Full control of the inverter is available with the keypad during local operation (local operation).
O During local operation, jog commands will only work if one of the P1–P7 multi-function terminals
4.5.4 RS-485 Communication as a Command Input Device (codes IN-65–71) is set to 13(RUN Enable) and the relevant terminal is turned on.
O During remote operation (remote operation), the inverter will operate according to the previously
Internal RS-485 communication can be selected as a command input device by setting the 06
set frequency reference source and the command received from the input device.
(command source) code in the DRV group to 3(Int 485). This configuration uses upper level
controllers such as PCs or PLCs to control the inverter by transmitting and receiving signals via the O If ADV-10 (power-on run) is set to 0(No), the inverter will NOT operate on power-on even when the
S+, S-, and Sg terminals at the terminal block. For more details, refer to 7 RS-485 Communication following terminals are turned on:
Features on page 206.
- Fwd/Rev run (Fx/Rx) terminal
Setting - Fwd/Rev jog terminal (Fwd jog/Rev Jog)
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit - Pre-Excitation terminal
Range
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source* 3 Int 485 0–4 -
01 Integrated communication inverter ID Int485 St ID 1 1–250 - To operate the inverter manually with the keypad, switch to local mode. Use caution when
02 Integrated communication protocol Int485 Proto 0 ModBus RTU 0 - switching back to remote operation mode as the inverter will stop operating. If ADV-10 (power-on
COM 03 run) is set to 0(No), a command through the input terminals will work ONLY AFTER all the
Integrated communication speed Int485 BaudR 3 9600 bps 0–7 -
terminals listed above have been turned off and then turned on again.
Integrated communication frame
04 Int485 Mode 0 D8 / PN / S1 0–3 -
Setup

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 71 72 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

O If the inverter has been reset to clear a fault trip during an operation, the inverter will switch to local 4.8 Power-on Run
operation mode at power-on, and full control of the inverter will be with the keypad. The inverter will
stop operating when operation mode is switched from “local” to “remote”. In this case, a run A power-on command can be setup to start an inverter operation after powering up, based on
command through an input terminal will work ONLY AFTER all the input terminals have been terminal block operation commands (if they have been configured). To enable power-on run set the
turned off. drv (command source) code to 1(Fx/Rx-1) or 2 (Fx/Rx-2) in the DRV group.

Inverter Operation During Local/Remote Switching Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Switching operation mode from “remote” to “local” while the inverter is running will cause the inverter 1, Fx/Rx-1 or
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source* 0–4 -
to stop operating. Switching operation mode from “local” to “remote” however, will cause the inverter 2 Fx/Rx-2
to operate based on the command source: ADV 10 Power-on run Power-on Run 1 Yes 0–1 -
O Analog commands via terminal input: the inverter will continue to run without interruption based on
the command at the terminal block. If a reverse operation (Rx) signal is ON at the terminal block at
startup, the inverter will operate in the reverse direction even if it was running in the forward
direction in local operation mode before the reset.
O Digital source commands: all command sources except terminal block command sources (which
are analog sources) are digital command sources that include the keypad, LCD keypad, and
communication sources. The inverter stops operation when switching to remote operation mode,
and then starts operation when the next command is given.

Use local/remote operation mode switching only when it is necessary. Improper mode switching may
result in interruption of the inverter’s operation.

Note
4.7 Forward or Reverse Run Prevention
O A fault trip may be triggered if the inverter starts operation while a motor’s load (fan-type load) is in
The rotation direction of motors can be configured to prevent motors to only run in one direction. free-run state. To prevent this from happening, set bit4 to 1 in CON- 71 (speed search options) of
Pressing the [REV] key on the LCD keypad when direction prevention is configured, will cause the the Control group. The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
motor to decelerate to 0 Hz and stop. The inverter will remain on. O If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will begin its operation in a normal V/F pattern and
accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without power-on run enabled, the terminal
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit block command must first be turned off, and then turned on again to begin the inverter’s operation.
0 None
ADV 09 Run prevention options Run Prevent 1 Forward Prev 0–2 -
2 Reverse Prev

Forward/Reverse Run Prevention Setting Details Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin rotating
Code Description when the inverter starts up.

Choose a direction to prevent.

Setting Description
ADV-09 Run 0 None Do not set run prevention.
Prevent
1 Forward Prev Set forward run prevention.
2 Reverse Prev Set reverse run prevention.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 73 74 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.9 Reset and Restart 4.10 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Reset and restart operations can be setup for inverter operation following a fault trip, based on the
terminal block operation command (if it is configured). When a fault trip occurs, the inverter cuts off
the output and the motor will free-run. Another fault trip may be triggered if the inverter begins its 4.10.1 Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency
operation while motor load is in a free-run state.
Acc/Dec time values can be set based on maximum frequency, not on inverter operation frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit To set Acc/Dec time values based on maximum frequency, set BAS- 08 (Acc/Dec reference) in the
Cmd 1 Fx/Rx-1 or Basic group to 0 (Max Freq).
DRV 06 Command source 0–4 -
Source* 2 Fx/Rx-2
08 Reset restart setup RST Restart 1 Yes 0–1 Acceleration time set at the ACC (Acceleration time) code in the DRV group (DRV-03 in an LCD
Retry keypad) refers to the time required for the inverter to reach the maximum frequency from a stopped (0
PRT 09 No. of auto restart 0 0–10
Number Hz) state. Likewise, the value set at the Dec (deceleration time) code in the DRV group (DRV-04 in an
10 Auto restart delay time Retry Delay 1.0 0–60 sec LCD keypad) refers to the time required to return to a stopped state (0 Hz) from the maximum
frequency.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 sec
DRV
Maximum
20 Max Freq 60.00 40.00–400.00 Hz
frequency
Acc/Dec reference
08 Ramp T Mode 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
BAS frequency
09 Time scale Time scale 1 0.1sec 0–2 -

Acc/Dec Time Based on Maximum Frequency – Setting Details

Code Description
Note
Set the parameter value to 0 (Max Freq) to setup Acc/Dec time based on
O To prevent a repeat fault trip from occurring, set CON-71 (speed search options) bit 2 equal to 1. maximum frequency.
The inverter will perform a speed search at the beginning of the operation.
O If the speed search is not enabled, the inverter will start its operation in a normal V/F pattern and Configuration Description
accelerate the motor. If the inverter has been turned on without ‘reset and restart’ enabled, the 0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on maximum frequency.
terminal block command must be first turned off, and then turned on again to begin the inverter’s 1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on operating frequency.
operation.
If, for example, maximum frequency is 60.00 Hz, the Acc/Dec times are set to 5
BAS-08 seconds, and the frequency reference for operation is set at 30 Hz (half of 60 Hz),
Ramp T Mode the time required to reach 30 Hz therefore is 2.5 seconds (half of 5 seconds).
Use caution when operating the inverter with Power-on Run enabled as the motor will begin rotating
when the inverter starts up.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 75 76 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Code Description 4.10.3 Multi-step Acc/Dec Time Configuration

Use the time scale for all time-related values. It is particularly useful when a more
accurate Acc/Dec times are required because of load characteristics, or when the Acc/Dec times can be configured via a multi-function terminal by setting the DRV-03 (Acceleration
maximum time range needs to be extended. time) and DRV-04 (Deceleration time) codes in the DRV group.

BAS-09 Time Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Configuration Description
scale 03 Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec
0 0.01sec Sets 0.01 second as the minimum unit. DRV
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 sec
1 0.1sec Sets 0.1 second as the minimum unit. Multi-step acceleration
70–82 Acc Time 1–7 x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
2 1sec Sets 1 second as the minimum unit. time1–7
BAS
Multi-step deceleration
71–83 Dec Time 1–7 x.xx 0.0–600.0 sec
time1–7
Note that the range of maximum time values may change automatically when the units are changed. 11 XCEL-L
Px terminal Px Define
If for example, the acceleration time is set at 6000 seconds, a time scale change from 1 second to 65–71 12 XCEL-M 0–54 -
configuration (Px: P1–P7)
0.01 second will result in a modified acceleration time of 60.00 seconds. IN 49 XCEL-H
Multi-step command
89 In Check Time 1 1–5000 ms
delay time
4.10.2 Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency
Acc/Dec times can be set based on the time required to reach the next step frequency from the
existing operation frequency. To set the Acc/Dec time values based on the existing operation Acc/Dec Time Setup via Multi-function Terminals – Setting Details
frequency, set BAS- 08 (acc/dec reference) in the Basic group to 1 (Delta Freq). Code Description
BAS- 70–82
Cod Set multi-step acceleration time1–7.
Group Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Acc Time 1–7
e BAS-71–83
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec Set multi-step deceleration time1–7.
DRV Dec Time 1–7
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 30.0 0.0–600.0 sec Choose and configure the terminals to use for multi-step Acc/Dec time inputs.
BAS 08 Acc/Dec reference Ramp T Mode 1 Delta Freq 0–1 -
Configuration Description
Acc/Dec Time Based on Operation Frequency – Setting Details
11 XCEL-L Acc/Dec command-L
Code Description
Set the parameter value to 1 (Delta Freq) to set Acc/Dec times based on Maximum 12 XCEL-M Acc/Dec command-M
frequency. IN-65–71 49 XCEL-H Acc/Dec command-H
Configuration Description Px Define
(P1–P7)
0 Max Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Maximum frequency. Acc/Dec commands are recognized as binary code inputs and will control the
1 Delta Freq Set the Acc/Dec time based on Operation frequency. acceleration and deceleration based on parameter values set with BAS-70–82 and
BAS-71–83.
If Acc/Dec times are set to 5 seconds, and multiple frequency references are used in the
If, for example, the P6 and P7 terminals are set as XCEL-L and XCEL respectively,
operation in 2 steps, at 10 Hz and 30 Hz, each acceleration stage will take 5 seconds
BAS-08 the following operation will be available.
(refer to the graph below).
Ramp
T Mode

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 77 78 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Code Description Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency Setting Details

Code Description
After the Acc/Dec switch frequency has been set, Acc/Dec gradients configured
at BAS-70 and 71 will be used when the inverter’s operation frequency is at or
below the switch frequency. If the operation frequency exceeds the switch
frequency, the configured gradient level, configured for the ACC and Dec codes,
ADV-60
will be used.
Xcel Change Fr
If you configure the P1–P7 multi-function input terminals for multi-step Acc/Dec
gradients (XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H), the inverter will operate based on the
Acc/Dec inputs at the terminals instead of the Acc/Dec switch frequency
configurations.

Acc/Dec time P7 P6
0 - -
1 - ü
2 ü -
3 ü ü
Set the time for the inverter to check for other terminal block inputs. If IN-89 is set to
IN-89 In 100ms and a signal is supplied to the P6 terminal, the inverter searches for other
Check Time inputs over the next 100ms. When the time expires, the Acc/Dec time will be set
based on the input received at P6. 4.11 Acc/Dec Pattern Configuration
Acc/Dec gradient level patterns can be configured to enhance and smooth the inverter’s acceleration
and deceleration curves. Linear pattern features a linear increase or decrease to the output frequency,
at a fixed rate. For an S-curve pattern a smoother and more gradual increase or decrease of output
4.10.4 Configuring Acc/Dec Time Switch Frequency frequency, ideal for lift-type loads or elevator doors, etc. S-curve gradient level can be adjusted using
You can switch between two different sets of Acc/Dec times (Acc/Dec gradients) by configuring the codes ADV- 03–06 in the Advanced group.
switch frequency without configuring the multi-function terminals.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Ramp T
BAS 08 Acc/Dec reference 0 Max Freq 0–1 -
03 Acceleration time Acc Time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec mode
DRV 01 Acceleration pattern Acc Pattern 0 Linear -
04 Deceleration time Dec Time 10.0 0.0–600.0 sec 0–1
Multi-step 02 Deceleration pattern Dec Pattern 1 S-curve -
70 Acc Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec S-curve Acc start
acceleration time1 03 Acc S Start 40 1–100 %
BAS gradient
Multi-step
71 Dec Time-1 20.0 0.0–600.0 sec S-curve Acc end
deceleration time1 ADV 04 Acc S End 40 1–100 %
Acc/Dec time switch Xcel Change 0–Maximum gradient
ADV 60 30.00 Hz S-curve Dec start
frequency Frq frequency 05 Dec S Start 40 1–100 %
gradient
S-curve Dec end
06 Dec S End 40 1–100 %
gradient

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 79 80 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Acc/Dec Pattern Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the gradient level as acceleration starts when using an S-curve, Acc/Dec
pattern. ADV- 03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage, up to half of
total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and
ADV-03 Acc S Start
ADV-03 is set to 50%, ADV- 03 configures acceleration up to 30 Hz (half of 60
Hz).The inverter will operate S-curve acceleration in the 0-15 Hz frequency
range (50% of 30 Hz). Linear acceleration will be applied to the remaining
acceleration within the 15–30 Hz frequency range.
Sets the gradient level as acceleration ends when using an S-curve Acc/Dec
pattern. ADV- 03 defines S-curve gradient level as a percentage, above half
of total acceleration.
If the frequency reference and the maximum frequency are set at 60 Hz and
ADV-04 Acc S End ADV-04 is set to 50%, setting ADV- 04 configures acceleration to increase
from 30 Hz (half of 60 Hz) to 60 Hz (end of acceleration). Linear acceleration
will be applied within the 30-45 Hz frequency range. The inverter will perform
an S-curve acceleration for the remaining acceleration in the 45–60 Hz
frequency range.
ADV-05 Dec S Start Sets the rate of S-curve deceleration. Configuration for codes ADV-05 and
– ADV-06 may be performed the same way as configuring codes ADV-03 and
ADV-06 Dec S End ADV-04.

[Acceleration / deceleration S-curve parrten configuration]

Note
The Actual Acc/Dec time during an S-curve application

Actual acceleration time = user-configured acceleration time + user-configured acceleration time x

starting gradient level/2 + user-configured acceleration time x ending gradient level/2.

Actual deceleration time = user-configured deceleration time + user-configured deceleration time x

starting gradient level/2 + user-configured deceleration time x ending gradient level/2.

[Acceleration / deceleration pattern configuration]

Note that actual Acc/Dec times become greater than user defined Acc/Dec times when S-curve
Acc/Dec patterns are in use.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 81 82 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.12 Stopping the Acc/Dec Operation Code Description

starts voltage output. The inverter does not produce output voltage while the
Configure the multi-function input terminals to stop acceleration or deceleration and operate the frequency reference is lower than the set frequency. However, if a deceleration
inverter at a fixed frequency. stop is made while operating above the start frequency, output voltage will
continue until the operation frequency reaches a full-stop (0 Hz).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
65– Px terminal Px Define(Px: P1–
IN 25 XCEL Stop 0–54 -
71 configuration P7)

4.13.2 Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation

Square reduction V/F pattern is ideal for loads such as fans and pumps. It provides non-linear
acceleration and deceleration patterns to sustain torque throughout the whole frequency range.
4.13 V/F(Voltage/Frequency) Control Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
1 Square
Configure the inverter’s output voltages, gradient levels and output patterns to achieve a target output BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0–3 -
3 Square2
frequency with V/F control. The amount of of torque boost used during low frequency operations can
also be adjusted.
Square Reduction V/F pattern Operation - Setting Details
Code Description
4.13.1 Linear V/F Pattern Operation Sets the parameter value to 1(Square) or 3(Square2) according to the load’s start
characteristics.
A linear V/F pattern configures the inverter to increase or decrease the output voltage at a fixed rate
for different operation frequencies based on V/F characteristics. A linear V/F pattern is partcularly Setting Function
useful when a constant torque load is applied. BAS-07 V/F 1 Square The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 1.5
Pattern square of the operation frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit 3 Square2 The inverter produces output voltage proportional to 2
09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F 0–4 - square of the operation frequency. This setup is ideal for
DRV 18 Base frequency Base Freq 50.00 30.00–400.00 Hz variable torque loads such as fans or pumps.
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
BAS 07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 0 Linear 0–3 -

Linear V/F Pattern Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the base frequency. A base frequency is the inverter’s output frequency
DRV-18 Base Freq when running at its rated voltage. Refer to the motor’s rating plate to set this
parameter value.
DRV-19 Start Freq Sets the start frequency. A start frequency is a frequency at which the inverter
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 83 84 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.13.3 User V/F Pattern Operation 4.14 Torque Boost

The SX2000 inverter allows the configuration of user-defined V/F patterns to suit the load
characteristics of special motors.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit 4.14.1 Manual Torque Boost
User
07 V/F pattern V/F Pattern 2 0–3 - Manual torque boost enables users to adjust output voltage during low speed operation or motor start.
V/F
Increase low speed torque or improve motor starting properties by manually increasing output voltage.
41 User Frequency1 User Freq 1 12.50 0–Maximum frequency Hz
Configure manual torque boost while running loads that require high starting torque, such as lift-type
42 User Voltage1 User Volt 1 25 0–100 %
loads.
43 User Frequency2 User Freq 2 25.00 0–Maximum frequency Hz
BAS
44 User Voltage2 User Volt 2 50 0–100 % Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
45 User Frequency3 User Freq 3 37.50 0–Maximum frequency Hz 15 Torque boost options Torque Boost 0 Manual 0–1 -
46 User Voltage3 User Volt 3 75 0–100 % DRV 16 Forward torque boost Fwd Boost 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
47 User Frequency4 User Freq 4 50.00 0–Maximum frequency Hz 17 Reverse torque boost Rev Boost 2.0 0.0–15.0 %
48 User Voltage4 User Volt 4 100 0–100% %

User V/F pattern Setting Details Manual Torque Boost Setting Details
Code Description Code Description
Set the parameter values to assign arbitrary frequencies (User Freq 1–4) for DRV-16 Fwd Boost Set torque boost for forward operation.
BAS-41 User Freq 1–
start and maximum frequencies. Voltages can also be set to correspond DRV-17 Rev Boost Set torque boost for reverse operation.
BAS-48 User Volt 4
with each frequency, and for each user voltage (User Volt 1–4).
The 100% output voltage in the figure below is based on the parameter settings of BAS-15 (motor
rated voltage). If BAS-15 is set to 0 it will be based on the input voltage.

O When a normal induction motor is in use, care must be taken not to configure the output pattern Excessive torque boost will result in over-excitation and motor overheating .
away from a linear V/F pattern. Non-linear V/F patterns may cause insufficient motor torque or
motor overheating due to over-excitation.
O When a user V/F pattern is in use, forward torque boost (DRV-16) and reverse torque boost (DRV-
17) do not operate.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 85 86 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.14.2 Auto Torque Boost 4.16 Start Mode Setting

Auto torque boost enables the inverter to automatically calculate the amount of output voltage Select the start mode to use when the operation command is input with the motor in the stopped
required for torque boost based on the entered motor parameters. Because auto torque boost condition.
requires motor-related parameters such as stator resistance, inductance, and no-load current, auto
tuning (BAS-20) has to be performed before auto torque boost can be configured [Refer to 5.9 Auto 4.16.1 Acceleration Start
Tuning on page 130]. Similarly to manual torque boost, configure auto torque boost while running a
load that requires high starting torque, such as lift-type loads. Acceleration start is a general acceleration mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the motor
accelerates directly to the frequency reference when the command is input.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 15 torque boost mode Torque Boost 1 Auto 0–1 - Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 20 auto tuning Auto Tuning 3 Rs+Lsigma 0–6 - ADV 07 Start mode Start mode 0 Acc 0–1 -
4.16.2 Start After DC Braking
This start mode supplies a DC voltage for a set amount of time to provide DC braking before an
4.15 Output Voltage Setting inverter starts to accelerate a motor. If the motor continues to rotate due to its inertia, DC braking will
stop the motor, allowing the motor to accelerate from a stopped condition. DC braking can also be
Output voltage settings are required when a motor’s rated voltage differs from the input voltage to the used with a mechanical brake connected to a motor shaft when a constant torque load is applied, if a
inverter. Set BAS-15 to configure the motor’s rated operating voltage. The set voltage becomes the constant torque is required after the the mechanical brake is released.
output voltage of the inverter’s base frequency. When the inverter operates above the base frequency,
and when the motor’s voltage rating is lower than the input voltage at the inverter, the inverter adjusts Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
the voltage and supplies the motor with the voltage set at BAS-15 (motor rated voltage). If the motor’s 07 Start mode Start Mode 1 DC-Start 0–1 -
rated voltage is higher than the input voltage at the inverter, the inverter will supply the inverter input ADV 12 Start DC braking time DC-Start Time 0.00 0.00–60.00 sec
voltage to the motor. 13 DC Injection Level DC Inj Level 50 0–200 %

If BAS-15 (motor rated voltage) is set to 0, the inverter corrects the output voltage based on the input
voltage in the stopped condition. If the frequency is higher than the base frequency, when the input
voltage is lower than the parameter setting, the input voltage will be the inverter output voltage.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS 15 Motor rated voltage Rated Volt 0 0, 170–480 V

The amount of DC braking required is based on the motor’s rated current. Do not use DC braking
resistance values that can cause current draw to exceed the rated current of the inverter. If the DC
braking resistance is too high or brake time is too long, the motor may overheat or be damaged.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 87 88 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

DC Braking After Stop Setting Details

4.17 Stop Mode Setting
Code Description
Select a stop mode to stop the inverter operation. Set the time to block the inverter output before DC braking. If the inertia
of the load is great, or if DC braking frequency (ADV-17) is set too high,
ADV-14 DC-Block Time a fault trip may occur due to overcurrent conditions when the inverter
supplies DC voltage to the motor. Prevent overcurrent fault trips by
4.17.1 Deceleration Stop adjusting the output block time before DC braking.
ADV-15 DC-Brake Time Set the time duration for the DC voltage supply to the motor.
Deceleration stop is a general stop mode. If there are no extra settings applied, the motor decelerates Set the amount of DC braking to apply. The parameter setting is based
ADV-16 DC-Brake Level
down to 0 Hz and stops, as shown in the figure below. on the rated current of the motor.
Set the frequency to start DC braking. When the frequency is reached,
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit the inverter starts deceleration. If the dwell frequency is set lower than
ADV-17 DC-Brake Freq
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 - the DC braking frequency, dwell operation will not work and DC
braking will start instead.

4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking

When the operation frequency reaches the set value during deceleration (DC braking frequency), the
inverter stops the motor by supplying DC power to the motor. With a stop command input, the inverter
begins decelerating the motor. When the frequency reaches the DC braking frequency set at ADV-17,
the inverter supplies DC voltage to the motor and stops it. O Note that the motor can overheat or be damaged if excessive amount of DC braking is applied to
the motor, or DC braking time is set too long.
Setting O DC braking is configured based on the motor’s rated current. To prevent overheating or damaging
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range motors, do not set the current value higher than the inverter’s rated current.
08 Stop mode Stop Mode 0 Dec 0–4 -
Output block time
14 DC-Block Time 0.10 0.00–60.00 sec
before braking
ADV
15 DC braking time DC-Brake Time 1.00 0–60 sec
16 DC braking amount DC-Brake Level 50 0–200 %
17 DC braking frequency DC-Brake Freq 0.5 0.00–60.00 Hz

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 89 90 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.17.3 Free Run Stop 4.18 Frequency Limit

When the Operation command is off, the inverter output turns off, and the load stops due to residual Operation frequency can be limited by setting maximum frequency, start frequency, upper limit
inertia. frequency and lower limit frequency.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 08 Stop Method Stop Mode 2 Free-Run 0–4 -
4.18.1 Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
19 Start frequency Start Freq 0.50 0.01–10.00 Hz
DRV
20 Maximum frequency Max Freq 50.00 40.00–400.00 Hz

Frequency Limit Using Maximum Frequency and Start Frequency - Setting Details
Code Description
DRV-19 Set the lower limit value for speed unit parameters that are expressed in Hz or rpm. If
Start Freq an input frequency is lower than the start frequency, the parameter value will be 0.00.
Set upper and lower frequency limits. All frequency selections are restricted to
DRV-20 Max
frequencies from within the upper and lower limits.
Freq
This restriction also applies when you in input a frequency reference using the keypad.

Note that when there is high inertia on the output side and the motor is operating at high speed, the
4.18.2 Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequency Values
load’s inertia will cause the motor to continue rotating even if the inverter output is blocked. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
24 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0 No 0–1 -
Frequency lower limit 0.0–maximum
25 Freq Limit Lo 0.50 Hz
value frequency
ADV
4.17.4 Power Braking Frequency upper limit Maximum
minimum–
26 Freq Limit Hi maximum Hz
When the inverter’s DC voltage rises above a specified level due to motor regenerated energy, a value frequency
frequency
control is made to either adjust the deceleration gradient level or reaccelerate the motor in order to
reduce the regenerated energy. Power braking can be used when short deceleration times are Frequency Limit Using Upper and Lower Limit Frequencies - Setting Details
needed without brake resistors, or when optimum deceleration is needed without causing an over Code Description
voltage fault trip. The initial setting is 0 (No). Changing the setting to 1 (Yes) allows the setting
of frequencies between the lower limit frequency (ADV-25) and the upper limit
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit ADV-24 Freq Limit
frequency (ADV-26). When the setting is 0 (No), codes ADV-25 and ADV-26
ADV 08 Stop mode Stop Mode 4 Power Braking 0–4 - are not visible.
ADV-25 Freq Limit Set an upper limit frequency to all speed unit parameters that are expressed
Lo in Hz or rpm, except for the base frequency (DRV-18). Frequency cannot be
O To prevent overheating or damaging the motor, do not apply power braking to the loads that ADV-26 Freq Limit Hi set higher than the upper limit frequency.
require frequent deceleration.
O Stall prevention and power braking only operate during deceleration, and power braking takes
priority over stall prevention. In other words, when both PRT-50 (stall prevention and flux braking)
and ADV-08 (power braking) are set, power braking will take precedence and operate.
O Note that if deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load is too great, an overvoltage fault trip
may occur.
O Note that if a free run stop is used, the actual deceleration time can be longer than the pre-set
deceleration time.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 91 92 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.18.3 Frequency Jump 4.19 2nd Operation Mode Setting

Use frequency jump to avoid mechanical resonance frequencies. Jump through frequency bands Apply two types of operation modes and switch between them as required. For both the first and
when a motor accelerates and decelerates. Operation frequencies cannot be set within the pre-set second command source, set the frequency after shifting operation commands to the multi-function
frequency jump band. input terminal. Mode swiching can be used to stop remote control during an operation using the
communication option and to switch operation mode to operate via the local panel, or to operate the
When a frequency setting is increased, while the frequency parameter setting value (voltage, current,
inverter from another remote control location.
RS-485 communication, keypad setting, etc.) is within a jump frequency band , the frequency will be
maintained at the lower limit value of the frequency band. Then, the frequency will increase when the Select one of the multi-function terminals from codes IN- 65–71 and set the parameter value to 15
frequency parameter setting exceeds the range of frequencies used by the frequency jump band. (2nd Source).
LCD Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Display
06 Command source Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx-1 0–4 -
27 Frequency jump Jump Freq 0 No 0–1 - DRV Frequency reference
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency 07 Freq Ref Src 2 V1 0–12 -
28 Jump Lo 1 10.00 Hz source
lower limit1 upper limit 1 nd
04 2 Command source Cmd 2nd Src 0 Keypad 0–4 -
Jump frequency Jump frequency lower limit BAS nd
29 Jump Hi 1 15.00 Hz 2 Frequency reference
upper limit1 1–Maximum frequency 05 Freq 2nd Src 0 KeyPad-1 0–12 -
source
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency
30 Jump Lo 2 20.00 Hz Px Define
ADV lower limit 2 upper limit 2 IN 65–71 Px terminal configuration 15 2nd Source 0–54 -
(Px: P1–P7)
Jump frequency Jump frequency lower limit
31 Jump Hi 2 25.00 Hz
upper limit 2 2–Maximum frequency
Jump frequency 0.00–Jump frequency 2nd Operation Mode Setting Details
32 Jump Lo 3 30.00 Hz
lower limit 3 upper limit 3
Code Description
Jump frequency Jump frequency lower limit nd
33 Jump Hi 3 35.00 Hz If signals are provided to the multi-function terminal set as the 2 command
upper limit 3 3–Maximum frequency
BAS-04 Cmd 2nd source (2nd Source), the operation can be performed using the set values from
Src BAS-04-05 instead of the set values from the 06 and 07 codes in the DRV
BAS-05 Freq 2nd group.
Src The 2nd command source settings cannot be changed while operating with the
st
1 command source (Main Source).

nd
O When setting the multi-function terminal to the 2 command source (2nd Source) and input (On)
the signal, operation state is changed because the frequency setting and the Operation command
nd
will be changed to the 2 command. Before shifting input to the multi-function terminal, ensure that
nd
the 2 command is correctly set. Note that if the deceleration time is too short or inertia of the load
is too high, an overvoltage fault trip may occur.
O Depending on the parameter settings, the inverter may stop operating when you switch the
command modes.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 93 94 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.20 Multi-function Input Terminal Control 4.21 P2P Setting

Filter time constants and the type of multi-function input terminals can be configured to improve the The P2P function is used to share input and output devices between multiple inverters. To enable
response of input terminals P2P setting, RS-485 communication must be turned on .

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Inverters connected through P2P communication are designated as either a master or slaves . The
Multi-function input Master inverter controls the input and output of slave inverters. Slave inverters provide input and
85 DI On Delay 10 0–10000 ms output actions. When using the multi-function output, a slave inverter can select to use either the
terminal On filter
Multi-function input master inverter’s output or its own output. When using P2P communication, first designate the slave
86 DI Off Delay 3 0–10000 ms inverter and then the master inverter. If the master inverter is designated first, connected inverters
terminal Off filter
IN may interpret the condition as a loss of communication.
Multi-function input
87 DI NC/NO Sel 000 0000* - -
terminal selection
Master Parameter
Multi-function input
90 DI Status 000 0000* - - Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
terminal status
P2P Communication
COM 95 Int 485 Func 1 P2P Master 0–3 -
selection
Multi-function Input Terminal Control Setting Details 80 Analog input1 P2P In V1 0 0–12,000 %
Code Description -12,000–
81 Analog input2 P2P In I2 0 %
12,000
IN-85 DI On USS
If the input terminal’s state is not changed during the set time, when the terminal 82 Digital input P2P In DI 0 0–0x7F bit
Delay, IN-86 DI
receives an input, it is recognized as On or Off. 85 Analog output P2P Out AO1 0 0–10,000 %
Off Delay
88 Digital output P2P Out DO 0 0–0x03 bit
Select terminal contact types for each input terminal. The position of the
indicator light corresponds to the segment that is on as shown in the table below.
With the bottom segment on, it indicates that the terminal is configured as a A Slave Parameter
terminal (Normally Open) contact. With the top segment on, it indicates that the Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
terminal is configured as a B terminal (Normally Closed) contact. Terminals are P2P Communication
IN-87 DI NC/NO numbered P1–P7, from right to left. 95 Int 485 Func 2 P2P Slave 0–3 -
selection
Sel COM
P2P DO setting
Type B terminal status (Normally A terminal status (Normally 96 P2P OUT Sel 0 No 0–2 bit
selection
Closed) Open)
LCD
keypad P2P Setting Details
Code Description
Display the configuration of each contact. When a segment is configured as A COM-95 Int 485 Func Set master inverter to 1(P2P Master), slave inverter to 2(P2P Slave).
terminal using DRV-87, the On condition is indicated by the top segment turning USS-80–82 P2P Input Data Input data sent from the slave inverter.
on. The Off condition is indicated when the bottom segment is turned on. When USS-85, 88 P2P Output
Output data transmitted to the slave inverter.
contacts are configured as B terminals, the segment lights behave conversely. Data
IN-90 DI Status Terminals are numbered P1–P7, from right to left.

Type A terminal setting (On) A terminal setting (Off)

LCD
O P2P features work only with code version 1.00, IO S/W version 0.11, and keypad S/W version 1.07
keypad
or higher versions.
O Set the user sequence functions to use P2P features.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 95 96 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

4.22 Multi-keypad Setting 4.23 User Sequence Setting

Use multi-keypad settings to control more than one inverter with one keypad. To use this function, first User Sequence creates a simple sequence from a combination of different function blocks. The
configure RS-485 communication. sequence can comprise of a maximum of 18 steps using 29 function blocks and 30 void parameters.

The group of inverters to be controlled by the keypad will include a master inverter. The master 1 Loop refers to a single execution of a user configured sequence that contains a maximum of 18
inverter monitors the other inverters, and slave inverter responds to the master inverter’s input. When steps. Users can select a Loop Time of between 10-1,000 ms.
using multi-function output, a slave inverter can select to use either the master inverter’s output or its
own output. When using the multi keypad, first designate the slave inverter and then the master The codes for user sequences configuration can be found in the USS group (for user sequence
inverter. If the master inverter is designated first, connected inverters may interpret the condition as a settings) and the USF group (for function block settings).
loss of communication.
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Master Parameter Setting
Setting APP 02 User sequence activation User Seq En 0 0–1 -
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit User sequence operation
Range 01 User Seq Con 0 0–2 -
P2P Communication command
COM 95 Int 485 Func 3 KPD-Ready 0–3 - User sequence operation
selection 02 User Loop Time 0 0–5 -
03 Multi-keypad ID Multi KPD ID 3 3–99 - time
CNF 11–28 Output address link1–18 Link UserOut1–18 0 0–0xFFFF -
42 Multi-function key selection Multi Key Sel 4 Multi KPD 0–4 -
USS 31–60 Input value setting1–30 Void Para1–30 0 -9999–9999 -
80 Analog input 1 P2P In V1(-10–10 V) 0 0–12,000 %
Slave Parameter 81 Analog input 2 P2P In I2 0 -12,000 %
Setting 82 Digital input P2P In D 0 –12,000 bit
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit 85 Analog output P2P Out AO1 0 0–0x7F %
Range
01 Station ID Int485 St ID 3 3–99 - 88 Digital output P2P Out DO 0 0–0x03 bit
COM 01 User function 1 User Func1 0 0–28 -
95 P2P communication options Int 485 Func 3 KPD-Ready 0–3 -
02 User function input 1-A User Input 1-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
03 User function input 1-B User Input 1-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
Multi-keypad Setting Details 04 User function input 1-C User Input 1-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
Code Description -32767–
05 User function output 1 User Output 1 0 -
Prevents conflict by designating a unique identification value to an inverter. 32767
COM-01 Int485 St ID 06 User function 2 User Func2 0 0–28 -
Values can be selected from numbers between 3–99.
COM-95 Int 485 Func Set the value to 3 (KPD-Ready) for both master and slave inverter 07 User function input 2-A User Input 2-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
CNF-03 Multi KPD ID Select an inverter to monitor from the group of inverters. 08 User function input 2-B User Input 2-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
CNF-42 Multi key Sel Select a multi-function key type 4 (Multi KPD) . 09 User function input 2-C User Input 2-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
-32767–
USF 10 User function output 2 User Output 2 0 -
32767
11 User function 3 User Func3 0 0–28 -
12 User function input 3-A User Input 3-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
O Multi-keypad (Multi-KPD) features work only with code version 1.00, IO S/W version 0.11, and 13 User function input 3-B User Input 3-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
keypad S/W version 1.07 or higher versions. 14 User function input 3-C User Input 3-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
O The multi-keypad feature will not work when the multi-keypad ID (CNF-03 Multi-KPD ID) setting is -32767–
15 User function output 3 User Output 3 0 -
identical to the RS-485 communication station ID (CM-01 Int485 st ID) setting. 32767
O The master/slave setting cannot be changed while the inverter is operating in slave mode. 16 Uer function 4 User Func4 0 0–28 -
17 User function input 4-A User Input 4-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
18 User function input 4-B User Input 4-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
19 User function input 4-C User Input 4-C 0 0–0xFFFF -

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 97 98 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Parameter Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting Setting
-32767– 57 User function input 12-A User Input 12-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
20 User function output 4 User Output 4 0 -
32767 58 User function input 12-B User Input 12-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
21 User function 5 User Func5 0 0–28 - 59 User function input 12-C User Input 12-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
22 User function input 5-A User Input 5-A 0 0–0xFFFF - -32767–
60 User function output 12 User Output 12 0 -
23 User function input 5-B User Input 5-B 0 0–0xFFFF - 32767
24 User function input 5-C User Input 5-C 0 0–0xFFFF - 61 User function 13 User Func13 0 0–28 -
-32767– 62 User function input 13-A User Input 13-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
25 User function output 5 User Output 5 0 -
32767 63 User function input 13-B User Input 13-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
26 User function 6 User Func6 0 0–28 - 64 User function input 13-C User Input 13-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
27 User function input 6-A User Input 6-A 0 0–0xFFFF - -32767–
65 User function output 13 User Output 13 0 -
28 User function input 6-B User Input 6-B 0 0–0xFFFF - 32767
29 User function input 6-C User Input 6-C 0 0–0xFFFF - 66 User function 14 User Func14 0 0–28 -
-32767– 67 User function input 14-A User Input 14-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
30 User function output 6 User Output 6 0 -
32767 68 User function input14-B User Input 14-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
31 User function 7 User Func7 0 0–28 - 69 User function input 14-C User Input 14-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
32 User function input 7-A User Input 7-A 0 0–0xFFFF - -32767–
70 User function output14 User Output 14 0 -
33 User function input 7-B User Input 7-B 0 0–0xFFFF - 32767
34 User function input 7-C User Input 7-C 0 0–0xFFFF - 71 User function 15 User Func15 0 0–28 -
-32767– 72 User function input 15-A User Input 15-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
35 User function output 7 User Output 7 0 -
32767 73 User function input 15-B User Input 15-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
36 User function 8 User Func8 0 0–28 - 74 User function input 15-C User Input 15-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
37 User function input 8-A User Input 8-A 0 0–0xFFFF - -32767–
75 User function output 15 User Output 15 0 -
38 User function input8-B User Input 8-B 0 0–0xFFFF - 32767
39 User function input 8-C User Input 8-C 0 0–0xFFFF - 76 User function 16 User Func16 0 0–28 -
-32767– 77 User function input 16-A User Input 16-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
40 User function output 8 User Output 8 0 -
32767 78 User function input 16-B User Input 16-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
41 User function 9 User Func9 0 0–28 - 79 User function input 16-C User Input 16-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
42 User function input 9-A User Input 9-A 0 0–0xFFFF - -32767–
80 User function output 16 User Output 16 0 -
43 User function input 9-B User Input 9-B 0 0–0xFFFF - 32767
44 User function input 9-C User Input 9-C 0 0–0xFFFF - 81 User function 17 User Func17 0 0–28 -
-32767– 82 User function input 17-A User Input 17-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
45 User function output 9 User Output 9 0 -
32767 83 User function input 17-B User Input 17-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
46 User function 10 User Func10 0 0–28 - 84 User function input 17-C User Input 17-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
47 User function input 10-A User Input 10-A 0 0–0xFFFF - -32767–
85 User function output 17 User Output 17 0 -
48 User function input 10-B User Input 10-B 0 0–0xFFFF - 32767
49 User function input 10-C User Input 10-C 0 0–0xFFFF - 86 User function 18 User Func18 0 0–28 -
-32767– 87 User function input 18-A User Input 18-A 0 0–0xFFFF -
50 User function output 10 User Output 10 0 -
32767 88 User function input 18-B User Input 18-B 0 0–0xFFFF -
51 User function 11 User Func11 0 0–28 - 89 User function input 18-C User Input 18-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
52 User function input 11-A User Input 11-A 0 0–0xFFFF - -32767–
90 User function output 18 User Output 18 0 -
53 User function input 11-B User Input 11-B 0 0–0xFFFF - 32767
54 User function input 11-C User Input 11-C 0 0–0xFFFF -
-32767–
55 User function output 11 User Output 11 0 -
32767
56 User function 12 User Func12 0 0–28 -
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 99 100 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

User Sequence Setting Details Number Type Description

Code Description Remainder operation of A and B, A % B
8 REMAINDER
APP-02 User Seq En Display the parameter groups related to a user sequence. This operation does not use the C parameter.
Set Sequence Run and Sequence Stop with the keypad. Multiplication, division compound operation, (A x B)/C.
9 MPYDIV
USS-01 User Seq Con Parameters cannot be adjusted during an operation. To adjust If the C parameter is 0x0000, output the multiplication operation of (A x B).
parameters, the operation must be stopped. Comparison operation: if (A > B) the output is C; if (A </=B) the output is 0.
USS-02 User Loop Set the user sequence Loop Time. COMPARE-GT If the condition is met, the output parameter is C. If the condition is not met,
10
Time User sequence loop time can be set to 0.01s/0.02s/ 0.05s/0.1s/0.5s/1s. (greater than) the output is 0(False). If the C parameter is 0x0000 and if the condition is
Set parameters to connect 18 Function Blocks. If the input value is met, the output is 1(True).
0x0000, an output value cannot be used. COMPARE- Comparison operation; if (A >/= B) output is C; if (A<B) the output is 0.
USS-11–28 GTEQ If the condition is met, the output parameter is C. If the condition is not met,
To use the output value in step 1 for the frequency reference (Cmd 11
Link UserOut1–18 (great than or the output is 0(False). If the C parameter is 0x0000 and if the condition is
Frequency), input the communication address (0x1101) of the Cmd
frequency as the Link UserOut1 parameter. equal to) met, the output is 1(True).
USS-31–60 Void Set 30 void parameters. Use when constant (Const) parameter input is Comparison operation, if(A == B) then the output is C. For all other values
Para1–30 needed in the user function block. the output is 0.
COMPARE-
Set user defined functions for the 18 function blocks. 12 If the condition is met, the output parameter is C. if the condition is not met,
EQUAL
If the function block setting is invalid, the output of the User Output@ is -1. the output is 0(False). If the C parameter is 0x0000 and if the condition is
USF-01–90 met, the output is 1(True).
All the outputs from the User Output@ are read only, and can be used
with the user output link@ (Link UserOut@) of the USS group. Comparison operation, if(A != B) then the output is C. For all other values
the output is 0.
COMPARE-
13 If the condition is met, the output parameter is C. If the condition is not met,
NEQUAL
Function Block Parameter Structure the output is 0(False). If the C parameter is 0x0000 and if the condition is
Type Description met, the output is 1(True).
User Func @* Choose the function to perform in the function block. Adds 1 each time a user sequence completes a loop.
User Input @-A Communication address of the function’s first input parameter. A: Max Loop, B: Timer Run/Stop, C: Choose output mode.
User Input @-B Communication address of the function’s second input parameter. If input of B is 1, timer stops (output is 0). If input is 0, timer runs.
User Input @-C Communication address of the function’s third input parameter. 14 TIMER If input of C is 1, output the current timer value.
User Output @ Output value (Read Only) after performing the function block. If input of C is 0, output 1 when timer value exceeds A(Max) value.
If the C parameter is 0x0000, C will be recognized as 0.
* @ is the step number (1-18).
Timer overflow Initializes the timer value to 0.
Sets a limit for the A parameter.
User Function Operation Condition If input to A is between B and C, output the input to A.
Number Type Description 15 LIMIT If input to A is larger than B, output B. If input of A is smaller than C, output
0 NOP No Operation. C.
Addition operation, (A + B) + C B parameter must be greater than or equal to the C parameter.
1 ADD
If the C parameter is 0x0000, it will be recognized as 0. Output the AND operation, (A and B) and C.
16 AND
Subtraction operation, (A - B) – C If the C parameter is 0x0000, operate only with A, B.
2 SUB
If the C parameter is 0x0000, it will be recognized as 0. Output the OR operation, (A | B) | C.
17 OR
Addition andsubtraction compound operation, (A + B) – C If the C parameter is 0x0000, operate only with A, B.
3 ADDSUB
If the C parameter is 0x0000, it will be recognized as 0. Output the XOR operation, (A ^ B) ^ C.
18 XOR
Output the smallest value of the input values, MIN(A, B, C). If the C parameter is 0x0000, operate only with A, B.
4 MIN
If the C parameter is 0x0000, operate only with A, B. Output the AND/OR operation, (A andB) | C.
19 AND/OR
Output the largest value of the input values, MAX(A, B, C). If the C parameter is 0x0000, operate only with A, B.
5 MAX
If the C parameter is 0x0000, operate only with A, B. Output a value after selecting one of two inputs, if (A) then B otherwise C.
Output the absolute value of the A parameter, | A |. 20 SWITCH If the input at A is 1, the output will be B. If the input at A is 0, the output
6 ABS
This operation does not use the B, or C parameter. parameter will be C.
Output the negative value of the A parameter, -( A ). Test the B bit of the A parameter, BITTEST(A, B).
7 NEGATE 21 BITTEST
This operation does not use the B, or C parameter. If the B bit of the A input is 1, the output is 1. If it is 0, then the output is 0.
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 101 102 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Basic Features Learning Basic Features

Number Type Description 4.24 Fire Mode Operation

The input value of B must be between 0–16. If the value is higher than 16,
it will be recognized as 16. If input at B is 0, the output is always 0. This function is used to allow the inverter to ignore minor faults during emergency situations, such as
Set the B bit of the A parameter, BITSET(A, B). Output the changed value fire, and provides continuous operation to fire pumps.
after setting the B bit to input at A.
22 BITSET The input value of B must be between 0–16. If the value is higher than 16, When turned on, Fire mode forces the inverter to ignore all minor fault trips and repeat a Reset and
it will be recognized as 16. If the input at B is 0, the output is always 0. This Restart for major fault trips, regardless of the restart trial count limit. The retry delay time set at PRT-
operation does not use the C parameter. 10 (Retry Delay) still applies while the inverter performs a Reset and Restart.
Output the input at A as the B filter gain time constant, B x US-02 (US Loop
Time). Fire Mode Parameter Settings
23 BITCLEAR In the above formula, set the time when the output of A reaches 62.2%
of the B parameter = an input greater than 0. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
C stands for the filter operation. If it is 0, the operation is started.
Fire Mode
Output the input at A as the B filter gains time constant, B x US-02 (US 80 Fire Mode selection 2 Fire Mode 0–3 -
Sel
LOWPASSFIL Loop Time.
24 Fire Mode
TER In the above formula, set the time when the output of A reaches 62.2% 81 Fire Mode frequency 0-60 0–60
ADV Freq
C stands for the filter operation. If it is 0, the operation is started.
82 Fire Mode run direction Fire Mode Dir 0–1 0–1
P, I gain = A, B parameter input, then output as C.
Fire Mode operation Fire Mode
Conditions for PI_PROCESS output: C = 0: Const PI, 83 Not configurable 0–3 -
count Cnt
C = 1: PI_PROCESS-B >= PI_PROCESS-OUT >= 0,
25 PI_CONTROL 65– Px Define
C = 2: PI_PROCESS-B >= PI_PROCESS-OUT >= -(PI_PROCESS-B), IN Px terminal configuration 51 Fire Mode 0–54 -
71 (Px: P1– P7)
P gain = A/100, I gain = 1/(Bx Loop Time),
If there is an error with PI settings, output -1.
A is an input error, B is an output limit, C is the value of Const PI output. The inverter runs in Fire mode when ADV-80 (Fire Mode Sel) is set to ‘2 (Fire Mode)’, and the multi-
26 PI_PROCESS
Range of C is 0–32,767. function terminal (IN-65–71) configured for Fire mode (51: Fire Mode) is turned on. The Fire mode
Upcounts the pulses and then output the value- UPCOUNT(A, B, C). count increases by 1 at ADV-83 (Fire Mode Count) each time a Fire mode operation is run.
After receiving a trigger input (A), outputs are upcounted by C conditions. If
the B inputs is 1, do not operate and display 0. If the B inputs is 0, operate.
27 UPCOUNT If the C parameter is 0, upcount when the input at A changes from 0 to 1.
If the C parameter is 1, upcount when the input at A is changed from 1 to 0.
If the C parameter is 2, upcount whenever the input at A changes.
Output range is: 0–32767 Fire mode operation may result in inverter malfunction. Note that Fire mode operation voids the
Downcounts the pulses and then output the value-DOWNCOUNT(A, B,C). product warranty – the inverter is covered by the product warranty only when the Fire mode count is
After receiving a trigger input (A), outputs are downcounted by C ‘0.’
28 DOWNCOUNT conditions. If the B input is 1, do not operate and display the initial value of
C. If the B input is 0, operate.
Downcounts when the A parameter changes from 0 to 1.

Note
The Pl process block (Pl_PROCESS Block) must be used after the PI control block (PI_CONTROL
Block) for proper Pl control operation. Pl control operation cannot be performed if there is another
block between the two blocks, or if the blocks are placed in an incorrect order.

User sequence features work only with code version 1.00, IO S/W version 0.11, and keypad S/W
version 1.07 or higher versions.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 103 104 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Basic Features Learning Advanced Features

Fire Mode Function Setting Details

5 Learning Advanced Features
Code Description Details
This chapter describes the advanced features of the SX2000 inverter. Check the reference page in
The frequency set at ADV-81 (Fire mode frequency) is used for the table to see the detailed description for each of the advanced features.
ADV-81 Fire Fire mode
the inverter operation in Fire mode. The Fire mode frequency
Mode frequency Advanced Tasks Description Ref.
takes priority over the Jog frequency, Multi-step frequencies, and
frequency reference Use the main and auxiliary frequencies in the predefined formulas
the keypad input frequency.
Auxiliary frequency to create various operating conditions. Auxiliary frequency
When Fire mode operation is turned on, the inverter accelerates p.108
DRV-03 Acc operation operation is ideal for Draw Operation* as this feature enables fine-
for the time set at DRV-03 (Acc Time), and then decelerates tuning of operation speeds.
Time / Fire mode
based on the deceleration time set at DRV-04 (Dec Time). It stops Jog operation is a kind of a manual operation. The inverter
DRV-04 Dec Acc/Dec times
when the Px terminal input is turned off (Fire mode operation is Jog operation operates to a set of parameter settings predefined for Jog p.112
Time
turned off). operation, while the Jog command button is pressed.
Some fault trips are ignored during Fire mode operation. The fault Uses the upper and lower limit value switch output signals (i.e.
Up-down operation p.115
trip history is saved, but trip outputs are disabled even when they signals from a flow meter) as Acc/Dec commands to motors.
are configured at the multi-function output terminals. 3-wire operation is used to latch an input signal. This configuration
3-wire operation p.117
is used to operate the inverter by a push button.
Fault trips that are ignored in Fire mode This safety feature allows the inverter’s operation only after a
Safety operation signal is input to the multi-function terminal designated for the
BX, External Trip, Low Voltage Trip, Inverter Overheat, Inverter p.118
mode safety operation mode. This feature is useful when extra care is
Overload, Overload, Electrical Thermal Trip, Input/Output Open
needed in operating the inverter using the multi-purpose terminals.
Phase, Motor Overload, Fan Trip, No Motor Trips, and other
minor fault trips. Use this feature for the lift-type loads such as elevators, when the
Dwell operation torque needs to be maintained while the brakes are applied or p.119
released.
PRT-10
Fault trip process For the following fault trips, the inverter performs a Reset and This feature ensures that the motor rotates at a constant speed, by
Retry Delay Slip compensation p.121
Restart until the trip conditions are released. The retry delay time compensating for the motor slip as a load increases.
set at PRT-10 (Retry Delay) applies while the inverter performs a PID control provides constant automated control of flow, pressure,
PID control p.122
Reset and Restart. and temperature by adjusting the output frequency of the inverter.
Fault trips that force a Reset Restart in Fire mode Used to automatically measure the motor control parameters to
Auto-tuning p.130
Over Voltage, Over Current1(OC1), Ground Fault Trip optimize the inverter’s control mode performance.
An efficient mode to control magnetic flux and torque without
Sensorless vector special sensors. Efficiency is achieved through the high torque
p.133
The inverter stops operating when the following fault trips occur: control characteristics at low current when compared with the V/F control
mode.
Fault trips that stop inverter operation in Fire mode
H/W Diag, Over Current 2 (Arm-Short) Used to maintain the DC link voltage for as long as possible by
Energy buffering
controlling the inverter output frequency during power interruptions, p.140
operation
thus to delay a low voltage fault trip.
Energy saving Used to save energy by reducing the voltage supplied to motors
p.141
operation during low-load and no-load conditions.
Speed search Used to prevent fault trips when the inverter voltage is output while
p.144
operation the motor is idling or free-running.
Auto restart configuration is used to automatically restart the
Auto restart operation inverter when a trip condition is released, after the inverter stops p.147
operating due to activation of protective devices (fault trips).
Used to switch equipment operation by connecting two motors to
Second motor
one inverter. Configure and operate the second motor using the p.151
operation
terminal input defined for the second motor operation.
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 105 106 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Advanced Tasks Description Ref. 5.1 Operating with Auxiliary References

Commercial power
Used to switch the power source to the motor from the inverter
source switch p.152 Frequency references can be configured with various calculated conditions that use the main and
output to a commercial power source, or vice versa.
operation auxiliary frequency references simultaneously. The main frequency reference is used as the operating
Cooling fan control Used to control the cooling fan of the inverter. p.153 frequency, while auxiliary references are used to modify and fine-tune the main reference.
Set the timer value and control the On/Off state of the multi-
Timer settings p.164
function output and relay. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Used to control the On/Off operation of the load’s electronic Frequency reference
Brake control p.165 DRV 07 Freq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 0–12 -
braking system. source
Multi-function output Set standard values and turn On/Off the output relays or multi- Auxiliary frequency
p.166 01 Aux Ref Src 1 V1 0–4 -
On/Off control function output terminals according to the analog input value. reference source
Regeneration Auxiliary frequency
Used during a press operation to avoid motor regeneration, by
prevention for press p.167 BAS 02 reference calculation Aux Calc Type 0 M+(G*A) 0–7 -
increasing the motor operation speed.
operation. type
* Draw operation is an openloop tension control. This feature allows a constant tension to be applied Auxiliary frequency
03 Aux Ref Gain 0.0 -200.0–200.0 %
to the material that is drawn by a motor-driven device, by fine-tuning the motor speed using reference gain
operation frequencies that are proportional to a ratio of the main frequency reference. Px terminal
IN 65– 71 Px Define 40 dis Aux Ref - -
configuration

The table above lists the available calculated conditions for the main and auxiliary frequency
references. Refer to the table to see how the calculations apply to an example where the 07 code has
been set to 0(Keypad-1), and the inverter is operating at a main reference frequency of 30.00 Hz.
Signals at -10 – +10 V are received at terminal V1, with the reference gain set at 5%. In this example,
the resulting frequency reference is fine-tuned within the range of 27.00–33.00 Hz [Codes IN-01–16
must be set to the default values, and IN-06 (V1 Polarity), set to 1 (Bipolar)].

Auxiliary Reference Setting Details

Code Description
Set the input type to be used for the auxiliary frequency reference.

Configuration Description
0 None Auxiliary frequency reference is disabled.
1 V1 Sets the V1 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference.
3 V2 Sets the V2 (voltage) terminal at the control terminal block
BAS-01 Aux Ref Src
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW2 must
be set to “voltage”).
4 I2 Sets the I2 (current) terminal at the control terminal block
as the source of auxiliary frequency reference (SW2 must
be set to “current”).
5 Pulse Sets the TI (pulse) terminal at the control terminal block as
the source of auxiliary frequency reference.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 107 108 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description
Set the auxiliary reference gain with BAS-03 (Aux Ref Gain) to configure the Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #1
auxiliary reference and set the percentage to be reflected when calculating Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and V1 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary
the main reference. Note that items 4–7 below may result in either plus (+) or Frequency
minus (-) references (forward or reverse operation) even when unipolar
O Main frequency: Keypad (operation frequency 30 Hz)
analog inputs are used.
O Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz
Configuration Formula for frequency reference O Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): V1[Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz)
0 M+(G*A) Main reference+(BAS-03xBAS-01xIN-01) depending on the operation setting condition]
1 M*(G*A) x(BAS-03xBAS-01) O Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%
2 M/(G*A) Main reference/(BAS-03xBAS-01) O IN-01–32: Factory default
BAS-02 Aux Calc
3 M+{M*(G*A)} Main reference+{Main reference x(BAS-03xBAS-
Type Example: an input voltage of 6V is supplied to V1, and the frequency corresponding to 10 V is 60
01)}
4 M+G*2*(A-50) Main reference+BAS-03x2x(BAS-01–50)x IN-01 Hz. The table below shows the auxiliary frequency A as 36 Hz[=60 Hz X (6V/10 V)] or 60%[=
5 M*{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference x{BAS-03x2x(BAS-01–50)} 100% X (6V/10 V)].
6 M/{G*2*(A-50)} Main reference/{BAS-03x2x(BAS-01–50)}
7 M+M*G*2*(A-50) Main reference+Main reference x BAS-03x2x(BAS- Setting* Calculating final command frequency**
01–50)
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x36 Hz(A))=48 Hz
M: Main frequency reference (Hz or rpm) 1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x60%(A))=9 Hz
G: Auxiliary reference gain (%) 2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x60%(A))=100 Hz
A: Auxiliary frequency reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%) 3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x60%(A))}=39 Hz
BAS-03 Aux Ref Adjust the size of the input (BAS-01 Aux Ref Src) configured for auxiliary 4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=36 Hz
Gain frequency. 5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)}=3 Hz
Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 40(dis Aux Ref) and turn it on 6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–50%)}=300 Hz
IN-65–71 Px Define to disable the auxiliary frequency reference. The inverter will operate using 7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(60%(A)–50%)=33
the main frequency reference only. Hz
*M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary frequency
reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.

Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #2

Keypad Frequency Setting is Main Frequency and I2 Analog Voltage is Auxiliary Frequency
O Main frequency: Keypad (Operation frequency 30 Hz)
O Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz
O Auxiliary frequency setting (BAS-01): I2 [Display by percentage(%) or auxiliary frequency(Hz)
depending on the operation setting condition]
O Auxiliary reference gain setting (BAS-03): 50%
O IN-01–32: Factory default

Example: an input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20 mA
of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency A as 24 Hz(=60[Hz] X {(10.4[mA]-
4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] X {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA])/(20[mA] - 4[mA])}.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 109 110 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

*M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary frequency
Setting* Calculating final command frequency** reference (Hz or rpm) or gain (%).
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz **If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz.
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz Note
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
When the maximum frequency value is high, output frequency deviation may result due to analog
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36 Hz
input variation and deviations in the calculations.
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24 Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)} = -3
Hz(Reverse)
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)} = -300
Hz(Reverse) 5.2 Jog operation
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x (40%(A)–
The jog operation allows for a temporary control of the inverter. You can enter a jog operation
50%)=27 Hz
command using the multi-function terminals or by using the [ESC] key on the keypad.
*M: main frequency reference (Hz or rpm)/G: auxiliary reference gain (%)/A: auxiliary frequency
reference Hz or rpm) or gain (%). The jog operation is the second highest priority operation, after the dwell operation. If a jog operation
**If the frequency setting is changed to rpm, it is converted to rpm instead of Hz. is requested while operating the multi-step, up-down, or 3-wire operation modes, the jog operation
overrides all other operation modes.

Auxiliary Reference Operation Ex #3

V1 is Main Frequency and I2 is Auxiliary Frequency
5.2.1 Jog Operation 1-Forward Jog by Multi-function Terminal
O Main frequency: V1 (frequency command setting to 5V and is set to 30 Hz)
O Maximum frequency setting (DRV-20): 400 Hz The jog operation is available in either forward or reverse direction, using the keypad or multi-function
O Auxiliary frequency (BAS-01): I2[Display by percentage (%) or auxiliary frequency (Hz) terminal inputs. The table below lists parameter setting for a forward jog operation using the multi-
depending on the operation setting condition] function terminal inputs.
O Auxiliary reference gain (BAS-03): 50%
O IN-01–32: Factory default Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
0.50-
Example: an input current of 10.4 mA is applied to I2, with the frequency corresponding to 20 mA 11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 Maximum Hz
of 60 Hz. The table below shows auxiliary frequency Aas 24 Hz(=60[Hz]x{(10.4[mA]- frequency
4[mA])/(20[mA]-4[mA])} or 40%(=100[%] x {(10.4[mA] - 4[mA]) /(20 [mA] - 4[mA])}. DRV Jog operation
12 JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00-600.00 sec
acceleration time
Jog operation
Setting* Calculating final command frequency** 13 JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00-600.00 sec
deceleration time
0 M[Hz]+(G[%]*A[Hz]) 30 Hz(M)+(50%(G)x24 Hz(A))=42 Hz Px terminal Px Define(Px:
IN 65-71 6 JOG 0~54 -
1 M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)x(50%(G)x40%(A))=6 Hz configuration P1–P7)
2 M[Hz]/(G[%]*A[%]) 30 Hz(M)/(50%(G)x40%(A))=150 Hz
3 M[Hz]+{M[Hz]*(G[%]*A[%])} 30 Hz(M)+{30[Hz]x(50%(G)x40%(A))}=36 Hz
4 M[Hz]+G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])[Hz] 30 Hz(M)+50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)x60 Hz=24 Hz
5 M[HZ]*{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)x{50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)}=-3
Hz(Reverse)
6 M[HZ]/{G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%])} 30 Hz(M)/{50%(G)x2x(60%–40%)}=-300
Hz(Reverse)
7 M[HZ]+M[HZ]*G[%]*2*(A[%]-50[%]) 30 Hz(M)+30 Hz(M)x50%(G)x2x(40%(A)–50%)=27
Hz

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 111 112 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Forward Jog Description Details 5.2.2 Jog Operation 2-Fwd/Rev Jog by Multi-function Terminal
Code Description
For jog operation 1, an operation command must be entered to start operation, but while using jog
Select the jog frequency from P1- P7 and then select 6. Jog from IN-
operation 2, a terminal that is set for a forward or reverse jog also starts an operation. The priorities
65-71.
for frequency, Acc/Dec time and terminal block input during operation in relation to other operating
modes (Dwell, 3-wire, up/down, etc.) are identical to jog operation 1. If a different operation command
IN-65–71 Px Define is entered during a jog operation, it is ignored and the operation maintains the jog frequency.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter setting Setting Range Unit
0.50-Maximum
[Terminal settings for jog operation] 11 Jog frequency JOG Frequency 10.00 Hz
frequency
Jog operation
DRV-11 JOG Frequency Set the operation frequency. DRV 12 JOG Acc Time 20.00 0.00-600.00 sec
acceleration time
DRV-12 JOG Acc Time Set the acceleration speed. Operation
13 JOG Dec Time 30.00 0.00-600.00 sec
deceleration time
DRV-13 JOG Dec Time Set the deceleration speed. Px terminal Px Define(Px: P1- 46 FWD JOG
IN 65-71 0-54 -
configuration P7) 47 REV JOG

If a signal is entered at the jog terminal while an FX operation command is on, the operation
frequency changes to the jog frequency and the jog operation begins.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 113 114 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.2.3 Jog Operation by Keypad Up-down Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Group Code Name LCD Display
Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Select two terminals for up-down operation and set them to 17 (Up) and 18
JOG (Down), respectively. With the operation command input, acceleration begins
90 [ESC] key functions - 1 - -
DRV Key when the Up terminal signal is on. Acceleration stops and constant speed
06 Command source Cmd Source* 0 Keypad - - operation begins when the signal is off.
* Displayed under DRV-06 on the LCD keypad.
During operation, deceleration begins when the Down signal is on.
Set DRV-90 to 1(JOG Key) and set the DRV-06 code to 0(Keypad). When the [ESC] key is pressed, Deceleration stops and constant speed operation begins when both Up and
the SET display light flashes and the jog operation is ready to start. Pressing the [RUN] key starts the Down signals are entered at the same time.
operation and the inverter accelerates or decelerates to the designated jog frequency. Releasing the
IN-65-71 Px Define
[RUN] key stops the jog operation. Set the Acc/Dec time for the jog operation frequency at DRV-12
and DRV-13.

During a constant speed operation, the operating frequency is saved

automatically in the following conditions: the operation command (Fx or Rx) is
off, a fault trip occurs, or the power is off.

When the operation command is turned on again, or when the inverter

regains the power source or resumes to a normal operation from a fault trip, it
resumes operation at the saved frequency. To delete the saved frequency,
5.3 Up-down Operation use the multi-function terminal block. Set one of the multi-function terminals to
20 (U/D Clear) and apply signals to it during constant speed operation. The
The Acc/Dec time can be controlled through input at the multi-function terminal block. Similar to a saved frequency and the up-down operation configuration will be deleted.
flowmeter, the up-down operation can be applied easily to a system that uses the upper-lower limit ADV-65 U/D Save
switch signals for Acc/Dec commands. Mode

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Up-down operation
ADV 65 U/D Save Mode 1 Yes 0-1 -
frequency save
17 Up
Px terminal Px Define(Px: P1-
IN 65-71 18 Down 0-54 -
configuration P7)
20 U/D Clear

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 115 116 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.4 3-Wire Operation 5.5 Safe Operation Mode

The 3-wire operation latches the signal input (the signal stays on after the button is released), and is When the multi-function terminals are configured to operate in safe mode, operation commands can
used when operating the inverter with a push button. be entered in the Safe operation mode only. Safe operation mode is used to safely and carefully
control the inverter through the multi-function terminals.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 06 Command source Cmd Source* 1 Fx/Rx - 1 - - Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Px terminal Px Define(Px: Safe operation
IN 65–71 14 3-Wire 0-54 - 70 Run En Mode 1 DI Dependent - -
configuration P1–P7) selection
Safe operation stop
ADV 71 Run Dis Stop 0 Free-Run 0-2 -
mode
To enable the 3-wire operation, the following circuit sequence is necessary. The minimum input time (t) Safe operation
for 3-wire operation is 1ms, and the operation stops when both forward and reverse operation 72 Q-Stop Time 5.0 0.0-600.0 sec
deceleration time
commands are entered at the same time. Px terminal Px Define(Px:
IN 65–71 13 RUN Enable 0-54 -
configuration P1-P7)

Safe Operation Mode Setting Details

Code Description
From the multi-function terminals, select a terminal to operate in safe
IN-65–71 Px Define
operation mode and set it to 13 (RUN Enable).

Setting Function
ADV-70 Run En 0 Always Enable Enables safe operation mode.
[Terminal connections for 3-wire operation]
Mode 1 DI Dependent Recognizes the operation command from a multi-
function input terminal.

Set the operation of the inverter when the multi-function input terminal in safe
operation mode is off.

Setting Function
1 Free-Run Blocks the inverter output when the multi-function
terminal is off.
2 Q-Stop The deceleration time (Q-Stop Time) used in safe
ADV-71 Run Dis operation mode. It stops after deceleration and then
Stop the operation can resume only when the operation
command is entered again. The operation will not
[3-wire operation] begin if only the multi-function terminal is on.
3 Q-Stop The inverter decelerates to the deceleration time (Q-
Resume Stop Time) in safe operation mode. It stops after
deceleration. Then if the multi-function terminal is on,
the operation resumes as soon as the operation
command is entered again.

Sets the deceleration time when ADV-71 (Run Dis Stop) is set to 1 (Q-Stop) or
ADV-72 Q-Stop Time
2 (Q-Stop Resume).

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 117 118 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Note
5.6 Dwell Operation
Dwell operation does not work when:
The dwell operation is used to manitain torque during the application and release of the brakes on lift-
type loads. Inverter dwell operation is based on the Acc/Dec dwell frequency and the dwell time set O Dwell operation time is set to 0 sec or dwell frequency is set to 0 Hz.
by the user. The following points also affect dwell operation: Re-acceleration is attempted from stop or during deceleration, as only the first acceleration dwell
operation command is valid.
O Acceleration Dwell Operation: When an operation command runs, acceleration continues until
the acceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached within the acceleration dwell
operation time (Acc Dwell Time). After the Acc Dwell Time has passed, acceleration is carried out
based on the acceleration time and the operation speed that was originally set.
O Deceleration Dwell Operation: When a stop command is run, deceleration continues until the
deceleration dwell frequency and constant speed is reached within the deceleration dwell
operation time (Dec Dwell Freq). After the set time has passed, deceleration is carried out based
on the deceleration time that was originally set, then the operation stops. [Acceleration dwell operation]

When DRV-09 (Control Mode) is set to 0 (V/F), the inverter can be used for operations with dwell Although deceleration dwell operation is carried out whenever stop commands are entered and
frequency before opening the mechanical brake of lift-type loads, such as an elevator. the deceleration dwell frequency is passed through, it does not work during a deceleration by
simple frequency change (which is not a deceleration due to a stop operation), or during external
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit brake control applications.
Start frequency
Dwell frequency during
20 Acc Dwell Freq 5.00 – Maximum Hz
acceleration
frequency
Operation time during Acc Dwell
21 0.0 0.0–10.0 s
acceleration Time
ADV
Start frequency
Dwell frequency during Dec Dwell
22 5.00 – Maximum Hz
deceleration Freq
frequency [Deceleration dwell operation]
Operation time during Dec Dwell
23 0.0 0 .0-60.0 s
deceleration Time

When a dwell operation is carried out for a lift - type load before its mechanical brake is released,
motors can be damaged or their lifecyle reduced due to overflow current in the motor.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 119 120 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.7 Slip Compensation Operation 5.8 PID Control

Slip refers to the variation between the setting frequency (synchronous speed) and motor rotation Pid control is one of the most common auto-control methods. It uses a combination of proportional,
speed. As the load increases there can be variations between the setting frequency and motor integral, and differential (PID) control that provides more effective control for automated systems. The
rotation speed. Slip compensation is used for loads that require compensation of these speed functions of PID control that can be applied to the inverter operation are as follows:
variations.
Purpose Function
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Controls speed by using feedback about the existing speed level of
09 Control mode Control Mode 2 Slip Compen - - Speed control the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control maintains
DRV 0.75 kW (0.75 consistent speed or operates at the target speed.
14 Motor capacity Motor Capacity 2 0-15 -
kW based) Controls pressure by using feedback about the existing pressure level
Number of motor Pressure control of the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control maintains
11 Pole Number 4 2-48 -
poles consistent pressure or operates at the target pressure.
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 90 (0.75 kW based) 0-3000 rpm Controls flow by using feedback about the amount of existing flow in
Rated motor Flow control the equipment or machinery to be controlled. Control maintains
13 Rated Curr 3.6 (0.75 kW based) 1.0-1000.0 A
BAS current consistent flow or operates at a target flow.
Motor no-load Controls temperature by using feedback about the existing
14 Noload Curr 1.6 (0.75 kW based) 0.5-1000.0 A
current temperature level of the equipment or machinery to be controlled.
Temperature control
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 72 (0.75 kW based) 70-100 % Control maintains a consistent temperature or operates at a target
17 Load inertia rate Inertia Rate 0 (0.75 kW based) 0-8 - termperature.

Slip Compensation Operation Setting Details

Code Description
Set DRV-09 to 2 (Slip Compen) to carry out the slip compensation 5.8.1 PID Basic Operation
DRV-09 Control Mode
operation.
DRV-14 Motor Capacity Set the capacity of the motor connected to the inverter. PID operates by controlling the output frequency of the inverter, through automated system process
BAS-11 Pole Number Enter the number of poles from the motor rating plate. control to maintain speed, pressure, flow, temperature and tension.
BAS-12 Rated Slip Enter the number of rated rotations from the motor rating plate.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
BAS-13 Rated Curr Enter the rated current from the motor rating plate.
Application function
Enter the measured current when the load on the motor axis is removed 01 App Mode 2 Proc PID 0–2 -
selection
and when the motor is operated at the rated frequency. If no-load current
BAS-14 Noload Curr 16 PID output monitor PID Output - - -
is difficult to measure, enter a current equivalent to 30-50% of the rated
motor current. 17 PID reference monitor PID Ref Value - - -
BAS-16 Efficiency Enter the efficiency from the motor rating place. 18 PID feedback monitor PID Fdb Value - - -
Select load inertia based on motor inertia. -100.00-
19 PID reference setting PID Ref Set 50.00 %
100.00
Setting Function
20 PID reference source PID Ref Source 0 Keypad 0-11 -
0 Less than 10 times motor inertia
21 PID feedback source PID F/B Source 0 V1 0-10 -
1 10 times motor inertia APP
PID controller
2-8 More than 10 times motor inertia 22 PID P-Gain 50.0 0.0-1000.0 %
ܴ‫ ݉݌‬ൈ ܲ proportional gain
BAS-17 Inertia Rate ݂௦ ൌ ݂௥ െ PID controller integral
ͳʹͲ 23 PID I-Time 10.0 0.0-200.0 sec
time
݂௦ =Rated slip frequency PID controller mse
24 PID D-Time 0 0-1000
݂௥ =Rated frequency differential time c
‫=݉݌ݎ‬Number of the rated motor rotations PID controller feed-
ܲ=Number of motor poles 25 forward PID F-Gain 0.0 0-1000 %
compensation gain

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 121 122 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit PID Basic Operation Setting Details
Proportional gain Code Description
26 P Gain Scale 100.0 0.0-100.0 %
scale APP-01 App Mode Set the code to 2 (Proc PID) to select functions for the process PID.
27 PID output filter PID Out LPF 0 0-10000 ms
PID maximum -300.00- Displays the existing output value of the PID controller. The unit, gain, and
29 PID Limit Hi 60.00 Hz APP-16 PID Output
frequency 300.00 scale that were set at APP- 42-44 are applied on the display.
PID minimum -300.00- APP-17 PID Ref Displays the existing reference value set for the PID controller. The unit, gain,
30 PID Limit Lo 0.5 Hz
frequency 300.00 Value and scale that were set at APP- 42-44 are applied on the display.
31 PID output reverse PID Out Inv 0 No 0-1 -
32 PID output scale PID Out Scale 100.0 0.1-1000.0 % Displays the input value of the PID controller that is included in the latest
APP-18 PID Fdb
PID controller 0–Maximum feedback. The unit, gain, and scale that were set at APP- 42-44 are applied
34 Pre-PID Freq 0.00 Hz Value
motion frequency frequency on the display.
PID controller When APP-20 (PID control reference source) is set to 0 (Keypad), the
35 Pre-PID Exit 0.0 0.0-100.0 %
motion level APP-19 PID Ref Set reference value can be entered. If the reference source is set to any other
PID controller value, the setting values for APP-19 are void.
36 Pre-PID Delay 600 0-9999 sec
motion delay time
PID sleep mode Selects the reference input for the PID control. If the V1 terminal is set to PID
37 PID Sleep DT 60.0 0-999.9 sec
delay time feedback source (PID F/B Source), the V1 terminal cannot be set to the PID
PID sleep mode 0–Maximum reference source (PID Ref Source). To set V1 as a reference source, change
38 PID Sleep Freq 0.00 Hz
frequency frequency the feedback source.
PID WakeUp
39 PID wake-up level 35 0-100 %
Lev Setting Function
PID wake-up mode PID WakeUp 0 Keypad Keypad
40 0 Below Level 0-2 -
selection Mod 1 V1 -10-10 V input voltage terminal
PID controller unit 3 V2 I2 analog input terminal
42 PID Unit Sel 0 % 0-12 -
selection 4 I2 [When analog voltage/current input terminal selection
43 PID unit gain PID Unit Gain 100.0 0-300 % APP-20 PID Ref
switch (SW2) at the terminal block is set to I (current),
44 PID unit scale PID Unit Scale 2 x1 0-4 - Source
nd
input 4-20 mA current. If it is set to V (voltage), input 0–10
PID 2 proportional V voltage]
45 PID P2-Gain 100.00 0-1000 %
gain 5 Int. 485 RS-485 input terminal
22 I-Term Clear 7 FieldBus Communication command via a communication option
Px terminal Px Define (Px:
IN 65-71 23 PID Openloop 0-54 - card
configuration P1-P7)
24 P Gain2 11 Pulse TI Pulse input terminal (0-32 kHz Pulse input)

When using the keypad, the PID reference setting can be displayed at APP-
17. When using the LDC keypad, the PID reference setting can be monitored
from the config mode (CNF) -06-08, set to 17 (PID Ref Value).

Selects feedback input for PID control. Items can be selected as reference
input, except the keypad input (Keypad-1 and Keypad-2). Feedback cannot
be set to an input item that is identical to the item selected as the reference.
APP-21 PID F/B
For example, when Ap.20 (Ref Source) is set to 1 (V1), for APP- 21 (PID F/B
Source
Source), an input other than the V1 terminal must be selected. When using
the LCD keypad, the volume of feedback can be monitored using a code from
the config mode (CNF) -06-08, by setting it to 18 (PID Fbk Value).

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 123 124 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description Code Description

Sets the output ratio for differences (errors) between reference and feedback. Scale
APP-22 PID P-Gain,
If the Pgain is set to 50%, then 50% of the error is output. The setting range
APP-26 P Gain Scale The PID controller’s gain can be adjusted using the multi-function terminal.
for Pgain is 0.0-1,000%. For ratios below 0.1%, use APP-26 (P Gain Scale).
When a terminal is selected from IN-65-71 and set to 24 (P Gain2), and if the
APP-45 PID P2-Gain
Sets the time to output accumulated errors. When the error is 100%, the time selected terminal is entered, the gain set in APP-22 and APP-23 can be
taken for 100% output is set. When the integral time (PID I-Time) is set to 1 switched to the gain set in APP-45.
second, 100% output occurs after 1 second of the error remaining at 100%.
APP-23 PID I- Time
Differences in a normal state can be reduced by PID I Time. When the multi-
function terminal block is set to 21(I-Term Clear) and is turned on, all of the
accumulated errors are deleted. Note
Sets the output volume for the rate of change in errors. If the differential time When the PID switch operation (switching from PID operation to general operation) enters the multi-
APP-24 PID D-Time (PID D-Time) is set to 1ms and the rate of change in errors per sec is 100%, function input, [%] values are converted to [Hz] values. The normal PID output, PID OUT, is unipolar,
output occurs at 1% per 10ms. and is limited by APP-29 (PID Limit Hi) and APP-30 (PID Limit Lo). A calculation of 100.0% is based
Sets the ratio that adds the target to the PID output. Adjusting this value leads on the DRV-20 (Max Freq) parameter setting.
APP-25 PID F-Gain
to a faster response.
Used when the output of the PID controller changes too fast or the entire
system is unstable, due to severe oscillation. In general, a lower value
APP-27 PID Out LPF (default value=0) is used to speed up response time, but in some cases a
higher value increases stability. The higher the value, the more stable the PID
controller output is, but the slower the response time.
APP-29 PID Limit Hi,
Limits the output of the controller.
APP-30 PID Limit Lo
APP-32 PID Out
Adjusts the volume of the controller output.
Scale
Sets the unit of the control variable (available only on the LCD keypad).

Setting Function
0 % Displays a percentage without a physical quantity given.
1 Bar Various units of pressure can be selected.
2 mBar
3 Pa
4 kPa
APP-42 PID Unit Sel
5 Hz Displays the inverter output frequency or the motor rotation
6 rpm speed.
7 V Displays in voltage/current/power/horsepower.
8 I
9 kW
10 HP
11 °C Displays in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
12 °F
APP-43 PID Unit
Gain, Adjusts the size to fit the unit selected at APP-41 PID Unit Sel.
APP-44 PID Unit

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 125 126 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

[PID control block diagram] 5.8.2 Pre-PID Operation

When an operation command is entered that does not include PID control, general acceleration
occurs until the set frequency is reached. When the controlled variables increase to a particular point,
the PID operation begins.

Pre-PID Operation Setting Details

Code Description
When general acceleration is required, the frequency up to general acceleration
APP-34 Pre-PID
is entered. If Pre-PID Freq is set to 30 Hz, the general operation continues until
Freq
the control variable (PID feedback variable) set at APP- 35 is exceeded.
When the feedback variable of the PID controller is higher than the value set at
APP-35 Pre-PID
APP- 35, the PID control operation begins. However, when a value is set for
Exit,
APP-36 (Pre-PID Delay) and a feedback variable less than the value set at
APP-36 Pre-PID
APP-35 is maintained for a set amount of time, the “pre-PID Fail” fault trip will
Delay
occur and the output will be blocked.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 127 128 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.8.3 PID Operation Sleep Mode 5.9 Auto Tuning

If the operation continues at a frequency lower than the set condition for PID operation, the PID
operation sleep mode starts. When PID operation sleep mode starts, the operation will stop until the
The motor parameters can be measured automatically and can be used for auto torque boost or
feedback exceeds the parameter value set at APP-39 (PID WakeUp Lev).
sensorless vector control.
PID Operation Sleep Mode Setting Details
Code Description Example - Auto Tuning Based on 0.75 kW, 200 V Motor
APP-37 PID Sleep DT, If an operation frequency lower than the value set at APP-38 is maintained
APP-38 PID Sleep for the time set at APP-37, the operation stops and the PID operation sleep
Freq mode starts. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Starts the PID operation when in PID operation sleep mode. DRV 14 Motor capacity Motor Capacity 1 0.75 kW 0-15 -
If APP- 40 is set to 0 (Below Level), the PID operation starts when the 11 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 2-48 -
APP-39 PID WakeUp feedback variable is less than the value set as the APP- 39 parameter 12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 40 0-3000 rpm
Lev, setting. If APP- 40 is set to 1 (Above Level), the operation starts when the 13 Rated motor current Rated Curr 3.6 1.0-1000.0 A
APP-40 PID WakeUp feedback variable is higher than the value set at APP- 39. If APP- 40 is set to Motor no-load
Mod 2 (Beyond Level), the operation starts when the difference between the 14 Noload curr 1.6 0.5-1000.0 A
current
reference value and the feedback variable is greater than the value set at
15 Motor rated voltage Rated Volt 220 170-480 V
APP- 39.
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 72 70-100 %
BAS 20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 0 None - -
Depends on the
21 Stator resistor Rs 26.00 Ω
motor setting
Depends on the
22 Leakage inductance Lsigma 179.4 mH
motor setting
Depends on the
23 Stator inductance Ls 1544 mH
motor setting
24 Rotor time constant Tr 145 25-5000 ms

Auto Tuning Default Parameter Setting

Stator
Motor Capacity Rated Current No-load Rated Slip Leakage
Resistor
(kW) (A) Current (A) Frequency(Hz) Inductance (mH)
(W)
5.8.4 PID Switching (PID Openloop) 0.2 1.1 0.8 3.33 14.0 40.4
When one of the multi-function terminals (IN-65-71) is set to 23 (PID Openloop) and is turned on, the 0.4 2.4 1.4 3.33 6.70 26.9
PID operation stops and is switched to general operation. When the terminal turns off, the PID 0.75 3.4 1.7 3.00 2.600 17.94
operation starts again. 1.5 6.4 2.6 2.67 1.170 9.29
2.2 8.6 3.3 2.33 0.840 6.63
3.7 13.8 5.0 2.33 0.500 4.48
200 V
5.5 21.0 7.1 1.50 0.314 3.19
7.5 28.2 9.3 1.33 0.169 2.844
11 40.0 12.4 1.00 0.120 1.488
15 53.6 15.5 1.00 0.084 1.118
18.5 65.6 19.0 1.00 0.068 0.819
22 76.8 21.5 1.00 0.056 0.948

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 129 130 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Stator Code Description

Motor Capacity Rated Current No-load Rated Slip Leakage
Resistor do not rotate the motor spindle on the load side.
(kW) (A) Current (A) Frequency(Hz) Inductance (mH)
(W) 3 Rs+Lsigma Measures parameters while the motor is rotating. The
0.2 0.7 0.5 3.33 28.00 121.2 (rotating measured motor parameters are used for auto torque boost
0.4 1.4 0.8 3.33 14.0 80.8 type) or sensorless vector control.
0.75 2.0 1.0 3.00 7.81 53.9 6 Tr (static Measures the rotor time constant (Tr) with the motor in the
1.5 3.7 1.5 2.67 3.52 27.9 type) stopped position and Control Mode (DRV-09) is set to IM
2.2 5.0 1.9 2.33 2.520 19.95 Sensorless.
3.7 8.0 2.9 2.33 1.500 13.45
BAS-14
5.5 12.1 4.1 1.50 0.940 9.62
Noload Curr, Displays motor parameters measured by auto tuning. For parameters that are not
7.5 16.3 5.4 1.33 0.520 8.53 BAS-21 included in the auto tuning measurement list, the default setting will be displayed.
400 V 11 23.2 7.2 1.00 0.360 4.48 Rs–BAS-24 Tr
15 31.0 9.0 1.00 0.250 3.38
18.5 38.0 11.0 1.00 0.168 2.457
22 44.5 12.5 1.00 0.168 2.844
30 60.5 16.9 1.00 1.266 2.133 O Perform auto tuning ONLY after the motor has completely stopped running.
37 74.4 20.1 1.00 1.014 1.704 O Before you run auto tuning, check the motor pole number, rated slip, rated current, rated volage
45 90.3 24.4 1.00 0.843 1.422 and efficiency on the motor’s rating plate and enter the data. The default parameter setting is used
55 106.6 28.8 1.00 0.693 1.167 for values that are not entered.
75 141.6 35.4 1.00 0.507 0.852 O When measuring all parameters after selecting 2 (All - static type) at BAS-20: compared with
rotation type auto tuning where parameters are measured while the motor is rotating, parameter
Auto Tuning Parameter Setting Details values measured with static auto tuning may be less accurate. Inaccuracy of the measured
Code Description parameters may degrade the performance of sensorless operation. Therefore, run static type auto
Select an auto tuning type and run it. Select one of the options and then press the tuning by selecting 2 (All) only when the motor cannot be rotated (when gearing and belts cannot
[ENT] key to run the auto tuning. be separated easily, or when the motor cannot be separated mechanically from the load).

Setting Function
0 None Auto tuning function is not enabled. Also, if you select one of
the auto tuning options and run it, the parameter value will
revert back to “0” when the auto tuning is complete.
1 All (rotating Measures all motor parameters, including stator resistance
type) (Rs), stator inductance (Lsigma), no-load current (Noload
Curr), rotor time constant (Tr), etc., while the motor is rotating.
As the motor is rotating while the parameters are being
BAS-20 Auto measured, if the load is connected to the motor spindle, the
Tuning parameters may not be measured accurately. For accurate
measurements, remove the load attached to the motor
spindle.
However, note that the rotor time constant (Tr) must be
measured in a stopped position.
2 All (static Measures all parameters while the motor is in the stopped
type) position. Measures stator resistance (Rs), stator inductance
(Lsigma), no-load current (Noload Curr), rotor time constant
(Tr), etc., while the motor is in the stopped position. As the
motor is not rotating while the parameters are measured, the
measurements are not affected when the load is connected
to the motor spindle. However, when measuring parameters,

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 131 132 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.10 Sensorless Vector Control Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Sensorless current
ACR SL P
Sensorless vector control is an operation to carry out vector control without the rotation speed 31* controller proportional 75 10-1000 -
Gain
feedback from the motor but with an estimation of the motor rotation speed calculated by the inverter. gain
Compared to V/F control, sensorless vector control can generate greater torque at a lower level of Sensorless current
32* ACR SL I Gain 120 10-1000 -
current. controller integral gain
Torque controller output Torque Out
52 0 0-2000 ms
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit filter LPF
09 Control mode Control Mode 4 IM Sensorless - - Torque Lmt
53 Torque limit setting 0 Keypad-1 0-12 -
Depends on the Src
DRV 14 Motor capacity Motor Capacity 0-15 -
motor capacity Forward direction
54 FWD +Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
18 Base frequency Base Freq 50 30-400 Hz retrograde torque limit
11 Motor pole number Pole Number 4 2-48 - Forward direction
55 FWD -Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
Depends on the regenerative torque limit
12 Rated slip speed Rated Slip 0-3000 Hz Reverse direction
motor capacity 56 REV +Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
Depends on the retrograde torque limit
13 Rated motor current Rated Curr 1-1000 A Reverse direction
motor capacity 57 REV -Trq Lmt 180.0 0.0-200.0 %
BAS Depends on the regenerative torque limit
14 Motor no-load current Noload curr 0.5-1000 A Flux estimator
motor capacity 85* Flux P Gain1 370 100-700 -
15 Rated motor voltage Rated Volt 220/380/440/480 170-480 V proportional gain 1
Depends on the Flux estimator
16 Motor efficiency Efficiency 70-100 % 86* Flux P Gain2 0 0-100 -
motor capacity proportional gain 2
20 Auto tuning Auto Tuning 1 All - - Flux estimator
87* Flux P Gain3 100 0-500 -
09 Pre-Excite time PreExTime 1.0 0.0-60.0 s proportional gain 3
10 Pre-Excite amount Flux Force 100.0 100.0-300.0 % Flux estimator integral
88* Flux I Gain1 50 0-200 -
Sensorless second gain SL2 G View gain 1
20 1 Yes 0-1 - Flux estimator integral
display setting Sel 89* Flux I Gain2 50 0-200 -
Sensorless speed gain2
ASR-SL P Depends on the Flux estimator integral
21 controller proportional 0-5000 % 90* Flux I Gain3 50 0-200 -
Gain1 motor capacity gain 3
gain1
Sensorless speed ASR-SL I Depends on the Sensorless voltage
22 10-9999 ms 91* SL Volt Comp1 30 0-60 -
controller integral gain 1 Gain1 motor capacity compensation 1
Sensorless speed Sensorless voltage
ASR-SL P Depends on the 92* SL Volt Comp2 20 0-60 -
23* controller proportional 1-1000 % compensation 2
Gain2 motor capacity Sensorless voltage
gain 2 93* SL Volt Comp3 20 0-60 -
CON compensation 3
Sensorless speed ASR-SL I Depends on the
24* 1-1000 % Sensorless field
controller integral gain 2 Gain2 motor capacity
Flux estimator Depends on the 94* weakening start SL FW Freq 95.0 80.0-110.0 %
26* Flux P Gain 10-200 % frequency
proportional gain motor capacity
Flux estimator integral Depends on the Sensorless gain
27* Flux I Gain 10-200 % 95* SL Fc Freq 2.00 0.00-8.00 Hz
gain motor capacity switching frequency
Speed estimator Depends on the *CON-23-32 and CON-85-95 can be displayed only when CON-20 is set to 1 (Yes).
28* S-Est P Gain1 0-32767 -
proportional gain motor capacity
Speed estimator Depends on the
29* S-Est I Gain1 100-1000 -
integral gain1 motor capacity
Speed estimator Depends on the
30* S-Est I Gain2 100-10000 -
integral gain2 motor capacity

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 133 134 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting Details

Code Description
For high-performance operation, the parameters of the motor connected to the inverter output must
be measured. Use auto tuning (BAS-20 Auto Tuning) to measure the parameters before you run Setting Function
sensorless vector operation. To run high-performance sensorless vector control, the inverter and the 0 No Does not display sensorless (II) vector control gain code.
motor must have the same capacity. If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity by 1 Yes Allows the user to set various gains applied when the
more than two levels, control may be inaccurate. In that case, change the control mode to V/F control. motor rotates faster than medium speed (approx. 1/2 of
When operating with sensorless vector control, do not connect multiple motors to the inverter output. CON-20 SL2 G View Sel the base frequency) through sensorless (II) vector control.
Codes available when setting to 1 (Yes): CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2/CON-
24 ASR-SL I Gain2/CON-26 Flux P Gain/CON-27 Flux I Gain Gain3/CON-
28 S-Est P Gain1/CON-29 S-Est I Gain1/CON-30 S-Est I Gain1/CON-31
5.10.1 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Setting ACR SL P Gain/CON-32 ACR SL I Gain

To run sensorless vector control operation, set DRV-09 (Control Mode) to 4 (IM sensorless), select Sets pre-excitation time. Pre-excitation is used to start the operation after
CON-09 PreExTime
the capacity of the motor you will use at DRV-14 (Motor Capacity), and select the appropriate codes performing excitation up to the motor’s rated flux.
to enter the rating plate information of the motor. Allows for the reduction of the pre-excitation time. The motor flux increases
up to the rated flux with the time constant as shown in the following figure.
Code Input (Motor Rating Plate Information)
To reduce the time taken to reach the rated flux, a higher motor flux base
DRV-18 Base Freq Base frequency value than the rated flux must be provided. When the magnetic flux
BAS-11 Pole Number Motor pole number reaches the rated flux, the provided motor flux base value is reduced.
BAS-12 Rated Slip Rated slip
BAS-13 Rated Curr Rated current
BAS-15 Rated Volt Rated voltage
BAS-16 Efficiency Efficiency (when no information is on the rating plate, default values are
used.) CON-10 Flux Force

After setting each code, set BAS-20 (Auto tuning) to 1 (All - rotation type) or 2 (All - static type) and
run auto tuning. Because rotation type auto tuning is more accurate than static type auto tuning,
select 1 (All - rotation type) and run auto tuning if you can rotate the motor.

Note
Excitation Current Sets the zero-speed control time (hold time) in the stopped position. The
A motor can be operated only after magnetic flux is generated by current flowing through a coil. The output is blocked after zero-speed operation for a set period when the
power supply used to generate the magnetic flux is called the excitation current. The stator coil that is motor decelerates and is stopped by a stop command.
used with the inverter does not have a permanent magnetic flux, so the magnetic flux must be
generated by supplying an excitation current to the coil before operating the motor.
CON-11 Hold Time

CON-21 ASR-SL P Changes the speed PI controller gain during sensorless vector control. For

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 135 136 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description Code Description

Gain1, a PI speed controller, P gain is a proportional gain for the speed deviation. 4 V2 of the terminal block.
CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 If speed deviation becomes higher than the torque the output command 5 I2
increases accordingly. As the value increases, the faster the speed 6 Int 485 Sets the torque limit with the communication
deviation decreases. The speed controller I gain is the integral gain for terminal of the terminal block.
speed deviation. It is the time taken for the gain to reach the rated torque The torque limit can be set up to 200% of the rated motor torque.
output command while a constant speed deviation continues. The lower
the value becomes, the faster the speed deviation decreases. CON-54 FWD +Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for forward retrograde (motoring) operation.
Appears only when 1 (Yes) is selected for CON-20 (SL2 G view Sel). The CON-55 FWD –Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for forward regenerative operation.
speed controller gain can be increased to more than the medium speed for
CON-56 REV +Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for reverse retrograde (motoring) operation.
sensorless vector control. CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is set as a percentage
of the low speed gain CON-21 ASR-SL P Gain1 - if P Gain 2 is less than CON-57 REV –Trq Lmt Sets the torque limit for reverse regenerative operation.
100.0%, the responsiveness decreases. For example, if CON-21 ASR-SL
Sets the maximum torque. For example, if IN-02 is set to 200% and an
P Gain1 is 50.0% and CON-23 ASR-SL P Gain2 is 50.0%, the actual
CON-23 ASR-SL P input voltage (V1) is used, the torque limit is 200% when 10 V is entered.
middle speed or faster speed controller P gain is 25.0%.
Gain2, However, when the VI terminal is set up with the factory default setting and
IN-02 Torque at 100%
CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2 the torque limit setup uses a method other than the keypad, check the
CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2 is also set as a percentage of the CON-22 ASR-
parameter settings in the monitor mode. In the Config Mode CNF.21-23
SL I Gain1. For I gain, the smaller the I gain 2 becomes, the slower the
(only displayed when using LCD keypad), select 21(Torque limit).
response time becomes. For example, if CON-22 ASR-SL I Gain1 is
100ms and CON-24 ASR-SL I Gain2 is 50.0%, the middle speed or faster Adjust output voltage compensation values for sensorless vector control.
speed controller I gain is 200 ms. The controller gain is set according to the CON-91-93 For output voltage compensation, refer to
default motor parameters and Acc/Dec time. SL Volt Comp1-3
Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide to on page 139.
CON-26 Flux P Gain,
CON-27 Flux I Gain, Sensorless vector control requires the rotor flux estimator. For the CON-52 Torque Out Sets the time constant for torque command by setting the torque controller
CON-85-87 Flux P adjustment of flux estimator gain, refer to LPF output filter.
Gain13,
CON-88-90 Flux I Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide to on page 139.
Gain1-3
Speed estimator gain for sensorless vector control can be adjusted. To Adjust the controller gain according to the load’s characteristics. However, the motor can overheat or
CON-28 S-Est P Gain1,
adjust speed estimator gain, refer to the system may become unstable depending on the controller gain settings.
CON-29 S-Est I Gain1,
CON-30 S-Est I Gain2
Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide to on page 139.
Note
Adjusts the P and I gains of the sensorless current controller. For the
CON-31 ACR SL P Speed controller gain can improve the speed control waveform while monitoring the changes in
adjustment of sensorless current controller gain, refer to
Gain, CON-32 ACR SL I speed. If speed deviation does not decrease quickly, increase the speed controller P gain or decrease
Gain I gain (time in ms). However, if the P gain is increased too high or I gain is decreased too low, severe
Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide to on page 139.
vibration may occur. If oscillation occurs in the speed waveform, try to increase I gain (ms) or reduce
Select a type of torque limit setting, using the keypad, terminal block P gain to adjust the waveform.
analog input (V1 and I2) or communication power. When setting torque
limit, adjust the torque size by limiting the speed controller output. Set the
retrograde and regenerative limits for forward and reverse operation.
CON-53 Torque Lmt Src
Setting Function
0 KeyPad-1 Sets the torque limit with the keypad.
1 KeyPad-2
2 V1 Sets the torque limit with the analog input terminal

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 137 138 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.10.2 Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide Problem Relevant function code Troubleshooting
base frequency or higher. CON-23 ASR-SL I decrements of 5%.
Problem Relevant function code Troubleshooting Gain2
Set the value of CON- 90 to be more than 3 At low speed (10 Hz or lower), increase the
times the value of BAS-24 or increase the value of CON-29 by increments of 5.
BAS-24 Tr CON-28 S-Est P
value of CON-10 by increments of 50%. If the The motor hunts as the load At mid speed (30 Hz or higher), increase the
CON-09 PreExTime Gain1
value of CON-10 is high, an overcurrent trip at increases. value of CON-28 by increments of 500. If the
CON-10 Flux Force CON-29 S-Est I Gain1
start can occur. In this case, reduce the value of parameter setting is too extreme, over current
The amount of starting CON-31 ACR SL P
CON-31 by decrements of 10. trip may occur at low speed.
torque is insufficient. Gain
CON-54–57 Trq Lmt Increase the value of Trg Lmt (CON-54-57) by The motor speed level Select 6. Tr (static type) from BAS- 24 and run
BAS-20 Auto Tuning
CON-93 SL Volt increments of 10%. decreases. BAS-24 Rotor time constant tuning.
Comp3 *Hunting: Symptom of irregular vibration of the equipment.
Increase the value of CON-93 by increments of
5.
The output frequency is
higher than the base
frequency during no-load
CON-91 SL Volt Decrease the value of CON-91 by decrements 5.11 Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation
Comp1 of 5.
operation at low speed (10
When the input power supply is disconnected, the inverter’s DC link voltage decreases, and a low
Hz or lower).
voltage trip occurs blocking the output. A kinetic energy buffering operation uses regenerative energy
If the motor hunts at low speed, increase the
generated by the motor during the blackout to maintain the DC link voltage. This extends the time for
value of CON-22 by increments of 50m/s, and if
CON-04 Carrier Freq a low voltage trip to occur, after an instantaneous power interruption.
hunting does not occur, increase the value of
The motor hunts or the CON-21 ASR-SL P
CON-21 to find the optimal operating condition. Parameter Setting
amount of torque is not Gain1 Group Code Name LCD Display Unit
If the amount of torque is insufficient, increase Setting Range
sufficient while the load is CON-22 ASR-SL I
the value of CON-93 by increments of 5.
increasing at low speed (10 Gain1 77 Kinetic energy buffering selection KEB Select 1 Yes - -
If the motor hunts or the amount of torque is
Hz or lower). CON-93 SL Volt 78 Kinetic energy buffering start level KEB Start Lev 130 110–140 %
insufficient in the 5-10 Hz range, decrease the CON
Comp3 79 Kinetic energy buffering stop level KEB Stop Lev 135 125–145 %
value of CON-04 by increments of 1 kHz (if
80 Kinetic energy buffering gain KEB Gain 1000 1–20000 -
CON-04 is set to exceed 3 kHz).
The motor hunts or CON-92 SL Volt Kinetic Energy Buffering Operation Setting Details
overcurrent trip occurs in Comp2 Increase the value of CON-92-93 by
Code Description
regenerative load at low CON-93 SL Volt increments of 5 at the same time.
speed (10 Hz or lower). Comp3 Select the kinetic energy buffering operation when the input power is
Over voltage trip occurs due disconnected.
to sudden
acceleration/deceleration or Setting Function
CON-24 ASR-SL I Decrease the value of CON-2 by decrements
sudden load fluctuation
Gain2 of 5%. CON-77 KEB Select 0 No General deceleration is carried out until a low voltage trip
(with no brake resistor
occurs.
installed) at mid speed (30
1 Yes The inverter power frequency is controlled and the
Hz or higher).
regeneration energy from the motor is charged by the
Decrease the value of CON-54-57 by
inverter.
Over current trip occurs due decrements of 10% (if the parameter setting is
to sudden load fluctuation at CON-54–57 Trq Lmt 150% or higher).
CON-78 KEB Start
high speed (50 Hz or CON-94 SL FW Freq Increase/decrease the value of CON-94 by Sets the start and stop points of the kinetic energy buffering operation. The
Lev,
higher). increments/decrements of 5% (set below set values must be based on the low voltage trip level as 100% and the stop
CON-79 KEB Stop
100%). level (CON- 79) must be set higher than the start level (CON-78).
Lev
The motor hunts when the CON-22 ASR-SL I Increase the value of CON-22 by increments of
load increases from the Gain1 50m/s or decrease the value of CON-24 by
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 139 140 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description Group Code Name Parameter Setting Unit

This is the gain used to control the kinetic energy buffering operation using CON 63 FWD Speed Lmt - 60.00 Hz
the amount of load-side inertia moment. If the load inertia is high, use a lower
CON 64 REV Speed Lmt - 60.00 Hz
gain value, and if the load inertia is low, use a higher gain value.
CON-80 KEB Gain If input power is disconnected and the motor vibrates severely while the CON 65 Speed Lmt Gain - 100 %
kinetic energy buffering operation is carried out, set the gain (CON-80: KEB IN 65-71 Px Define 35 Speed/Torque -
Gain) at half the previously set value. If the gain is lowered too much, a low
voltage trip may occur during the kinetic energy buffering operation (KEB). OUT 31-33 Relay x or Q1 27 Torque Dect -
OUT 59 TD Level - 100 %
OUT 60 TD Band - 5.0 %

Depending on the duration of Instantaneous power interruptions and the amount of load inertia, a low Note
voltage trip may occur even during a kinetic energy buffering operation. Motors may vibrate during
O To operate in torque control mode, basic operation conditions must be set. For more information,
kinetic energy buffering operation for some loads except variable torque load (for example, fan or
refer to
pump loads).
O
O Sensorless Vector Control Operation Guide to on page 139.
O The torque control cannot be used in a low speed regeneration area or low load conditions.
O If you change the rotation direction while operating, an over current trip or low speed reverse
5.12 Torque Control direction error will be generated.
When the motor output torque is greater than the load, the speed of motor becomes too fast. To
prevent this, set the speed limit. (The torque control function cannot be used while the speed limit
Torque reference setting option
function is running.)
The torque reference can be set using the same method as the target frequency setting. If Torque
The torque control function controls the motor to maintain the preset torque value. The motor rotation Control Mode is selected, the target frequency is not used.
speed maintains the speed constantly when the output torque and load torque of the motor keep a
balance. Therefore, the motor rotation speed is decided by the load when controlling the torque. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
0 Keypad-1
Torque control setting option
1 Keypad-2
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit DRV 08 Torque reference setting Trq Ref Src -
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 4 IM Sensorless - 2 V1
DRV 10 Torque control Torque Control 1 Yes - 6 Int 485
Torque control setting option details
02 Torque command Cmd Torque -180-180 %
Group Code Name Parameter Setting Unit
0 Keypad-1
DRV 02 Cmd Torque - 0.0 %
1 Keypad-2
DRV 08 Trq Ref Src 0 Keypad-1 -
2 V1
DRV 09 Control Mode 4 IM Sensorless - 62 Speed limit setting Speed LmtSrc -
CON
4 V2
DRV 10 Torque Control 1 Yes -
DRV 22 (+) Trq Gain - 50-150 % 5 I2

DRV 23 (-) Trq Gain - 50-150 % 6 Int 485

BAS 20 Auto Tuning 1 Yes - 63 Positive-direction speed limit FWD Speed Lmt 0-Maximum frequency Hz

CON 62 Speed LmtSrc 0 Keypad-1 - 64 Negative-direction speed limit REV Speed Lmt 0- Maximum frequency Hz

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 141 142 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit 5.13 Energy Saving Operation
65 Speed limit operation gain Speed Lmt Gain 100-5000 %
IN 02 Torque at maximum analog input Torque at 100% -12.00-12.00 mA
21 Monitor mode display 1 Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 5.13.1 Manual Energy Saving Operation
CNF 22 Monitor mode display 2 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current
If the inverter output current is lower than the current which is set at BAS-14 (Noload Curr), the output
23 Monitor mode display 3 Monitor Line-3 3 Output Voltage voltage must be reduced as low as the level set at ADV-51 (Energy Save). The voltage before the
energy saving operation starts will become the base value of the percentage. Manual energy saving
Torque reference setting details operation will not be carried out during acceleration and deceleration.
Code Description
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Select an input method to use as the torque reference. Energy saving
50 E-Save Mode 1 Manual - -
Parameter Setting Description operation
ADV
0 Keypad-1 Sets the torque reference with the keypad. Energy saving
51 Energy Save 30 0–30 %
1 Keypad-2 amount
DRV-08
2 V1 Sets the torque reference using the voltage or current input
terminal of the terminal block.
6 Int 485 Sets the torque reference with the communication terminal of
the terminal block.

CON-02 The torque reference can be set up to 180% of the maximum rated motor torque.
Sets the maximum torque. You can check the set maximum torque in Monitor (MON)
IN-02
mode.
CNF-21–23 Select a parameter from the Config(CNF) mode and then select(19 Torque Ref).

Speed limit details

Code Description
Select a method for setting the speed limit value. 5.13.2 Automatic Energy Saving Operation
Parameter Setting Description
0 Keypad-1 Sets the speed limit value with the keypad. The amount of energy saving can be automatically calculated based on the rated motor current
CON-62 1 Keypad-2 (BAS-13) and the no-load current (BAS-14). From the calculations, the output voltage can be
2 V1 Sets the speed limit value using the same method as the adjusted.
6 Int 485 frequency command. You can check the setting in Monitor
(MON) mode. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Energy saving
CON-63 Sets the positive-direction speed limit value. ADV 50 E-Save Mode 2 Auto - -
operation
CON-64 Sets the negative-direction speed limit value.
Sets the decrease rate of the torque reference when the motor speed exceeds the
CON-65
speed limit value.
CNF-21~23 Select a parameter from the Config (CNF) mode and then select21 Torque Bias.
If operation frequency is changed or acceleration and /deceleration is carried out by a stop command
Select a multi-functional input terminal to set as the (35 Speed/Torque). If you turn on during the energy saving operation, the actual Acc/Dec time may take longer than the set Acc/Dec
IN 65-71 the terminal while the operation is stopped, it operates in vector control (speed limit) time due to the time required to return to the gerneral operation from the energy saving operation.
mode.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 143 144 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.14 Speed Search Operation Code Description

start from zero speed when the speed search is
This operation is used to prevent fault trips that can occur while the inverter output voltage is performed for the idling motor at low speed (about 10 - 15
disconnected and the motor is idling. Because this feature estimates the motor rotation speed based Hz, though it depends on motor characteristics).
on the inverter output current, it does not give the exact speed.
Speed search can be selected from the following 4 options. If the top display segment
Setting is on it is enabled (On), and if the bottom segment is on it is disabled (Off).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range
70 Speed search mode selection SS Mode 0 Flying Start-1 - - Item Bit Setting On Status Bit setting Off Status
Speed search operation Speed LCD keypad
71 0000* - bit
selection Search
Speed search reference SS Sup-
72 - Below 75 kW 80–200 %
current Current Type and Functions of Speed Search Setting
CON
Speed search proportional
73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999 - Setting
gain Function
74 Speed search integral gain SS I-Gain 200 0–9999 - bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
Output block time before SS Block ü Speed search for general acceleration
75 1.0 0–60 sec ü Initialization after a fault trip
speed search Time
31 Multi-function relay 1 item Relay 1 1 Speed Restart after instantaneous power
OUT - - ü
33 Multi-function output 1 item Q1 Define 9 Search interruption
ü Starting with power-on
Speed Search Operation Setting Details
Code Description O Speed search for general acceleration: If bit 1 is set to 1 and the inverter
operation command runs, acceleration starts with speed search operation. When
Select a speed search type.
the motor is rotating underload, a fault trip may occur if the operation command is
CON-71
run for the inverter to provide output voltage. The speed search function prevents
Setting Function Speed
such fault trip from occurring.
0 Flying The speed search is carried out as it controls the inverter Search
Start-1 output current during idling below the CON-72 (SS Sup-
O Initialization after a fault trip: If Bit 2 is set to 1 and PRT-08 (RST Restart) is set to
Current) parameter setting. If the direction of the idling
motor and the direction of operation command at restart 1 (Yes), the speed search operation automatically accelerates the motor to the
are the same, a stable speed search function can be operation frequency used before the fault trip, when the [Reset] key is pressed (or
performed at about 10 Hz or lower. However, if the the terminal block is initialized) after a fault trip.
direction of the idling motor and the direction of operation
command at restart are different, the speed search does O Automatic restart after reset of a fault trip: If bit 3 is set to 1, and if a low voltage
CON-70 SS not produce a satisfactory result because the direction of trip occurs due to a power interruption but the power is restored before the internal
Mode idling cannot be established. power shuts down, the speed search operation accelerates the motor back to its
1 Flying The speed search is carried out as it PI controls the ripple frequency reference before the low voltage trip.
Start-2 current which is generated by the counter electromotive
force during no-load rotation. Because this mode If an instantaneous power interruption occurs and the input power is disconnected,
establishes the direction of the idling motor the inverter generates a low voltage trip and blocks the output. When the input
(forward/reverse), the speed search function is stable power returns, the operation frequency before the low voltage trip and the voltage is
regardless of the direction of the idling motor and increased by the inverter’s inner PI control.
direction of operation command. However because the
ripple current is used which is generated by the counter If the current increases above the value set at CON-72, the voltage stops increasing
electromotive force at idle (the counter electromotive and the frequency decreases (t1 zone). If the current decreases below the value set
force is proportional to the idle speed), the idle frequency at CON-27, the voltage increases again and the frequency stops decelerating (t2
is not determined accurately and re-acceleration may zone). When the normal frequency and voltage are resumed, the speed search

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 145 146 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description 5.15 Auto Restart Settings

operation accelerates the motor back to its frequency reference before the fault trip.
When inverter operation stops due to a fault and a fault trip is activated, the inverter automatically
restarts based on the parameter settings.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
08 Select start at trip reset RST Restart 0 No 0–1 -
PRT 09 Auto restart count Retry Number 0 0–10 -
10 Auto restart delay time Retry Delay 1.0 0.0–60.0 s
Select speed search Speed
71 - 0000*–1111 bit
operation Search
Speed search startup SS Sup-
72 150 80–200 %
current Current
BAS Speed search proportional
73 SS P-Gain 100 0–9999
gain
74 Speed search integral gain SS I-Gain 200 0–9999
Output block time before SS Block
O Starting with power-on: Set bit 4 to 1 and ADV-10 (Power-on Run) to 1 (Yes). If 75 1.0 0.0–60.0 s
speed search. Time
inverter input power is supplied while the inverter operation command is on, the
speed search operation will accelerate the motor up to the frequency reference.
The amount of current flow is controlled during speed search operation based on the Auto Restart Setting Details
CON-72 SS Code Description
motor’s rated current. If CON-70 (SS mode) is set to 1 (Flying Start-2), this code is not
Sup-Current Only operates when PRT-08 (RST Restart) is set to 1(Yes). The number of
visible.
attempts to try the auto restart is set at PRT-09 (Auto Restart Count).
CON-73 SS If a fault trip occurs during operation, the inverter automatically restarts after
The P/I gain of the speed search controller can be adjusted. If CON-70 (SS Mode) is
P/I-Gain, the set time programmed at PRT-10 (Retry Delay). At each restart, the inverter
set to 1 (Flying Start-2), different factory defaults based on motor capacity are used
CON-75 SS counts the number of tries and subtracts it from the number set at PRT-09 until
and defined in DRV-14 (Motor Capacity).
Block Time the retry number count reaches 0.
After an auto restart, if a fault trip does not occur within 60 sec, it will increase
the restart count number. The maximum count number is limited by the
Note number set at PRT-09 (Auto Restart Count).
PRT-08 RST
If the inverter stops due to low voltage, emergency stop (Bx), inverter
O If operated within the rated output, the SX2000 series inverter is designed to withstand Restart, PRT-09
overheating, or hardware diagnosis, an auto restart is not activated. At auto
instantaneous power interruptions within 15 ms and maintain normal operation. Based on the Retry Number, PRT-
restart, the acceleration options are identical to those of speed search
rated heavy load current, safe operation during an instantaneous power interruption is guaranteed 10 Retry Delay
operation. Codes CON-72–75 can be set based on the load. Information
for 200 V and 400 V inverters (whose rated input voltages are 200-230 VAC and 380-460 VAC about the speed search function can be found on page 144.
respectively).
O The DC voltage inside the inverter may vary depending on the output load. If the power
interruption time is longer than 15 ms, a low voltage trip may occur.
If operation frequency is changed or acceleration and /deceleration is carried
out by a stop command during the energy saving operation, the actual
When operating in sensorless II mode while the starting load is in free-run, the speed search function Acc/Dec time may take longer than the set Acc/Dec time due to the time
(for general acceleration) must be set for smooth operation. If the speed search function is not set, an required to return to the gerneral operation from the energy saving operation.
overcurrent trip or overload trip may occur.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 147 148 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description

The heat loss and leakage current from the inverter can be reduced by changing
the load rate option at CON-05 (PWM Mode). Selecting 1 (LowLeakage PWM)
reduces heat loss and leakage current, compared to when 0 (Normal PWM) is
selected. However, it increases the motor noise. Low leakage PWM uses 2
phase PWM modulation mode, which helps minimize degradation and reduces
switching loss by approximately 30%.
CON-05 PWM
Mode Carrier frequency
Item 1.0 kHz 15 kHz
Low Leakage PWM Normal PWM
Motor noise ↑ ↓
Heat generation ↓ ↑
Noise generation ↓ ↑
Leakage current ↓ ↑

[Example of auto restart with a setting of 2]

Note

Carrier Frequency at Factory Default Settings (0.4–22 kW)

O Normal load: 2 kHz (Max 5 kHz)
If the auto restart number is set, be careful when the inverter resets from a fault trip. The motor may
O Heavy load: 3 kHz (Max 15 kHz)
automatically start to rotate.
SX2000 Series Inverter Derating Standard
O SX2000 inverter is designed to respond to two types of load rates. Heavy load (heavy duty) and
normal load (normal duty). The overload rate represents an acceptable load amount that exceeds
5.16 Operational Noise Settings (carrier frequency rated load, and is expressed in a ratio based on the rated load and the duration. The overload
capacity on the SX2000 series inverter is 150%/1min for heavy loads, and 120%/1min for normal
settings) loads.
O The current rating differs from the load rating, as it also has an ambient temperature limit. For
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
derating specifications, refer to 11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating on page 323.
04 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 3.0 1.0–15.0 kHz
CON O Current rating for ambient temperature at normal load operation.
05 Switching Mode PWM* Mode 0 Normal PWM 0–1 -
* PWM: Pulse width modulation

Operational Noise Setting Details

Code Description
Adjust motor operational noise by changing carrier frequency settings. Power
[Ambient temperature versus current rating at normal load]
transistors (IGBT) in the inverter generate and supply high frequency switching
CON-04 Carrier voltage to the motor. The switching speed in this process refers to the carrier
Freq frequency. If the carrier frequency is set high, it reduces operational noise from O Guaranteed carrier frequency for current rating by load.
the motor, and if the carrier frequency is set low, it increases operational noise Inverter capacity Normal load Heavy load
from the motor.
30–45 kW 2 kHz 6 kHz
55–75 kW 2 kHz 4 kHz

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 149 150 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.17 2nd Motor Operation 5.18 Supply Power Transition

nd nd
The 2 motor operation is used when a single inverter switch operates two motors. Using the 2 Supply power transition is used to switch the power source for the motor connected to the inverter
nd nd
motor operation, a parameter for the 2 motor is set. The 2 motor is operated when a multi-function from the inverter output power to the main supply power source (commercial power source), or vice
nd
terminal input defined as a 2 motor function is turned on. versa.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Px terminal Px Define(Px: P1– Px terminal Px Define(Px:
IN 65– 71 26 2nd Motor - - IN 65–71 16 Exchange 0-54 -
configuration P7) configuration P1–P7)
Multi-function relay1 Inverter
nd 31 Relay1 17 - -
2 Motor Operation Setting Details items Line
OUT
Code Description Multi-function output1
33 Q1 Define 18 Comm Line - -
nd
Set one of the the multi-function input terminals (P1–P7) to 26 (2 Motor) to items
nd
display M2 (2 motor group) group. An input signal to a multi-function terminal
nd
set to 2 motor will operate the motor according to the code settings listed Supply Power Transition Setting Details
IN-65–71 Px below. However, if the inverter is in operation, input signals to the multi-function Code Description
nd
Define terminals will not read as a 2 motor parameter. When the motor power source changes from inverter output to main supply
PRT-50 (Stall Prevent) must be set first, before M2-28 (Stall Lev) settings can be power, select a terminal to use and set the code value to 16 (Exchange).
used. Also, PRT-40 (ETH Trip Sel) must be set first, before M2-29 (ETH 1min) IN-65–71 Px Define
Power will be switched when the selected terminal is on. To reverse the
and M2-30 (ETH Cont) settings. transition, switch off the terminal.
nd Set multi-function relay or multi-function output to 17 (Inverter Line) or 18
Parameter Setting at Multi-function Terminal Input on a 2 Motor
(COMM line). Relay operation sequence is as follows.
Code Description Code Description
M2-04 Acc Time Acceleration time M2-16 Inertia Rt Load inertia rate
M2-05 Dec Time Deceleration time M2-17 Rs Stator resistor
M2-06 Capacity Motor capacity M2-18 Lsigma Leakage inductance
M2-07 Base Freq Motor base frequency M2-19 Ls Stator inductance
M2-08 Ctrl Mode Control mode M2-20 Tr Rotor time constant
M2-10 Pole Num Pole number M2-25 V/F Patt V/F pattern OUT-31 Realy 1
M2-11 Rate Slip Rated slip M2-26 Fwd Boost Forward torque boost Define,
M2-12 Rated Curr Rated current M2-27 Rev Boost Reverse torque boost OUT-33 Q1 Define
M2-13 Noload Curr No-load current M2-28 Stall Lev Stall prevention level
M2-14 Rated Volt Motor rated voltage M2-29 ETH 1min Motor heat protection 1min rating
M2-15 Efficiency Motor efficiency M2-30 ETH Cont Motor heat protection cont. rating

Use the 2nd motor operation when switching operation between a 75 kW motor and a secondary 37
kW motor connected to terminal P3. Refer to the following settings.
Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
IN 67 Terminal P3 configuration P3 Define 26 2nd Motor - -
06 Motor capacity M2-Capacity - 37 kW - -
M2
08 Control mode M2-Ctrl Mode 0 V/F - -

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 151 152 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.19 Cooling Fan Control 5.20 Input Power Frequency and Voltage Settings
This function turns the inverter’s heat-sink cooling fan on and off. It is used in situations where the Select the frequency for inverter input power. If the frequency changes from 60 Hz to 50 Hz, all other
load stops and starts frequently, or noise free environment is required. The correct use of cooling fan frequency (or RPM) settings including the maximum frequency, base frequency etc., will change to 50
control can extend the cooling fan’s life. Hz. Likewise, changing the input power frequency setting from 50 Hz to 60 Hz will change all related
function item settings from 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit
Range Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
ADV 64 Cooling fan control FAN Control 0 During Run 0–2 - BAS 10 Input power frequency 60/50 Hz Sel 0 50 Hz 0–1 -

Cooling Fan Control Detail Settings Set Inverter input power voltage at BAS-19. Low voltage fault trip level changes automatically to the
Code Description set voltage standard.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Settings Description
220 V 220 170–240
0 During Run Cooling fan runs when the power is supplied to the BAS 19 Input power voltage AC Input Volt V
400 V 380 320–480
inverter and the operation command is on. The cooling
fan stops when the power is supplied to the inverter and
the operation command is off. When the inverter heat sink
ADV-64 Fan temperature is higher than its set value, the cooling fan
Control operates automatically regardless of its operation status.
1 Always On Cooling fan runs constantly if the power is supplied to the
inverter.
2 Temp With power connected and the run operation command
Control on, if the setting is in Temp Control, the cooling fan will not
operate unless the temperature in the heat sink reaches
the set temperature.

Note
Despite setting ADV-64 to 0(During Run), if the heat sink temperature reaches a set level by current
input harmonic wave or noise, the cooling fan may run as a protection function.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 153 154 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.21 Read, Write, and Save Parameters 5.22 Parameter Initialization

Use read, write and save function parameters on the inverter to copy parameters from the inverter to User changes to parameters can be initialized (reset) to factory default settings on all or selected
the keypad or from the keypad to the inverter. groups. However, during a fault trip situation or operation, parameters cannot be initialized.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Parameter CNF 40 Parameter initialization Parameter Init 0 No 0–13
46 Parameter read 1 Yes - -
Read
CNF* 47 Parameter write Parameter Write 1 Yes - -
48 Parameter save Parameter Save 1 Yes - - Parameter Initialization Setting Details
Code Description
LCD
Read, Write, and Save Parameter Setting Details Setting Function
Display
Code Description -
0 No No
Copies saved parameters from the inverter to the keypad. Saved
CNF-46 Parameter Initialize all data. Select 1(All
parameters on the keypad will be deleted and replaced with copied
Read Grp) and press [PROG/ENT]
parameters.
Copies saved parameters from the keypad to the inverter. Saved 1 Initialize all groups All Grp key to start initialization. On
parameters on the inverter will be deleted and replaced with copied completion, 0(No) will be
CNF-47 Parameter displayed.
parameters. If an error occurs during parameter writing, previous saved
Write Initialize DRV Initialize data by groups.
data will be used. If there is no saved data on the Keypad, ‘EEP Rom 2 DRV Grp
Empty’ message will be displayed. group Select initialize group and
As parameters set during communication transmission are saved to RAM, DRV-93, 3 Initialize BAS group BAS Grp press [PROG/ENT] key to
CNF-48 Parameter the setting values will be lost if the power goes off and on. When setting CNF-40 Parameter Init 4 Initialize ADV group ADV Grp start initialization. On
Save parameters during communication transmission, select 1 (Yes) from CNF- Initialize CON completion, 0(No) will be
5 CON Grp displayed.
48 code to save the set parameter. group
6 Initialize IN group IN Grp
Initialize OUT
7 OUT Grp
group
Initialize COM
8 COM Grp
group
9 Initialize APP group APP Grp
12 Initialize PRT group PRT Grp
13 Initialize M2 group M2 Grp

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 155 156 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.23 Parameter View Lock 5.24 Parameter Lock

Use parameter view lock to hide parameters after registering and entering a user password. Use parameter lock to prevent unauthorized modification of parameter settings. To enable parameter
lock, register and enter a user password first.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
50 Parameter view lock View Lock Set Unlocked 0–9999 Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
CNF Parameter view lock 94 Password registration - - 0–9999 -
51 View Lock Pw Password 0–9999 DRV
password 95 Parameter lock password - - 0–9999 -
52 Parameter lock Key Lock Set Unlocked 0–9999 -
Parameter View Lock Setting Details CNF
Code Description 53 Parameter lock password Key Lock PW Password 0–9999 -
Register a password to allow access to parameter view lock. Follow the
steps below to register a password.
Parameter Lock Setting Details
Code Description
No Procedure
1 [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-51 code will show the previous Register a password to prohibit parameter modifications. Follow the
password input window. If registration is made for the first time, procedures below to register a password.
enter 0. It is the factory default.
CNF-51 View Lock Pw No Procedures
2 If a password had been set, enter the saved password.
3 If the entered password matches the saved password, a new 1 Press the [PROG/ENT] key on CNF-53 code and the saved
window prompting the user to enter a new password will be password input window will be displayed. If password registration is
displayed (the process will not progress to the next stage until the CNF-53 Key Lock Pw being made for the first time, enter 0. It is the factory default.
user enters a valid password). 2 If a saved password has been set, enter the saved password.
4 Register a new password. 3 If the entered password matches the saved password, then a new
5 After registration, code CNF-51 will be displayed. window to enter a new password will be displayed. (The process
will not move to next stage until the user enters a valid password).
To enable parameter view lock, enter a registered password. [Locked] sign 4 Register a new password.
will be displayed on the screen to indicate that parameter view lock is 5 After registration, Code CNF-51 will be displayed.
CNF-50 View Lock Set
enabled. To disable parameter view lock, re-enter the password. The
[locked] sign will disappear. To enable parameter lock, enter the registered password. [Locked] sign will
be displayed on the screen to indicate that prohibition is enabled. Once
CNF-52 Key Lock Set enabled, Pressing the [PROG/ENT] key on function code will not allow the
display edit mode to run. To disable parameter modification prohibition, re-
enter the password. The [Locked] sign will disapear.

If parameter view lock and parameter lock functions are enabled, no inverter operation related
function changes can be made. It is very important that you memorize the password.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 157 158 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

User Group Setting Details

5.25 Changed Parameter Display
Code Description
This feature displays all the parameters that are different from the factory defaults. Use this feature to Select 3 (UserGrp SelKey) from the multi-function key setting options. If user
track changed parameters. group parameters are not registered, setting the multi-function key to the
user group select key (UserGrp SelKey) will not display user group (USR
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Grp) item on the Keypad.
CNF 41 Changed parameter display Changed Para 0 View All - -
Follow the procedures below to register parameters to a user group.
Changed Parameter Display Setting Details
No Procedure
Code Description
1 Set CNF- 42 to 3(UserGrp SelKey). A icon will be displayed
Setting Function
at the top of the LCD display.
CNF-41 Changed
Para 0 View All Display all parameters
2 In the parameter mode (PAR Mode), move to the parameter you
1 View Changed Display changed parameters only need to register and press the [MULTI] key. For example, if the
[MULTI] key is pressed in the frequency reference in DRV 01
(Cmd Frequency), the screen below will be displayed.

5.26 User Group

Create a user defined group and register user-selected parameters from the existing function groups.
The user group can carry up to a maximum of 64 parameter registrations.
CNF-42 Multi-Key Sel
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
UserGrp
42 Multi-function key settings Multi Key Sel 3 - -
SelKey
CNF
Delete all user registered UserGrp ᬚ Group name and code number of the parameter
45
codes AllDel
0 No - - ᬛ Name of the parameter
ᬜ Code number to be used in the user group. Pressing the
[PROG/ENT] key on the code number (40 Code) will register
DRV-01 as code 40 in the user group.
ᬝ Existing parameter registered as the user group code 40
ᬞ Setting range of the user group code. Entering 0 cancels the
settings.

3 Set a code number (ᬜ) to use to register the parameter in the

user group. Select code number and press [PROG/ENT] key.

4 Changing the value in ᬜ will also change the value in ᬝ. If no

code is registered, ‘Empty Code’ will be displayed. Entering 0
cancels the settings.

5 The registered parameters are listed in the user group in User

mode. You can register one parameter multiple times if
necessary. For example, a parameter can be registered as code
2, code 11, and more in the user group.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 159 160 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description 5.27 Easy Start On

Follow the procedures below to delete parameters in the user group. Run Easy Start On to easily setup the basic motor parameters required to operate a motor in a batch.
Set CNF-61(Easy Start On) to 1(Yes) to activate the feature, initialize all parameters by setting CNF-
40 (Parameter Init) to 1 (All Grp), and restart the inverter to activate Easy Start On.
No. Settings
1 Set CNF- 42 to 3(UserGrp SelKey). A icon will be displayed Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
at the top of the LCD display. Parameter easy start
CNF 61 Easy Start On 1 Yes - -
2 In User mode, move the cursor to the code that is to be deleted. settings
3 Press the [MULTI] key.
4 Move to YES on the deletion confirmation screen, and press the Easy Start On Setting Details
[PROG/ENT] key. Code Description
5 Deletion completed.

CNF-25 UserGrp Follow the procedures listed below to set parameter easy start.
Set to 1(Yes) to delete all registered parameters in the user group.
AllDel
No Procedures
1 Set CNF-61 (Easy Start On) to 1(Yes).
2 Select 1(All Grp) in CNF-40 (Parameter Init) to initialize all
parameters in the inverter.
3 Restarting the inverter will activate the Easy Start On. Set the
values in the following screens on the LCD keypad. To escape
from the Easy Start On, press the [ESC] key.

O Start Easy Set: Select Yes.

CNF-61 Easy Start O DRV-14 Motor Capacity: Set motor capacity.
On
O BAS-11 Pole Number: Set motor pole number.
O BAS-15 Rated Volt: Set motor rated voltage.
O BAS-10 60/50 Hz Sel: Set motor rated frequency.
O BAS-19 AC Input Volt: Set input voltage.
O DRV-06 Cmd Source: Set command source.
O DRV-01 Cmd Frequency: Set operation frequency.

When the settings are completed, the minimum parameter setting

on the motor has been made. The LCD keypay will return to a
monitoring display. Now the motor can be operated with the
command source set at DRV-06.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 161 162 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.28 Config (CNF) Mode 5.29 Timer Settings

The config mode parameters are used to configure the LCD keypad related features. Set a multi-function input terminal to a timer and On/Off control the multi-function output and relay
according to the timer settings.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
LCD brightness/contrast Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
2 LCD Contrast - -
adjustment Px terminal Px Define(Px: P1–
IN 65–71 38 Timer In 0-54 -
10 Inverter S/W version Inv S/W Ver x.xx - configuration P7)
Keypad S/W 31 Multi-function relay1 Relay 1
11 Keypad S/W version x.xx - - 28 Timer Out - -
Ver 33 Multi-function output1 Q1 Define
OUT
CNF 12 Keypad title version KPD Title Ver x.xx - - 55 Timer on delay Timer on delay 3.00 0.00–100 sec
30–32 Power slot type Option-x Type None - - 56 Timer off delay Timer off delay 1.00 0.00–100 sec
44 Erase trip history Erase All Trip No - -
60 Add title update Add Title Up No - -
Initialize accumulated WH Count Timer Setting Details
62 No - -
electric energy Reset Code Description
Choose one of the multi-function input terminals and change it to a timer
IN-65–71 Px Define
terminal by setting it to 38 (Timer In).
Config Mode Parameter Setting Details
Code Description OUT-31 Relay1, Set multi-function output terminal or relay to be used as a timer to 28 (Timer
CNF-2 LCD contrast Adjusts LCD brightness/contrast on the LCD keypad. OUT-33 Q1 Define out).
CNF-10 Inv S/W Ver, OUT-55 TimerOn Input a signal (On) to the timer terminal to operate a timer output (Timer out)
Check OS version in the inverter and on the LCD keypad.
CNF-11 Keypad S/W Ver Delay, after the time set at OUT-55 has passed. When the multi-function input
CNF-12 KPD title Ver Checks title version on the LCD keypad. OUT-56 TimerOff terminal is off, multi-function output or relay turns off after the time set at OUT-
Delay 56.
CNF-30–32 Option-x type Checks type of powerboard installed in 1–3 power slot.
CNF-44 Erase all trip Deletes stored trip history.
When inverter SW version is updated and more code is added, CNF-60
settings will add, display, and operate the added codes. Set CNF-60 to
CNF-60 Add Title Up
1(Yes) and disconnect the LCD keypad from the inverter. Reconnecting
the LCD keypad to the inverter updates titles.
CNF-62 WH Count Reset Initialize accumulated electric energy consumption count.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 163 164 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.30 Brake Control 5.31 Multi-Function Output On/Off Control

Brake control is used to control the On/Off operation of electronic brake load system. Set reference values (on/off level) for analog input and control output relay or multi-function output
terminal on/off status accordingly.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
DRV 09 Control mode Control Mode 0 V/F - - Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
41 Brake open current BR Rls Curr 50.0 0.0–180% % Output terminal on/off
66 On/Off Ctrl Src 1 V1 - -
42 Brake open delay time BR Rls Dly 1.00 0.0–10.0 sec control mode
Brake open forward 0–Maximum Output terminal off
44 BR Rls Fwd Fr 1.00 Hz ADV 67 Output terminal on level On-C Level 90.00 %
frequency frequency level– 100.00%
ADV Brake open reverse 0–Maximum 0.00–Output
45 BR Rls Rev Fr 1.00 Hz 68 Output terminal off level Off-C Level 10.00 %
frequency frequency terminal on level
46 Brake close delay time BR Eng Dly 1.00 0.00–10.00 sec Multi-function relay1
31 Relay 1
0–Maximum item
47 Brake close frequency BR Eng Fr 2.00 Hz OUT 34 On/Off - -
frequency Multi-function output1
33 Q1 Define
31 Multi-function relay1 item Relay 1 BR item
OUT 35 - -
33 Multi-function output1 item Q1 Define Control

When brake control is activated, DC braking (ADV-12) at inverter start and dwell operation (ADV-20– Multi-function Output On/Off Control Setting Details
23) do not operate. Code Description
ADV-66 On/Off Ctrl
O Brake release sequence: During motor stop state, if an operation command is entered, the Select analog input On/Off control.
Src
inverter accelerates up to brake release frequency (ADV-44– 45) in forward or in reverse ADV-67 On-C Level ,
direction. After reaching brake release frequency, if motor current reaches brake release current Set On/Off level at the output terminal.
ADV-68 Off-C Level
(BR Rls Curr), the output relay or multi function output terminal for brake control sends a release
signal. Once the signal has been sent, acceleration will begin after maintaining frequency for
brake release delay time (BR Rls Dly).
O Brake engage sequence: If a stop command is sent during operation, the motor decelerates.
Once the output frequency reaches brake engage frequency (BR Eng Fr), the motor stops
deceleration and sends out a brake engage signal to a preset output terminal. Frequency is
maintained for the brake engage delay time (BR Eng Dly) and will become 0 afterwards. If DC
braking time (ADV-15) and DC braking resistance (ADV-16) are set, inverter output is blocked
after DC braking. For DC braking, refer to 4.17.2 Stop After DC Braking on page 89.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 165 166 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.32 Press Regeneration Prevention

Press regeneration prevention is used during press operations to prevent braking during the
regeneration process. If motor regeneration occurs during a press operation, motor operation speed
automatically goes up to avoid the regeneration zone.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Select press
74 regeneration prevention RegenAvd Sel 0 No 0–1 -
for press
Press regeneration 350 V 200 V: 300–400 V
RegenAvd
75 prevention operation V
Level 700 V 400 V: 600–800 V
voltage level
ADV Press regeneration
CompFreq
76 prevention compensation 1.00(Hz) 0.00– 10.00 Hz Hz
Limit Note
frequency limit
Press regeneration RegenAvd Press regeneration prevention does not operate during accelerations or decelerations, but it only
77 50.0(%) 0 .0– 100.0% %
prevention P gain Pgain operates during constant speed motor operation. When regeneration prevention is activated, output
Press regeneration RegenAvd frequency may change within the range set at ADV-76 (CompFreq Limit).
78 500(ms) 20–30000ms ms
prevention I gain Igain

Press Regeneration Prevention Setting Details

5.33 Analog Output
Code Description
An analog output terminal provides output of 0–10 V voltage, 4–20 mA current, or 0–32 kHz pulse.
Frequent regeneration voltage from a press load during constant speed
motor operation may force excessive work on the braking unit which
ADV-74 RegenAvd Sel may damage or shorten the brake life. To prevent this situation, select
ADV-74 (RegenAvd Sel) to control DC link voltage and disable the
braking unit operation. 5.33.1 Voltage and Current Analog Output
Set brake operation prevention level voltage when the DC link voltage
ADV-75 RegenAvd Level An output size can be adjusted by selecting an output option at AO (Analog Output) terminal. Set the
goes up due to regeneration.
analog voltage/current output terminal setting switch (SW2) to change the output type
Set alternative frequency width that can replace actual operation (voltage/current).
ADV-76 CompFreq Limit
frequency during regeneration prevention.
ADV-77 RegenAvd Pgain, To prevent regeneration zone, set P gain/I gain in the DC link voltage AO1: 0–10 V Voltage / 4–20 mA Current Output
ADV-78 RegenAvd Igain supress PI controller. Grou
Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
p
01 Analog output1 AO1 Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
02 Analog output1 gain AO1 Gain 100.0 -1000.0–1000.0 %
03 Analog output1 bias AO1 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 %
OUT
04 Analog output1 filter AO1 Filter 5 0–10000 ms
05 Analog constant output1 AO1 Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 %
06 Analog output1 monitor AO1 Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 167 168 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

AO2: 0–10 V Current output Code Description

Cod 12 PID Ref Value Outputs command value of a PID controller as a
Group Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
e standard. Outputs approximately 6.6V at 100%.
07 Analog output2 AO2 Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 - 13 PID Fdk Outputs feedback volume of a PID controller as a
08 Analog output2 gain AO2 Gain 100.0 -1000.0–1000.0 % Value standard. Outputs approximately 6.6V at 100%.
09 Analog output2 bias AO2 Bias 0.0 -100.0–100.0 % 14 PID Output Outputs output value of a PID controller as a
OUT
10 Analog output2 filter AO2 Filter 5 0–10000 ms standard. Outputs approximately 10 V at 100%.
11 Analog constant output2 AO2 Const % 0.0 0.0–100.0 % 15 Constant Outputs OUT-05 (AO1 Const %) value as a
12 Analog output2 monitor AO2 Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 % standard.

Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output item, it

Voltage and Current Analog Output Setting Details will operate as shown below.
Code Description
‫ݕܿ݊݁ݑݍ݁ݎܨ‬
Select a constant value for output. The following example for output voltage ‫ ͳܱܣ‬ൌ ൈ ‫ ݊݅ܽܩͳܱܣ‬൅ ‫ݏܽ݅ܤͳܱܣ‬
‫ݍ݁ݎܨݔܽܯ‬
setting.
The graph below illustrates the analog voltage output (AO1) changes
Setting Function depend on OUT-02 (AO1 Gain) and OUT-3 (AO1 Bias) values. Y-axis is
0 Frequency Outputs operation frequency as a standard. 10 V analog output voltage (0–10 V), and X-axis is % value of the output item.
output is made from the frequency set at DRV-20
(Max Freq) Example, if the maximum frequency set at DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz and
1 Output 10 V output is made from 200% of inverter rated the present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on the next
Current current (heavy load). graph is 50%.
2 Output Sets the outputs based on the inverter output
Voltage voltage. 10 V output is made from a set voltage in
BAS-15 (Rated V). OUT-02 AO1 Gain,
If 0 V is set in BAS-15, 200 V/400 V models output OUT-03 AO1 Bias
10 V based on the actual input voltages (220 V
and 440 V respectively).
3 DC Link Volt Outputs inverter DC link voltage as a standard.
Outputs 10 V when the DC link voltage is 410 Vdc
OUT-01 AO1 Mode
for 200 V models, and 820 Vdc for 400 V models.
4 Torque Outputs the generated torque as a standard.
Outputs 10 V at 250% of motor rated torque.
5 Ouput Power Monitors output wattage. 200% of rated output is
the maximum display voltage (10 V).
6 Idse Outputs the maximum voltage at 200% of no load
current.
7 Iqse Outputs the maximum voltage at 250% of rated
torque current
‫ݐ݊݁ݎݎݑܿ݁ݑݍݎ݋ݐ݀݁ݐܽݎ‬
ൌ ඥ‫ ݐ݊݁ݎݎݑܿ݀݁ݐܽݎ‬ଶ െ ݊‫ ݐ݊݁ݎݎݑܿ݀ܽ݋݈݋‬ଶ OUT-04 AO1 Filter Set filter time constant on analog output.
8 Target Freq Outputs set frequency as a standard. Outputs 10 If analog output at OUT-01 (AO1 Mode) is set to 15(Constant), the analog
OUT-05 A01 Const %
V at the maximum frequency (DRV-20). voltage output is dependent on the set parameter values (0–100%).
9 Ramp Freq Outputs frequency calculated with Acc/Dec Monitors analog output value. Displays the maximum output voltage as a
OUT-06 AO1 Monitor
function as a standard. May vary with actual percentage (%) with 10 V as the standard.
output frequency. Outputs 10 V.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 169 170 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.33.2 Analog Pulse Output Code Description

OUT-64 TO Filter Sets filter time constant on analog output.
Output item selection and pulse size adjustment can be made for the TO (Pulse Output) terminal.
OUT-65 TO If analog output item is set to constant, the analog pulse output is dependent on
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit Const % the set parameter values.
61 Pulse output setting TO Mode 0 Frequency 0–15 -
-1000.0– OUT-66 TO Monitors analog output value. Displays the maximum output pulse (32 kHz) as a
62 Pulse output gain TO Gain 100.0 % Monitor percentage (%) of the standard.
1000.0
63 Pulse output bias TO Bias 0.0 -100.0-100.0 %
OUT
64 Pulse output filter TO Filter 5 0–10000 ms
Pulse output constant Note
65 TO Const % 0.0 0.0-100.0 %
output2
OUT-08 AO2 Gain and OUT-09 AO2 Bias Tuning Mode on 4–20 mA output
66 Pulse output monitor TO Monitor 0.0 0.0–1000.0 %
1 Set OUT-07 (AO2 Mode) to Constant, and set OUT-11 (AO2 Const %) to 0.0 %.
2 Set OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) to 20.0% and then check current output. 4 mA output should be
Analog Pulse Output Setting Details displayed.
Code Description
3 If the value is less than 4 mA, gradually increase OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) until 4 mA is measured. If
Adjusts output value and offset. If frequency is selected as an output, it will the value is more than 4 mA, gradually decrease OUT-09 (AO2 Bias) until 4 mA is measured.
operate as shown below.
4 Set OUT-11 AO2 Const % to 100.0%
‫ݕܿ݊݁ݑݍ݁ݎܨ‬ 5 Set OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) to 80.0% and measure current output at 20 mA. If the value is less than
ܱܶ ൌ ൈ ܱܶ‫ ݊݅ܽܩ‬൅ ܱܶ‫ݏܽ݅ܤ‬
‫ݍ݁ݎܨݔܽܯ‬ 20 mA, gradually increase OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) until 20 mA is measured. If the value is more
than 20 mA, gradually decrease OUT-08 (AO2 Gain) until 20 mA is measured.
The following graph illustrates that the pulse output (TO) changes depend on
The functions for each code are identical to the descriptions for the 0–10 V voltage outputs with an
OUT-62 (TO Gain) and OUT-63 (TO Bias) values. The Y-axis is an analog output
output range 4–20 mA.
current(0–32 kHz), and X-axis is % value on output item.

For example, if the maximum frequency set with DRV-20 (Max Freq) is 60 Hz
and present output frequency is 30 Hz, then the x-axis value on the next graph is
50%. 5.34 Digital Output
OUT-62 TO Gain,
OUT-63 TO Bias
5.34.1 Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Settings
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
Multi-function relay1
31 Relay 1 29 Trip - -
setting
Multi-function output1
33 Q1 Define 14 Run - -
setting
OUT
Multi-function output
41 DO Status - 00– 11 bit
monitor
57 Detection frequency FDT Frequency 30.00 0.00–Maximum
Hz
58 Detection frequency band FDT Band 10.00 frequency
65–
IN Px terminal configuration Px Define 16 Exchange 0-54 -
71

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 171 172 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay Setting Details Code Description

Code Description
OUT-31 Relay1 Set relay (Relay 1) output options. Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When detected
frequency is set to 30 Hz, FDT-3 output is as shown in
Select output options for multi-function output terminal (Q1). Q1 is open collector the graph below.
OUT-33 Q1 Define
TR output.

Set output terminal and relay functions according to OUT-57 FDT (Frequency),
OUT-58 (FDT Band) settings and fault trip conditions.

Setting Function
0 None No output signal.
1 FDT-1 Detects inverter output frequency reaching the user set
frequency. Outputs a signal when the absolute value 4 FDT-4 Output signal can be separately set for acceleration
(set frequency–output frequency) < detected frequency and deceleration conditions.
width/2. O In acceleration: Operation frequency‫ ؤ‬Detected
When detected frequency width is 10 Hz, FDT-1 output frequency
is as shown in the graph below. O In deceleration: Operation frequency>(Detected
frequency–Detected frequency width/2)

Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When detected

frequency is set to 30 Hz, FDT-4 output is as shown in
the graph below.

OUT-41 DO Status
2 FDT-2 Outputs a signal when the user set frequency and
detected frequency (FDT Frequency) are equal, and
fulfills FDT-1 condition at the same time.
[Absolute value (set frequency-detected frequency) <
detected frequency width/2]&[FDT-1] 5 Overload Outputs a signal at motor overload.
6 IOL Outputs a signal when a fault is triggered from a
Detected frequency width is 10 Hz. When the detected protective function operation by inverter overload
frequency is set to 30 Hz, FDT-2 output is as shown inverse proportion.
in the graph below. 7 Underload Outputs a signal at load fault warning.
8 Fan Warning Outputs a signal at fan fault warning.
9 Stall Outputs a signal when a motor is overloaded and
stalled.
10 Over voltage Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage
rises above the protective operation voltage.
11 Low Voltage Outputs a signal when the inverter DC link voltage
drops below the low voltage protective level.
12 Over Heat Outputs signal when the inverter overheats.
3 FDT-3 Outputs a signal when the Absolute value (output 13 Lost command Outputs a signal when there is a loss of analog input
frequency–operation frequency) < detected frequency terminal and RS-485 communication command at the
width/2. terminal block.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 173 174 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description Code Description

Outputs a signal when communication power and Brake Control on page 165.
expansion an I/O power card is installed, and also
outputs a signal when losing analog input and
communication power commands.
14 RUN Outputs a signal when operation command is entered
and the inverter outputs voltage.
No signal output during DC braking.

15 Stop Outputs a signal at operation command off, and when

there is no inverter output voltage.
16 Steady Outputs a signal in steady operation.

17 Inverter line Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by the

inverter line.
18 Comm line Outputs a signal while the motor is driven by a
commercial power source. For details, refer to
Supply Power Transition on page 152.
19 Speed search Outputs a signal during inverter speed search
operation.
For details, refer to 5.14 Speed Search Operation on
page 144.
22 Ready Outputs signal when the inverter is in stand by
operation and ready to receive an external operation
command.
28 Timer Out A timer function to operate terminal output after a
certain time by using multi-function terminal block
input. For more details, refer to 5.29 Timer Settings on
page 164.
29 Trip Outputs a signal after a fault trip
Refer to
Multi-Function Output On/Off Control on page 166.
31 DB Warn %ED Refer to

Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration on

page 196.
34 On/Off Control Outputs a signal using an analog input value as a
standard.
Refer to
Multi-Function Output On/Off Control on page 166.
35 BR Control Outputs a brake release signal.
Refer to

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 175 176 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

5.34.2 Fault Trip Output using Multi-Function Output Terminal and Relay 5.34.3 Multi-function Output Terminal Delay Time Settings
The inverter can output fault trip state using multi-function output terminal (Q1) and relay (Relay 1). Set on-delay and off-delay times separately to control the output terminal and relay operation times.
The delay time set at codes OUT-50–51 applies to multi-function output terminal (Q1) and relay
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit (Relay 1), except when the multi-function output function is in fault trip mode.
30 Fault trip output mode Trip Out Mode 010 - bit
31 Multi-function relay1 Relay 1 29 Trip - - Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
OUT 33 Multi-function output1 Q1 Define 14 Run - - Multi-function output On
50 DO On Delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 s
53 Fault trip output on delay TripOut OnDly 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec delay
54 Fault trip output off delay TripOut OffDly 0.00 0.00–100.00 sec Multi-function output Off
OUT 51 DO Off Delay 0.00 0.00–100.00 s
delay
Select multi-function DO NC/NO
52 00* 00–11 bit
Fault Trip Output by Multi-function Output Terminal and Relay - Setting Details output terminal Sel
Code Description
Fault trip relay operates based on the fault trip output settings.
Output Terminal Delay Time Setting Details
Code Description
Item bit on bit off
LCD Select terminal type for relay and multi-function output terminal. An additional
keypad three terminal type selection bits at the terminal block will be added when an
expansion I/O is added. By setting the relevant bit to 0, it will operate A terminal
Select fault trip output terminal/relay and select 29(Trip Mode) at codes OUT- (Normally Open), and setting it to 1 will operate B terminal (Normally Closed).
31, 33. When a fault trip occurs in the inverter, the relevant terminal and relay OUT-52 DO NC/NO Shown below in the table are Relay 1 and Q1 settings starting from the right bit.
OUT-30 Trip Out Mode will operate. Depending on the fault trip type, terminal and relay operation Sel
can be configured as shown in the table below. Item bit on bit off
LCD keypad
Setting
Function
bit3 bit2 bit1
ü Operates when low voltage fault trips occur
Operates when fault trips other than low voltage
ü
occur
ü Operates when auto restart fails (PRT- 08–09)
OUT-31 Relay1 Set relay output (Relay 1).
Select output for multi-function output terminal (Q1). Q1 is open collector TR
OUT-33 Q1 Define
output.
OUT-53 TripOut On If a fault trip occurs, trip relay or multi-function output operates after the time
Dly, delay set in OUT-53. Terminal is off with the input initialized after the time
OUT-54 TripOut OffDly delay set in OUT-53.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 177 178 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Operation State Monitor Setting Details

5.35 Keypad Language Settings
Code Description
Select the language to be displayed on the LCD keypad. Keypad S/W Ver 1.04 and above provides Select items to display on the top-right side of the LCD keypad screen.
language selections. Choose the parameter settings based on the information to be displayed.
Codes CNF-20–23 share the same setting options as listed in the table
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit below.
0 English
1 Russian Setting Function
Select keypad
CNF 01 Language Sel 2 Spanish - - 0 Frequency On stop, displays the set frequency. During
language
3 Italian operation, displays the actual output
4 Turkish frequency (Hz).
1 Speed On stop, displays the set speed (rpm). During
operation, displays the actual operating
speed (rpm).
5.36 Operation State Monitor 2 Output Current Displays output current.
3 Output Voltage Displays output voltage.
The inverter’s operation condition can be monitored using the LCD keypad. If the monitoring option is 4 Output Power Displays output power.
selected in config (CNF) mode, a maximum of four items can be monitored simultaneously. 5 WHour Displays inverter power consumption.
Monitoring mode displays three different items on the LCD keypad, but only one item can be Counter
displayed in the status window at a time. 6 DCLink Displays DC link voltage within the inverter.
Voltage
Setting
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Unit 7 DI Status Displays input terminal status of the terminal
Range
block. Starting from the right, displays P1–P8.
Display item condition CNF-20 AnyTime Para
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency - - 8 DO Status Displays output terminal status of the terminal
display window
21 Monitor mode display 1 Monitor Line-1 0 Frequency - Hz block. Starting from the right, Relay1, Relay2,
CNF and Q1.
22 Monitor mode display 2 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current - A
23 Monitor mode display 3 Monitor Line-3 3 Output Voltage - V 9 V1 Monitor[V] Displays the input voltage value at terminal
24 Monitor mode initialize Mon Mode Init 0 No - - V1 (V).
10 V1 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V1 value as a
percentage. If -10 V, 0 V, +10 V is measured,
-100%, 0%, 100% will be displayed.
13 V2 Monitor[V] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value (V).
14 V2 Monitor[%] Displays input voltage terminal V2 value as a
percentage.
15 I2 Monitor[mA] Displays input current terminal I2 value (A).
16 I2 Monitor[%] Displays input current terminal I2 value as a
percentage.
17 PID Output Displays output of PID controller.
18 PID Ref Value Displays reference value of PID controller.
19 PID Fdb Value Displays feedback volume of PID controller.
20 Torque If the torque reference command mode
(DRV-08) is set to a value other than keypad
(0 or 1), the torque reference value is
displayed.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 179 180 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Advanced Features Learning Advanced Features

Code Description 5.37 Operation Time Monitor

21 Torque Limit If torque limit setting (CON-53) is set to a
value other than keypad (0 or 1), the torque Monitors inverter and fan operation time.
limit value is displayed.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting Range Unit
23 Spd Limit If the speed limit setting (CON-62) on torque
control mode is set to a value other than Inverter operation
70 On-time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
keypad (0 or 1), the speed limit setting is accumulated time
displayed. Inverter operation
71 Run-time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
accumulated time
Select the items to be displayed in monitor mode. Monitor mode is the Inverter operation
first displayed mode when the inverter is powered on. A total of three 72 accumulated time Time Reset 0 No 0–1 -
CNF-21–23 Monitor Line-x CNF
items, from monitor line-1 to monitor line- 3, can be displayed initialization
simultaneously. Cooling fan operation
74 Fan time 0/00/00 00:00 - min
accumulated time
CNF-24 Mon Mode Init Selecting 1(Yes) initializes CNF-20–23.
Cooling fan operation
Fan Time
75 accumulated time 0 No 0–1 -
Reset
initialization
Note
Inverter power consumption
Values are calculated using voltage and current. Electric power is calculated every second and the Operation Time Monitor Setting Details
results are accumulated. Setting CNF-62 (WH Count Reset) value to 1(Yes) will reset cumulated Code Description
electric energy consumption. Power consumption is displayed as shown below: Displays accumulated power supply time. Information is displayed in
CNF-70 On-time
[YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
O Less than 1,000 kW: Units are in kW, displayed in 999.9 kW format.
Displays accumulated time of voltage output by operation command input.
O 1–99 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 99.99 MWh format. CNF-71 Run-time
Information is displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
O 100–999 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 999.9 MWh format.
O More than 1,000 MW: Units are in MW, displayed in 9,999 MWh format and can be displayed up to Setting 1(Yes) will delete power supply accumulated time (On-time) and
65,535 MW. (Values exceeding 65,535MW will reset the value to 0, and units will return to kW. It CNF-72 Time Reset operation accumulated time (Run-time) and is displayed as 0/00/00 00:00
will be displayed in 999.9 kW format). format.
Displays accumulated time of inverter cooling fan operation. Information will
CNF-74 Fan time
be displayed in [YY/MM/DD Hr: Min (0/00/00 00: 00)] format.
Setting 1(Yes) will delete cooling fan operation accumulated time(on-time)
CNF-75 Fan Time
and operation accumulated time (Run-time) and will display it in 0/00/00
Reset
00:00 format.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 181 182 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

Electronic Thermal (ETH) Prevention Function Setting Details

6 Learning Protection Features Code Description

ETH can be selected to provide motor thermal protection. The LCD screen
Protection features provided by the SX2000 series inverter are categorized into two types: protection displays “E-Thermal.”
from overheating damage to the motor, and protection against the inverter malfunction.
Setting Function
PRT-40 ETH Trip Sel
0 None The ETH function is not activated.
1 Free-Run The inverter output is blocked. The motor coasts to a
halt (free-run).
6.1 Motor Protection 2 Dec The inverter decelerates the motor to a stop.
Select the drive mode of the cooling fan, attached to the motor.

6.1.1 Electronic Thermal Motor Overheating Prevention (ETH) Setting Function

0 Self-cool As the cooling fan is connected to the motor axis, the
ETH is a protective function that uses the output current of the inverter without a separate cooling effect varies, based on motor speed. Most
temperature sensor, to predict a rise in motor temperature to protect the motor based on its heat universal induction motors have this design.
characteristics. 1 Forced-cool Additional power is supplied to operate the cooling fan.
This provides extended operation at low speeds.
Grou Motors designed for inverters typically have this design.
Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
p
Electronic thermal
40 prevention fault trip ETH Trip Sel 0 None 0-2 - PRT-41 Motor Cooling
selection
41 Motor cooling fan type Motor Cooling 0 Self-cool - -
PRT Electronic thermal one
42 ETH 1min 150 120-200 %
minute rating
Electronic thermal
43 prevention continuous ETH Cont 120 50-150 %
rating

The amount of input current that can be continuously supplied to the motor
PRT-42 ETH 1 min
for 1 minute, based on the motor-rated current (BAS-13).
Sets the amount of current with the ETH function activated. The range below
PRT-43 ETH Cont details the set values that can be used during continuous operation without
the protection function.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 183 184 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

Code Description Coden Description

Select output terminal and relay are used to output a warning signal. If 1 (Yes) is
selected, it will operate. If 0 (No) is selected, it will not operate.
When the input current to the motor is greater than the overload warning level
PRT-18 OL Warn (OL Warn Level) and continues at that level during the overload warning time
Level, (OL Warn Time), the multi-function output (Relay 1, Q1) sends a warning
PRT-19 OL Warn signal. When Over Load is selected at OUT-31 and 33, the multi-function
Time output terminal or relay outputs a signal. The the signal output does not block
the inverter output.
Select the inverter protective action in the event of an overload fault trip.

Setting Function
PRT-20 OL Trip
0 None No protective action is taken.
Select
In the event of an overload fault, inverter output is
1 Free-Run
blocked and the motor will free-run due to inertia.
3 Dec If a fault trip occurs, the motor decelerates and stops.
6.1.2 Overload Early Warning and Trip
PRT-21 OL Trip When the current supplied to the motor is greater than the preset value at the
A warning or fault ‘trip’ (cutoff) occurs when the motor reaches an overload state, based on the Level, overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and continues to be supplied during the
motor’s rated current. The amount of current for warnings and trips can be set separately. PRT-22 OL Trip overload trip time (OL Trip Time), the inverter output is either blocked according
Time to the preset mode from PRT- 17 or slows to a stop after deceleration.
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Heavy
04 Load level setting Load Duty 1 - -
Duty
17 Overload warning selection OL Warn Select 1 Yes 0-1 -
18 Overload warning level OL Warn Level 150 30-180 %
PRT
19 Overload warning time OL Warn Time 10.0 0-30 s
20 Motion at overload trip OL Trip Select 1 Free-Run - -
21 Overload trip level OL Trip Level 180 30-200 %
22 Overload trip time OL Trip Time 60.0 0-60.0 s
31 Multi-function relay 1 item Relay 1
OUT 5 Over Load - -
33 Multi-function output 1 item Q1 Define
Note
Overload Early Warning and Trip Setting Details Overload warnings warn of an overload before an overload fault trip occurs. The overload warning
Coden Description signal may not work in an overload fault trip situation, if the overload warn level (OL Warn Level) and
Select the load level. the overload warn time (OL Warn Time) are set higher than the overload trip level (OL Trip Level) and
overload trip time (OL Trip Time).
Setting Function
Normal Used in underloads, like fans and pumps (overload
PRT-04 Load Duty 0
Duty tolerance: 120% of rated underload current for 1 minute).
Used in heavy loads, like hoists, cranes, and parking
1 Heavy Duty devices (overload tolerance: 150% of rated heavy load
current for 1 minute).
PRT-17 OL Warn If the overload reaches the warning level, the terminal block multi-function

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 185 186 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

6.1.3 Stall Prevention and Flux Braking Stall Prevention Function and Flux Braking Setting Details
Code Description
The stall prevention function is a protective function that prevents motor stall caused by overloads. If a
motor stall occurs due to an overload, the inverter operation frequency is adjusted automatically. Stall prevention can be configured for acceleration, deceleration, or while operating a
When stall is caused by overload, high currents are induced in the motor may cause motor overheat motor at constant speed. When the top LCD segment is on, the corresponding bit is
or damage the motor and interrupt operation of the motor-driven devices. set. When the bottom LCD segment is on, the corresponding bit is off.

To protect the motor from overload faults, the inverter output frequency is adjusted automatically, Item Bit Status (On) Bit Status (Off)
based on the size of load. LCD keypad

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Stall prevention and Setting
50 Stall Prevent 0000* - bit Function
flux braking Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
Start frequency– ü Stall protection during acceleration
51 Stall frequency 1 Stall Freq 1 60.00 Hz
Stall Freq 1
ü Stall protection while operating at a
52 Stall level 1 Stall Level 1 180 30-250 % constant speed
Stall Freq 1–Stall ü Stall protection during deceleration
53 Stall frequency 2 Stall Freq 2 60.00 Hz
Freq 3 ü Flux braking during deceleration
PRT 54 Stall level 2 Stall Level 2 180 30-250 %
Stall Freq 2–Stall Setting Function
55 Stall frequency 3 Stall Freq 3 60.00 Hz
Freq 4
0001 Stall protection If inverter output current exceeds the preset stall level
56 Stall level 3 Stall Level 3 180 30-250 %
during (PRT- 52, 54, 56, 58) during acceleration, the motor
Stall Freq 3– acceleration stops accelerating and starts decelerating. If current level
PRT-50 Stall
57 Stall frequency 4 Stall Freq 4 60.00 Maximum Hz stays above the stall level, the motor decelerates to the
Prevent
frequency start frequency (DRV-19). If the current level causes
58 Stall level 4 Stall Level 4 180 30-250 % deceleration below the preset level while operating the
Multi-function relay 1 stall protection function, the motor resumes acceleration.
31 Relay 1
item 0010 Stall protection Similar to stall protection function during acceleration, the
OUT 9 Stall - -
Multi-function output 1 while operating output frequency automatically decelerates when the
33 Q1 Define
item at constant current level exceeds the preset stall level while
speed operating at constant speed. When the load current
decelerates below the preset level, it resumes
acceleration.
0100 Stall protection The inverter decelerates and keeps the DC link voltage
during below a certain level to prevent an over voltage fault trip
deceleration during deceleration. As a result, deceleration times can
be longer than the set time depending on the load.
1000 Flux braking When using flux braking, deceleration time may be
during reduced because regenerative energy is expended at
deceleration the motor.
1100 Stall protection Stall protection and flux braking operate together during
and flux braking deceleration to achieve the shortest and most stable
during deceleration performance.
deceleration

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 187 188 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

Code Description Note

Stall protection and flux braking operate together only during deceleration. Turn on the third and fourth
bits of PRT-50 (Stall Prevention) to achieve the shortest and most stable deceleration performance
without triggering an overvoltage fault trip for loads with high inertia and short deceleration times. Do
not use this function when frequent deceleration of the load is required, as the motor can overheat
and may be damaged easily.

O Use caution when decelerating while using stall protection as depending on the load, the
deceleration time can take longer than the time set. Acceleration stops when stall protection
operates during acceleration. This may make the actual acceleration time longer than the preset
acceleration time.
O When the motor is operating, Stall Level 1 applies and determines the operation of stall
protection.

Additional stall protection levels can be configured for different frequencies, based on
the load type. As shown in the graph below, the stall level can be set above the base
frequency. The lower and upper limits are set using numbers that correspond in
ascending order. For example, the range for Stall Frequency 2 (Stall Freq 2) becomes
the lower limit for Stall Frequency 1 (Stall Freq 1) and the upper limit for Stall Frequency
3 (Stall Freq 3).

PRT-51 Stall
Freq 1-
PRT-58 Stall
Level 4

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 189 190 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

6.2 Inverter and Sequence Protection 6.2.2 External Trip Signal

Set one of the multi-function input terminals to 4 (External Trip) to allow the inverter to stop operation
when abnormal operating conditions arise.
6.2.1 Open-phase Protection Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define
Open-phase protection is used to prevent overcurrent levels induced at the inverter inputs due to an 65-71 4 External Trip 0-54 -
options (Px: P1-P7)
open-phase within the input power supply. Open-phase output protection is also available. An open- IN
phase at the connection between the motor and the inverter output may cause the motor to stall, due Multi-function input DI NC/NO
87 - bit
to a lack of torque. contact selection Sel

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Input/output open- Phase Loss External Trip Signal Setting Details
05 11 - bit
phase protection Chk Code Description
PRT
Open-phase input
06 IPO V Band 40 1-100 V V Selects the type of input contact. If the mark of the switch is at the bottom (0), it
voltage band
operates as an A contact (Normally Open). If the mark is at the top (1), it
operates as a B contact (Normally Closed).
Input and Output Open-phase Protection Setting Details IN-87 DI NC/NO
The corresponding terminals for each bit are as follows:
Code Description Sel
When open-phase protection is operating, input and output configurations are Bit 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
displayed differently. When the top LCD segment is On, the corresponding bit Terminal P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
is set to On. When the bottom LCD segment is On, the corresponding bit is set
to Off.
Item Bit status (On) Bit status (Off)
PRT-05 Phase Loss LCD keypad
Chk,
PRT-06 IPO V Band

Setting
Function
Bit 2 Bit 1
ü Output open-phase protection
ü Input open-phase protection

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 191 192 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

6.2.3 Inverter Overload Protection Speed Command Loss Setting Details

Code Description
When the inverter input current exceeds the rated current, a protective function is activated to prevent
damages to the inverter based on inverse proportional characteristics. In situations when speed commands are lost, the inverter can be configured to
operate in a specific mode:
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 Setting Function
OUT 6 IOL - - 0 None The speed command immediately becomes the operation
33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define
frequency without any protection function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in free-run
condition.
Note
PRT-12 Lost 2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops at the time set at
A warning signal output can be provided in advance by the multi-function output terminal before the Cmd Mode PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
inverter overload protection function (IOLT) operates. When the overcurrent time reaches 60% of the 3 Hold Input The inverter calculates the average input value for 10
allowed overcurrent (150%, 1 min), a warning signal output is provided (signal output at 150%, seconds before the loss of the speed command and uses
36sec). it as the speed reference.
4 Hold Output The inverter calculates the average output value for 10
seconds before the loss of the speed command and uses
it as the speed reference.
6.2.4 Speed Command Loss 5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT- 14 (Lost
Preset F).
When setting operation speed using an analog input at the terminal block, communication options, or
the keypad, speed command loss setting can be used to select the inverter operation for situations Configure the voltage and decision time for speed command loss when using analog
when the speed command is lost due to the disconnection of signal cables. input.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit Setting Function
Speed command loss Lost Cmd 0 Half of x1 Based on the values set at IN-08 and IN-12, protective
12 1 Free-Run - -
operation mode Mode operation starts when the input signal is reduced to half of
Time to determine the initial value of the analog input set using the speed
13 Lost Cmd Time 1.0 0.1-120 s
speed command loss command (DRV-07) and it continues for the time (speed
PRT-15 AI
PRT Operation frequency Start loss decision time) set at PRT- 13 (Lost Cmd Time). For
Lost Level,
14 at speed command Lost Preset F 0.00 frequency– Hz example, set the speed command to 2 (V1) at the 07 code
PRT-13 Lst
loss Max. frequency in the DRV group, and IN-06 (V1 Polarity) to 0 (Unipolar).
Cmd Time
Analog input loss When the voltage input drops to less than half of the value
15 AI Lost Level 0 Half of x1 - set at IN-08 (V1 Volt x 1), the protective function is
decision level
31 Multi-function Relay 1 Relay 1 Lost activated.
OUT 13 - - 1 Below x1 The protective operation starts when the signal becomes
33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define Command
smaller than the initial value of the analog input set by the
speed command and it continues for the speed loss
decision time set at PRT-13 (Lost Cmd Time). Codes IN-08
and IN-12 are used to set the standard values.

In situations where speed commands are lost, set the operation mode (PRT-12 Lost
PRT-14 Lost
Cmd Mode) to 5 (Lost Preset). This operates the protection function and sets the
Preset F
frequency so that the operation can continue.

Set PRT-15 (Al Lost Level) to 1 (Below x 1), PRT-12 (Lost Cmd Mode) to 2 (Dec), and PRT-13 (Lost
Cmd Time) to 5 sec. Then it operates as follows:
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 193 194 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

6.2.5 Dynamic Braking (DB) Resistor Configuration

For SX2000 series, the braking resistor circuit is integrated inside the inverter.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Braking resistor
PRT 66 DB Warn %ED 10 0-30 %
configuration
Multi-function relay 1
31 Relay 1
item DB
OUT 31 - -
Multi-function output Warn %ED
33 Q1 Define
1 item

Note Dynamic Breaking Resistor Setting Details

Code Description
If speed command is lost while using communication options or the integrated RS-485
communication, the protection function operates after the command loss decision time set at PRT-13 Set braking resistor configuration (%ED: Duty cycle). Braking resistor
(Lost Cmd Time) is passed. configuration sets the rate at which the braking resistor operates for one
operation cycle. The maximum time for continuous braking is 15 sec and the
braking resistor signal is not output from the inverter after the 15 sec period
has expired. An example of braking resistor set up is as follows:

̴ܶ݀݁ܿ
Ψ‫ ܦܧ‬ൌ ൈ ͳͲͲΨ
̴ܶܽܿܿ ൅ ̴ܶ‫ ݕ݀ܽ݁ݐݏ‬൅ ̴ܶ݀݁ܿ ൅ ̴ܶ‫݌݋ݐݏ‬


PRT-66 DB
Warn %ED

[Example 1]

̴ܶ݀݁ܿ
Ψ‫ ܦܧ‬ൌ ൈ ͳͲͲΨ
̴ܶ݀݁ܿ ൅ ̴ܶ‫ ͳݕ݀ܽ݁ݐݏ‬൅ ̴ܶܽܿܿ ൅ ̴ܶ‫ʹݕ݀ܽ݁ݐݏ‬

[Example 2]

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 195 196 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

Code Description 6.3 Underload Fault Trip and Warning

O T_acc: Acceleration time to set frequency Grou Cod
Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
O T_steady: Constant speed operation time at set frequency p e
04 Load level selection Load Duty 0 Normal Duty - -
O T_dec: Deceleration time to a frequency lower than constant speed
Underload warning
operation or the stop time from constant speed operation frequency 25 UL Warn Sel 1 Yes 0-1 -
selection
O T_stop: Stop time until operation resumes
UL Warn
26 Underload warning time 10.0 0-600 sec
Time
PRT 27 Underload trip selection UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run - -
28 Underload trip timer UL Trip Time 30.0 0-600 sec
Underload upper limit
Do not set the braking resistor to exceed the resistor’s power rating. If overloaded, it can overheat and 29 UL LF Level 30 10-100 %
level
cause a fire. When using a resistor with a heat sensor, the sensor output can be used as an external
Underload lower limit
trip signal for the inverter’s multi-function input. 30 UL BF Level 30 10-100 %
level

Under Load Trip and Warning Setting Details

Code Description
Sets the inverter operation mode for situations when an underload trip occurs. If
set to 1 (Free-Run), the output is blocked in an underload fault trip situation. If
set to 2 (Dec), the motor decelerates and stops when an underload trip occurs.
At PRT-27, the underload rate is decided based on twice the operation
frequency of the motor’s rated slip speed (BAS-12 Rated Slip).

PRT-27 UL Trip Sel

Select the underload warning options. Set the multi-function output terminals (at
PRT-25 UL Warn
OUT-31 and 33) to 7 (Underload). The warning signals are output when an
Sel
underload condition arises.
The protection function operates when the underload level condition explained
above is maintained for a set warning time or fault trip time. This function does
PRT-26 UL Warn
not operate if energy-saving operation is activated at ADV-50 (E-Save Mode). At
Time,
PRT-28, the underload rate is decided based on the base frequency set at
PRT-28 UL Trip
DRV-18 (Base Freq). When variable torque is required (for example, for fans or
Time
pumps), set PRT-04 (Load Duty) to 0 (Normal Duty). For loads operated at
constant torques, like elevators and conveyors, set PRT-04 to 1 (Heavy Duty).

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 197 198 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

Code Description 6.3.2 Lifetime diagnosis of components

Registering a capacitance reference for inspection

Note

To perform a capacitor diagnosis, a capacitance reference must be measured and registered by

setting PRT-61 (CAP Diag) to 1 (Ref Diag) when the inverter is used for the first time. The measured
reference value is saved at PRT-63 and is used asthe reference for the capacitor life diagnosis.

Refer to the following instructions to measure a reference capacitance.

1 Set an appropriate capacitor diagnosis current based on the inverter’s rated output at PRT-60
PRT-29 UL LF (CAP DiagCurr).
Level, PRT-30 UL Set the range necessary for underload detection, depending on the type of load.
O The capacitor diagnosis current is a direct current that is applied to the capacitor for inspection,
BF Level
and is defined asin a percentage of the rated inverter output. Because the value is defined
based on the inverter output, set an appropriate value if the motor has smaller rated current.
2 At PRT-62 (CAP Exchange Level), set the capacitor replacement warning level to a value
between 50.0% and 95.0%
6.3.1 Fan Fault Detection
3 Set PRT-61 (CAP Diag) to “1” (Ref Diag). Then, the direct current set at PRT-60 (CAP
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit DiagCurr)is output.
PRT 79 Cooling fan fault selection FAN Trip Mode 0 Trip O The capacitor diagnosis is only available when the inverter is stopped.
OUT 31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1
8 FAN Warning - O If PRT-61is set to 1 (Ref Diag), the displayed value at PRT-63 reflects 100% of the measured
OUT 33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define
capacitance.
O If you plan to perform a capacitor diagnosis using PRT-61(CAP Diag), the initial capacitance
Fan Fault Detection Setting Details must be measured when the inverter is used for the first time. A capacitance measured on a
used inverter leads to inaccurate inspection results due to an incorrect reference capacitance
Code Description
value.
Set the cooling fan fault mode.
4 Turn off the input to the inverter.
Setting Function 5 Turn on the inverter when a low voltage trip (LVT) occurs.
PRT-79 FAN Trip 0 Trip The inverter output is blocked and the fan trip is 6 View the value displayed at PRT-63 (CAP Diag Level). When PRT-61 is set to “1” (Ref Diag),
Mode displayed when a cooling fan error is detected. PRT-63 displaySx2000% of the capacitance.
1 Warning When OUT33 (Q1 Define) and OUT31 (Relay1)
are set to 8 (FAN Warning), the fan error signal is
[Main Capacitor Diagnosis details]
output and the operation continues.
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting value Setting Range Unit
When the code value is set to 8 (FAN Warning), the fan error signal is output
OUT33 Q1 Define, Capacitance
and operation continues. However, when the inverter inside temperature rises
OUT31 Relay1 60 Diagnose current CAP. DiagPerc 0.0 10.0-100.0 %
above a certain level, output is blocked due to activation of overheat protection.
Level
PRT 0 None
CAP. Diagnosis 1 Ref Diag
61 CAP. Diag 0 %
mode 2 Pre Diag
3 Init Diag

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 199 200 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

Group Code Name LCD Display Setting value Setting Range Unit Group Code Name LCD Display Setting value Setting Range Unit
CAP Exchange CAP Exchange 0 31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1 -
62 50.0 ~ 95.0 % FAN
Level Level OUT 32 Multi-function relay 2 Relay 2 38
Exchange
63 CAP Diag Level CAP Diag 0 % 33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define
0.0 ~ 100.0
Level

Inspecting the capacitor life and initializing the capacitance reference

6.3.3 Low Voltage Fault Trip
Refer to the following instructions to inspect the capacitor life and initialize the capacitance reference.
When inverter input power is lost and the internal DC link voltage drops below a certain voltage level,
the inverter stops output and a low voltage trip occurs.
Note

To perform a capacitor diagnosis, a capacitance reference must be measured and registered by Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
setting PRT-61 (CAP Diag) to 1 (Ref Diag) when the inverter is used for the first time. The measured Low voltage trip decision
PRT 81 LVT Delay 0.0 0-60 sec
reference value is registered at PRT-63, and is used asthe reference for the capacitor life diagnosis. delay time
31 Multi-function relay 1 Relay 1
OUT 11 Low Voltage -
1 On an inverter whose run time has reached the cumulated time for capacitor replacement, set 33 Multi-function output 1 Q1 Define
PRT-61 (CAP Diag) to 2 (Pre Diag).
2 Check the value displayed at PRT-63 (CAP Diag Level). If the value displayed at PRT-63 is Low Voltage Fault Trip Setting Details
smaller than the value set at PRT-62 (CAP. Level 1), a capacitor replacement warning (CAP Code Description
Exchange) will occur. If the code value is set to 11 (Low Voltage), the inverter stops the output first
3 While the capacitor replacement warning continues, confirm that the first bit at PRT-89 (Inverter when a low voltage trip condition arises, then a fault trip occurs after the low
State) is set. PRT-81 LVT Delay voltage trip decision time is passed. The warning signal for a low voltage fault
trip can be provided using the multi-function output or a relay. However, the low
4 Set PRT-62 to 0.0%. The capacitor replacement warning (CAP Exchange) will be released.
voltage trip delay time (LVT Delay time) does not apply to warning signals.
5 Set PRT-61 to 3 (CAP. Init) and make sure that the value displayed at PRT-63has changed to
0.0%.

6.3.4 Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal

Lifetime diagnosis for fans
When the multi-function input terminal is set as the output block signal terminal and the signal is input
Enter the PRT-87(Fan exchange warning level) code (%). After the selected usage (%) is reached
to the terminal, then the operation stops.
(out of 50,000 hours), the fan exchange warning message will appear in the multi-functional output or
keypad. Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
The total fan usage level (%) appears at PRT-86. When exchanging fans, you may initialize the Px terminal setting Px Define(Px: P1-
IN 65-71 5 BX 0-54 -
accumulated value to 0 by setting the CNF-75 (Initializing accumulated time for cooling fans) to 1. options P7)

Group Code Name LCD Display Setting value Setting Range Unit Output Block by Multi-Function Terminal Setting Details
Accumulated percentof 0.0-6553.5 Code Description
86 FAN Time Perc 0.0 %
PRT fan usage When the operation of the multi-function input terminal is set to 5 (BX) and is
87 Fan exchange warning FAN Exchange 90.0 0.0-100.0 % turned on during operation, the inverter blocks the output and ‘BX’ is displayed
Level on the keypad display. While ‘BX’ is displayed on the keypad screen, the
IN-65-71 Px Define
0 No inverter’s operation information including the operation frequency and current
Initialize operation time at the time of BX signal can be monitored. The inverter resumes operation
CNF 75 FAN Time Rst - -
of cooling fans when the BX terminal turns off and operation command is input.
1 Yes

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 201 202 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features Learning Protection Features

6.3.5 Trip Status Reset Code Description

The motor decelerates to the value set at PRT-07
Restart the inverter using the keypad or analog input terminal, to reset the trip status. 2 Dec
(Trip Dec Time).
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Px terminal setting Px Define(Px: P1-
IN 65-71 3 RST 0-54 -
options P7)
6.3.8 No Motor Trip
Trip Status Reset Setting Details
If an operation command is run when the motor is disconnected from the inverter output terminal, a
Code Description ‘no motor trip’ occurs and a protective operation is performed by the system.
Press [Stop/Reset] key on the keypad or use the multi-function input terminal
IN-65-71 Px Define to restart the inverter. Set the multi-function input terminal to 3 (RST) and turn Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
on the terminal to reset the trip status. 31 Operation on no motor trip No Motor Trip 0 None - -
PRT 32 No motor trip current level No Motor Level 5 1-100 %
33 No motor detection time No Motor Time 3.0 0.1-10 s

6.3.6 Inverter Diagnosis State

No Motor Trip Setting Details
Check the diagnosis of components or devices for inverter to check if they need to be replaced. Code Description
PRT-32 No Motor If the output current value [based on the rated current (BAS-13)] is lower than
Parameter Level, PRT-33 No the value set at PRT-32 (No Motor Level), and if this continues for the time set
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting Motor Time at PRT-33 (No Motor Time), a ‘no motor trip’ occurs.
Bit 00-10
CAP, FAN   00 -
PRT 89 replacement Inverter State Bit
01 CAP Warning
warning
10 FAN Warning If BAS-07 (V/F Pattern) is set to 1 (Square), set PRT-32 (No Motor Level) to a value lower than the
factory default. Otherwise, ‘no motor trip’ due to a lack of output current will result when the ‘no motor
trip’ operation is set.

6.3.7 Operation Mode on Option Card Trip

Option card trips may occur when an option card is used with the inverter. Set the operation mode for 6.3.9 Low voltage trip 2
the inverter when a communication error occurs between the option card and the inverter body, or
when the option card is detached during operation. If you set the PRT-82(LV2 Selection) code to Yes (1), the trip notification is displayed when a low
voltage trip occurs. In this case, even if the voltage of the DC Link condenser is higher than the trip
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit level, the LV2 trip will not be retrieved. To retrieve the trip, reset the inverter. The trip history will not be
0 None saved.
Operation mode on option
PRT 80 Opt Trip Mode 1 Free-Run 0-3 -
card trip
2 Dec Parameter
Group Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Unit
Setting
Operation Mode on Option Trip Setting Details
PRT 82 LV2 Selection LV2 Enable Yes(1) 0/1 -
Code Description
Setting Function
PRT-80 Opt Trip 0 None No operation
Mode The inverter output is blocked and fault trip
1 Free-Run
information is shown on the keypad.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 203 204 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Learning Protection Features RS-485 Communication Features

6.4 Fault/Warning List 7 RS-485 Communication Features

The following list shows the types of faults and warnings that can occur while using the SX2000 This section in the user manual explains how to control the inverter with a PLC or a computer over a
inverter. Please refer to 6 Learning Protection Features on page 183 for details about faults and long distance using the RS-485 communication features. To use the RS-485 communication features,
warnings. connect the communication cables and set the communication parameters on the inverter. Refer to
the communication protocols and parameters to configure and use the RS-485 communication
Category LCD Display Details features.
Over Current1 Over current trip
Over Voltage Over voltage trip
External Trip Trip due to an external signal
NTC Open Temperature sensor fault trip
Over Current2 ARM short current fault trip
7.1 Communication Standards
Option Trip-x* Option fault trip* Following the RS-485 communication standards, SX2000 products exchange data with a PLC and
Over Heat Over heat fault trip computer. The RS-485 communication standards support the Multi-drop Link System and offer an
Out Phase Open Output open-phase fault trip interface that is strongly resistant to noise. Please refer to the following table for details about the
In Phase Open Input open-phase fault trip communication standards.
Latch type Inverter OLT Inverter overload fault trip
Ground Trip Ground fault trip Item Standard
Fan Trip Fan fault trip Communication method/
E-Thermal Motor overheat fault trip RS-485/Bus type, Multi-drop Link System
Transmission type
Major fault Pre-PID Fail Pre-PID operation failure Inverter type name SX2000
IO Board Trip IO Board connection fault trip
Number of connected
Ext-Brake External brake fault trip Maximum of 16 inverters / Maximum1,200m (recommended distance:
inverters/ Transmission
No Motor Trip No motor fault trip within 700m)
distance
Low Voltage 2 Low voltage fault trip during operation Recommended cable
ParaWrite Trip Write parameter fault trip 0.75mm², (18AWG), Shielded Type Twisted-Pair (STP) Wire
size
Low Voltage Low voltage fault trip Installation type Dedicated terminals (S+/S-/SG) on the control terminal block
BX Emergency stop fault trip
Level type Supplied by the inverter - insulated power source from the inverter’s
Lost Command Command loss trip Power supply
internal circuit
Safety A(B) Err Safety A(B) contact trip
Communication speed 1,200/2,400/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
EEP Err External memory error
Hardware ADC Off Set Analog input error Control procedure Asynchronous communications system
damage Watch Dog-1 Communication system Half duplex system
CPU Watch Dog fault trip
Watch Dog-2 Character system Modbus-RTU: Binary
Overload Motor overload fault trip Stop bit length 1-bit/2-bit
Minor fault
Underload Motor underload fault trip Frame error check 2 bytes
Lost Command Command loss fault trip warning
Parity check None/Even/Odd
Overload Overload warning
Underload Underload warning
Inverter OLT Inverter overload warning
Warning Fan Warning Fan operation warning
DB Warn %ED Braking resistor braking rate warning
Retry Tr Tune Rotor time constant tuning error
CAP Exchange Capacitor replacement warning
FAN Exchange Fan replacement warning
* Applies only when an option board is used.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 205 206 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

7.2 Communication System Configuration 7.2.2 Setting Communication Parameters

In an RS-485 communication system, the PLC or computer is the master device and the inverter is Before proceeding with setting communication configurations, make sure that the communication
the slave device. When using a computer as the master, the RS-232 converter must be integrated lines are connected properly. Turn on the inverter and set the communication parameters.
with the computer, so that it can communicate with the inverter through the RS-232/RS-485 converter.
Specifications and performance of converters may vary depending on the manufacturer, but the basic Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
functions are identical. Please refer to the converter manufacturer’s user manual for details about Built-in communication
01 Int485 St ID 1 1-250 -
features and specifications. inverter ID
Built-in communication ModBus
02 Int485 Proto 0 0, 2 -
Connect the wires and configure the communication parameters on the inverter by referring to the protocol RTU
following illustration of the communication system configuration. Built-in communication
COM 03 Int485 BaudR 3 9600 bps 0-7 -
speed
Built-in communication
04 Int485 Mode 0 D8/PN/S1 0-3 -
frame setting
Transmission delay after
05 Resp Delay 5 0-1000 ms
reception

Communication Parameters Setting Details

Code Description
COM-01 Int485 St ID Set the inverter station ID between 1 and 250.
Select Modbus-RTU
COM-02 Int485 Proto
Setting Function
7.2.1 Communication Line Connection
0 Modbus-RTU Modbus-RTU compatible protocol
Make sure that the inverter is turned off completely, and then connect the RS-485 communication line Set a communication setting speed up to 115,200 bps.
to the S+/S-/SG terminals of the terminal block. The maximum number of inverters you can connect is
16. For communication lines, use shielded twisted pair (STP) cables. Setting Function
0 1,200 bps
The maximum length of the communication line is 1,200 meters, but it is recommended to use no
more than 700 meters of communication line to ensure stable communication. Please use a repeater 1 2,400 bps
COM-03 Int485
to enhance the communication speed when using a communication line longer than 1,200 meters or 2 4,800 bps
BaudR
when using a large number of devices. A repeater is effective when smooth communication is not 3 9,600 bps
available due to noise interference. 4 19,200 bps
5 38,400 bps
6 56K bps
7 115 Kbps
Set a communication configuration. Set the data length, parity check method,
When wiring the communication line, make sure that the SG terminals on the PLC and inverter are and the number of stop bits.
connected. SG terminals prevent communication errors due to electronic noise interference.
Setting Function
COM-04 Int485 Mode
0 D8/PN/S1 8-bit data / no parity check / 1 stop bit
1 D8/PN/S2 8-bit data / no parity check / 2 stop bits
2 D8/PE/S1 8-bit data / even parity / 1 stop bit
3 D8/PO/S1 8-bit data / odd parity / 1 stop bit
COM-05 Resp Delay Set the response time for the slave (inverter) to react to the request from the

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 207 208 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

Code Description 7.2.4 Command Loss Protective Operation

master. Response time is used in a system where the slave device response
Configure the command loss decision standards and protective operations run when a
is too fast for the master device to process. Set this code to an appropriate
communication problem lasts for a specified period of time.
value for smooth master-slave communication.
Command Loss Protective Operation Setting Details
Code Description
Select the operation to run when a communication error has occurred and
lasted exceeding the time set at PRT- 13.

Setting Function
0 None The speed command immediately becomes the
operation frequency without any protection
function.
1 Free-Run The inverter blocks output. The motor performs in
PRT-12 Lost Cmd free-run condition.
Mode, 2 Dec The motor decelerates and then stops at the time
PRT-13 Lost Cmd set at PRT-07 (Trip Dec Time).
Time
3 Hold Input The inverter calculates the average input value for
10 seconds before the loss of the speed command
7.2.3 Setting Operation Command and Frequency
and uses it as the speed reference.
To select the built-in RS485 communication as the source of command, set the DRV-06 code to 3 4 Hold Output The inverter calculates the average output value
(Int485). Then, set common area parameters for the operation command and frequency via for 10 seconds before the loss of the speed
communication. command and uses it as the speed reference.
5 Lost Preset The inverter operates at the frequency set at PRT-
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit 14 (Lost Preset F).
06 Command source Cmd Source 3 Int 485 0-4 -
DRV Frequency setting
07 Freq Ref Src 6 Int 485 0-12 -
method

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 209 210 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

7.2.5 Setting Virtual Multi-Function Input 7.2.6 Saving Parameters Defined by Communication
Multi-function input can be controlled using a communication address (0h0385). Set codes COM-70– If you turn off the inverter after setting the common area parameters or keypad parameters via
77 to the functions to operate, and then set the BIT relevant to the function to 1 at 0h0322 to operate it. communication and operate the inverter, the changes are lost and the values changed via
Virtual multi-function operates independently from IN-65-71 analog multi-function inputs and cannot communication revert to the previous setting values when you turn on the inverter.
be set redundantly. Virtual multi-function input can be monitored using COM-86 (Virt Dl Status).
Before you configure the virtual multi-function inputs, set the DRV-06 code according to the command Set CNF-48 to 1 (Yes) to allow all the changes over comunication to be saved, so that the inverter
source. retains all the existing values even after the power has been turned off.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit Setting address 0h03E0 to 0 and then setting it again to 1 via communication allows the existing
parameter settings to be saved. However, setting address 0h03E0 to 1 and then setting it to 0 does
Communication multi- Virtual DI x
70-77 0 None 0-49 - not carry out the same function.
function input x (x: 1-8)
COM Communication multi-
Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
86 function input Virt DI Status - - - -
Parameter 0 No
monitoring CNF 48 Save parameters 0 -1 -
Save 1 Yes

Example: When sending an Fx command by controlling virtual multi-function input in the common
area via Int485, set COM-70 to FX and set address 0h0322 to 0h0001.
7.2.7 Total Memory Map for Communication
Communication Area Memory Map Details
Note Communication common
0h0000-0h00FF iS5, iP5A, iV5, iG5A compatible area
compatible area
The following are values and functions that are applied to address 0h0322:. Areas registered at COM-31–38 and COM-
0h0100-0h01FF
51–58
Setting Function Parameter registration type
0h0200-0h023F Area registered for User Group
area
0h0001 Forward operation (Fx) 0h0240-0h027F Area registered for Macro Group
0h0280-0h02FF Reserved
0h0003 Reverse operation (Rx)
0h0300-0h037F Inverter monitoring area
0h0000 Stop 0h0380-0h03DF Inverter control area
0h03E0-0h03FF Inverter memory control area
0h0400-0h0FFF Reserved
0h1100 DRV Group
0h1200 BAS Group
SX2000 communication 0h1300 ADV Group
common area 0h1400 CON Group
0h1500 IN Group
0h1600 OUT Group
0h1700 COM Group
0h1800 APP Group
0h1B00 PRT Group
0h1C00 M2 Group

7.2.8 Parameter Group for Data Transmission

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 211 212 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

By defining a parameter group for data transmission, the communication addresses registered in the 7.3 Communication Protocol
communication function group (COM) can be used in communication. Parameter group for data
transmission may be defined to transmit multiple parameters at once, into the communication frame.

Group Code Name LCD Display Parameter Setting Setting range Unit
Output communication 7.3.1 Modbus-RTU Protocol
31-38 Para Status-x - - 0000-FFFF Hex
address x
COM
Input communication
51-58 Para Control-x - - 0000-FFFF Hex
address x
7.3.1.1 Function Code and Protocol (unit: byte)

Currently Registered CM Group Parameter In the following section, station ID is the value set at COM-01 (Int485 St ID), and starting address is
the communication address. (starting address size is in bytes). For more information about
Address Parameter Assigned content by bit communication addresses, refer to 7.4 Compatible Common Area Parameter on page 217.
0h0100- Status Parameter-1- Parameter communication code value registered at COM-
0h0107 Status Parameter-8 31-38 (Read-only) Function Code #03: Read Holding Register
Control Parameter-
Parameter communication code value registered at COM- Query Field Name Response Field Name
0h0110-0h0117 1-
51-58 (Read/Write access) Station ID Station ID
Control Parameter-8
Function(0x03) Function (0x03)
Note Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi
When registering control parameters, register the operation speed (0h0005, 0h0380, 0h0381) and # of Points Hi Data Lo
operation command (0h0006, 0h0382) parameters at the end of a parameter control frame. For # of Points Lo …
example, when the parameter control frame has 5 parameter control items (Para Control - x), register CRC Lo … # number of Points
the operation speed at Para Control-4 and the operation command to Para Control-5. CRC Hi Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi

Function Code #04: Read Input Register

Query Field Name Response Field Name

Station ID Station ID
Function(0x04) Function (0x04)
Starting Address Hi Byte Count
Starting Address Lo Data Hi
# of Points Hi Data Lo
# of Points Lo … # number of Points
CRC Lo …
CRC Hi Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Lo
CRC Hi
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 213 214 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

Exception Code
Function Code #06: Preset Single Register
Code
Query Field Name Response Field Name 01: ILLEGAL FUNCTION
Station ID Station ID 02: ILLEGAL DATA
Function (0x06) Function (0x06) ADRESS
Starting Address Hi Register Address Hi
03: ILLEGAL DATA VALUE
Register Address Lo Register Address Lo
Preset Data Hi Preset Data Hi 06: SLAVE DEVICE BUSY
Preset Data Lo Preset Data Lo
CRC Lo CRC Lo
Response
CRC Hi CRC Hi
Field Name
Station ID
Function*
Function Code #16 (hex 0h10): Preset Multiple Register
Exception Code
Query Field Name Response Field Name CRC Lo
Station ID Station ID CRC Hi
Function (0x10) Function (0x10) * The function value uses the top level bit for all query values.
Starting Address Hi Starting Address Hi
Starting Address Lo Starting Address Lo Example of Modbus-RTU Communication in Use
# of Register Hi # of Register Hi When the Acc time (Communication address 0x1103) is changed to 5.0 sec and the Dec time
# of Register Lo # of Register Lo (Communication address 0x1104) is changed to 10.0 sec.
Byte Count CRC Lo
Frame Transmission from Master to Slave (Request)
Data Hi CRC Hi Station Starting # of Byte
Data Lo Item Function Data 1 Data 2 CRC
ID Address Register Count
… # number of Points 0x120
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0x04 0x0032 0x0064
… 2
50 100
Data Hi COM-01 Preset Starting
(ACC (DEC
Data Lo Description Int485 Multiple Address -1 - - -
time time
CRC Lo St ID Register (0x1103-1)
5.0sec) 10.0sec)
CRC Hi
Frame Transmission from Slave to Master (Response)
Item Station ID Function Starting Address # of Register CRC
Hex 0x01 0x10 0x1102 0x0002 0xE534
COM-01 Preset Multiple Starting Address -1
Description - -
Int485 St ID Register (0x1103-1)

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 215 216 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

7.4 Compatible Common Area Parameter Comm.

Address
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit

The following are common area parameters compatible with Fx2000, Ex2000 & Lx2000 0h0008 Deceleration time 0.1 s R/W -
0h0009 Output current 0.1 A R -
Comm. 0h000A Output frequency 0.01 Hz R -
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit
Address 0h000B Output voltage 1 V R -
0h0000 Inverter model - - R 6: SX2000 0h000C DC link voltage 1 V R -
0: 0.75 kW, 1: 1.5 kW, 2: 2.2 kW 0h000D Output power 0.1 kW R -
3: 3.7 kW, 4: 5.5 kW, 5: 7.5 kW B15 0: Remote, 1: Keypad Local
6: 11 kW, 7: 15 kW, 8: 18.5 kW 1: Frequency command
9: 22 kW 10: 30 kW, 11: 37 kW B14 source by communication
0h0001 Inverter capacity - - R
12: 45 kW 13: 55 kW, 14: 75 kW (built-in, option)
256: 0.4 kW, 257: 1.1 kW, 258: 3.0 1: Operation command
kW B13 source by communication
259: 4.0 kW (built-in, option)
Inverter input 0: 220 V product B12 Reverse operation command
0h0002 - - R
voltage 1: 440 V product B11 Forward operation command
Example 0h0100: Version 1.00 B10 Brake release signal
0h0003 Version - - R
Example 0h0101: Version 1.01 B9 Jog mode
0h0004 Reserved - - R/W 0h000E Operation status - - R B8 Drive stopped.
Command B7 DC Braking
0h0005 0.01 Hz R/W
frequency B6 Speed reached
B15 Reserved B5 Decelerating
B14 0: Keypad Freq, B4 Accelerating
B13 1: Keypad Torq Fault Trip - operates
B12 2-16: Terminal block multi- B3
according to PRT-30 setting
B11 step speed Operating in reverse
17: Up, 18: Down B2
B10 direction
19: STEADY Operating in forward
22: V1, 24: V2, 25: I2, B1
direction
R 26: Reserved B0 Stopped
B9 27: Built-in 485 B15 Reserved
28: Communication option B14 Reserved
Operation 30: JOG, 31: PID
0h0006 - - B13 Reserved
command (option) B8 0: Keypad
B12 Reserved
B7 1: Fx/Rx-1
B11 Reserved
2: Fx/Rx-2
B10 H/W-Diag
B6 3: Built-in 485
B9 Reserved
4: Communication option
Fault trip B8 Reserved
B5 Reserved 0h000F - - R
information B7 Reserved
B4 Emergency stop
B6 Reserved
W: Trip initialization (0à1),
B3 B5 Reserved
R/W R: Trip status
B2 Reverse operation (R) B4 Reserved
B1 Forward operation (F) B3 Level Type trip
B0 Stop (S) B2 Reserved
0h0007 Acceleration time 0.1 s R/W - B1 Reserved
B0 Latch Type trip
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 217 218 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

Comm.
Address
Parameter Scale Unit R/W Assigned Content by Bit 7.5 SX2000 Expansion Common Area Parameter
B15-
Reserved
B7
B6 P7
7.5.1 Monitoring Area Parameter (Read Only)
B5 P6
Input terminal
0h0010 - - R B4 P5
information Comm. Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
B3 P4
B2 P3 0h0300 Inverter model - - SX2000: 0006h
B1 P2 0.4 kW: 1900h, 0.75 kW: 3200h
B0 P1
B15 Reserved 1.1 kW: 4011h, 1.5 kW: 4015h
B14 Reserved 2.2 kW: 4022h, 3.0 kW: 4030h
B13 Reserved
3.7 kW: 4037h, 4.0 kW: 4040h
B12 Reserved
B11 Reserved 0h0301 Inverter capacity - - 5.5 kW: 4055h, 7.5 kW: 4075h
B10 Reserved 11 kW: 40B0h, 15 kW: 40F0h
B9 Reserved
18.5 kW: 4125h, 22 kW: 4160h
Output terminal B8 Reserved
0h0011 - - R 30 kW: 41E0h, 37 kW: 4250h
information B7 Reserved
45 kW: 42D0h, 55 kW: 4370h
B6 Reserved
75 kW: 44B0h
B5 Reserved
100 V single phase self cooling: 0120h, 200
B4 Reserved V 3-phase forced cooling: 0231h
B3 Reserved 100 V single phase forced cooling: 0121h,
Inverter input
B2 Reserved voltage/power 400 V single phase self cooling: 0420h
B1 MO (Single phase, 3- 200 V single phase self cooling: 0220h, 400
B0 Relay 1 0h0302 - -
phase)/cooling V 3-phase self cooling: 0430h
0h0012 V1 0.01 % R V1 input voltage method 200 V 3-phase self cooling: 0230h, 400 V
0h0013 V2 0.01 % R V2 input voltage single phase forced cooling: 0421h
0h0014 I2 0.01 % R I2 input current 200 V single phase forced cooling: 0221h,
Motor rotation 400 V 3-phase forced cooling: 0431h
0h0015 1 rpm R Displays existing motor rotation speed
speed
Inverter S/W (Ex) 0h0100: Version 1.00
0h0016 0h0303 - -
Reserved - - - - version 0h0101: Version 1.01
- 0h0019
0h001A Select Hz/rpm - - R 0: Hz unit, 1: rpm unit 0h0304 Reserved - - -
Display the number
Display the number of poles for the B15 0: Normal state
0h001B of poles for the - - R
selected motor 4: Warning occurred
selected motor B14
8: Fault occurred [operates
B13 according to PRT- 30 (Trip Out
B12 Mode) setting.]
Inverter operation
0h0305 - -
state B11 -
-
B8
B7 1: Speed searching
B6 2: Accelerating

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 219 220 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

Comm. Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit Comm. Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
B5 3: Operating at constant rate 0h0319 PID feedback 0.1 % -
4: Decelerating Display the
Displays the number of poles for the first
5: Decelerating to stop 0h031A number of poles - -
st motor
B4 6: H/W OCS for the 1 motor
7: S/W OCS Display the
Displays the number of poles for the 2nd
8: Dwell operating 0h031B number of poles - -
nd motor
B3 for the 2 motor
0: Stopped Display the
B2 1: Operating in forward direction number of poles Displays the number of poles for the selected
2: Operating in reverse direction 0h031C - -
B1 for the selected motor
3: DC operating (0 speed control) motor
B0
0h031D Select Hz/rpm - - 0: Hz, 1: rpm
B15 0h031E
B14 Reserved - - -
Operation command source - 0h031F
B13 BI5 Reserved
0: Keypad
B12 - -
1: Communication option
B11 B7 Reserved
3: Built-in RS 485
B10 B6 P7(I/O board)
4: Terminal block
B9 Digital input B5 P6(I/O board)
B8 0h0320
information B4 P5(I/O board)
Inverter operation B7 Frequency command source B3 P4(I/O board)
0h0306 frequency - - B6 0: Keypad speed B2 P3(I/O board)
command source B5 1: Keypad torque B1 P2(I/O board)
B4 2-4: Up/Down operation speed B0 P1(I/O board)
B3 5: V1, 7: V2, 8: I2
BI5 Reserved
B2 9: Pulse
- Reserved
B1 10: Built-in RS 485
B4 Reserved
11: Communication option Digital output
0h0321 - - B3 Reserved
13: Jog information
B0 14: PID B2 Reserved
25-39: Multi-step speed frequency B1 Q1
LCD keypad S/W B0 Relay 1
0h0307 - - (Ex.) 0h0100: Version 1.00 B15 Reserved
version
LCD keypad title - Reserved
0h0308 - - (Ex.) 0h0101: Version 1.01 B8 Reserved
version
0h0309 -0h30F Reserved - - - B7 Virtual DI 8(COM-77)
0h0310 Output current 0.1 A - B6 Virtual DI 7(COM-76)
Virtual digital input
0h0311 Output frequency 0.01 Hz - 0h0322 - - B5 Virtual DI 6(COM-75)
information
0h0312 Output rpm 0 rpm - B4 Virtual DI 5(COM-74)
Motor feedback B3 Virtual DI 4(COM-73)
0h0313 0 rpm -32768 rpm-32767 rpm (directional) B2 Virtual DI 3(COM-72)
speed
0h0314 Output voltage 1 V - B1 Virtual DI 2(COM-71)
0h0315 DC Link voltage 1 V - B0 Virtual DI 1(COM-70)
0h0316 Output power 0.1 kW - Display the
0h0323 - - 0: 1st motor/1: 2nd motor
0h0317 Output torque 0.1 % - selected motor
0h0318 PID reference 0.1 % - 0h0324 AI1 0.01 % Analog input V1 (I/O board)

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 221 222 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

Comm. Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit Comm. Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit
0h0325 Reserved 0.01 % B0 MC Fail Trip
0h0326 AI3 0.01 % Analog input V2 (I/O board) B15 Reserved
0h0327 AI4 0.01 % Analog input I2 (I/O board) - -
0h0328 AO1 0.01 % Analog output 1 (I/O board) B8 Reserved
0h0329 AO2 0.01 % Analog output 2 (I/O board) B7 Reserved
0h032A AO3 0.01 % Reserved B6 Reserved
Level type trip
0h032B AO4 0.01 % Reserved 0h0332 - - B5 SafetyB
information
0h032C Reserved - - - B4 SafetyA
0h032D Reserved - - - B3 Keypad Lost Command
0h032E Reserved - - - B2 Lost Command
0h032F Reserved - - - B1 LV
BI5 Fuse Open Trip B0 BX
BI4 Over Heat Trip B15 Reserved
BI3 Arm Short - Reserved
BI2 External Trip B6 Reserved
BI1 Overvoltage Trip B5 Queue Full
H/W Diagnosis
BI0 Overcurrent Trip 0h0333 - - B4 Reserved
Trip information
B9 NTC Trip B3 Watchdog-2 error
Latch type trip B8 Reserved B2 Watchdog-1 error
0h0330 - -
information - 1 B7 Reserved B1 EEPROM error
B6 Input open-phase trip B0 ADC error
B5 Output open-phase trip B15 Reserved
B4 Ground Fault Trip
- Reserved
B3 E-Thermal Trip
B2 Inverter Overload Trip B10 Reserved
B1 Underload Trip B9 Auto Tuning failed
B0 Overload Trip B8 Keypad lost
BI5 Reserved
B7 Encoder disconnection
BI4 Reserved Warning
Safety option to block inverter 0h0334 - - B6 Wrong installation of encoder
information
output at the terminal block B5 DB
BI3
input (only for products rated at B4 FAN running
90 kW and above).
B3 Lost command
BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved B2 Inverter Overload
Latch type trip BI0 Bad option card B1 Underload
0h0331 - -
information - 2 B9 No motor trip B0 Overload
B8 External brake trip
B7 Bad contact at basic I/O board 0h0335 -0h033F Reserved - - -
B6 Pre PID Fail
B5 Error while writing parameter Total number of days the inverter has been
0h0340 On Time date 0 Day
B4 Reserved powered on
B3 FAN Trip Total number of minutes excluding the total
B2 PTC (Thermal sensor) Trip 0h0341 On Time minute 0 Min
number of On Time days
B1 Reserved

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 223 224 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

Comm. Address Parameter Scale Unit Assigned content by bit 7.5.2 Control Area Parameter (Read/ Write)
Total number of days the inverter has driven
0h0342 Run Time date 0 Day Comm.
the motor Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit
Address
Total number of minutes excluding the total
0h0343 Run Time minute 0 Min Frequency
number of Run Time days 0h0380 0.01 Hz Command frequency setting
command
Total number of days the heat sink fan has 0h0381 RPM command 1 rpm Command rpm setting
0h0344 Fan Time date 0 Day
been running B7 Reserved
Total number of minutes excluding the total B6 Reserved
0h0345 Fan Time minute 0 Min
number of Fan Time days B5 Reserved
0h0346 B4 Reserved
Reserved - - - B3 0 à 1: Free-run stop
-0h0348
Operation B2 0 à 1: Trip initialization
0h0349 Reserved - - - 0h0382 - -
command 0: Reverse command, 1: Forward
0h034A Option 1 - - 0: None, 9: CANopen B1
command
0h034B Reserved - - B0 0: Stop command, 1: Run command
0h034C Reserved Example: Forward operation command 0003h,
Reverse operation command 0001h.

Acceleration
0h0383 0.1 s Acceleration time setting
time
Deceleration
0h0384 0.1 s Deceleration time setting
time
BI5 Reserved
- Reserved
B8 Reserved
B7 Virtual DI 8(COM-77)
Virtual digital B6 Virtual DI 7(COM-76)
0h0385 input control (0: - - B5 Virtual DI 6(COM-75)
Off, 1:On) B4 Virtual DI 5(COM-74)
B3 Virtual DI 4(COM-73)
B2 Virtual DI 3(COM-72)
B1 Virtual DI 2(COM-71)
B0 Virtual DI 1(COM-70)
BI5 Reserved
BI4 Reserved
BI3 Reserved
BI2 Reserved
BI1 Reserved
Digital output BI0 Reserved
0h0386 control - - B9 Reserved
(0:Off, 1:On) B8 Reserved
B7 Reserved
B6 Reserved
B5 Reserved
B4 Reserved
B3 Reserved
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 225 226 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 RS-485 Communication Features RS-485 Communication Features

Comm.
Parameter Scale Unit Assigned Content by Bit
7.5.3 Inverter Memory Control Area Parameter (Read and Write)
Address
B2 Reserved Comm. Changeable
Parameter Scale Unit Function
B1 Q1 (I/O board, OUT-33: None) Address During Operation
B0 Relay 1 (I/O board, OUT-31: None) 0h03E0 Save parameters - - X 0: No, 1:Yes
0h0387 Reserved - - Reserved Monitor mode
0h03E1 - - O 0: No, 1:Yes
0h0388 PID reference 0.1 % PID reference command initialization
PID feedback 0: No, 1: All Grp, 2: DRV Grp
0h0389 0.1 % PID feedback value 3: BAS Grp, 4: ADV Grp, 5:
value
Motor rated CON Grp
0h038A 0.1 A - 6: IN Grp, 7: OUT Grp, 8: COM
current Parameter
Motor rated 0h03E2 - - X Grp
0h038B 1 V - initialization
voltage 9: APP Grp, 12: PRT Grp, 13:
0h038C- M2 Grp
Reserved - Setting is prohibited during fault
0h038F
0h0390 Torque Ref 0.1 % Torque command trip interruptions.
Fwd Pos Display changed
0h0391 0.1 % Forward motoring torque limit 0h03E3 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
Torque Limit parameters
Fwd Neg 0h03E4 Reserved - - - -
0h0392 0.1 % Forward regenerative torque limit Delete all fault
Torque Limit 0h03E5 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
Rev Pos history
0h0393 0.1 % Reverse motoring torque limit Delete user-
Torque Limit 0h03E6 - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
Rev Neg registrated codes
0h0394 0.1 % Reverse regenerative torque limit Hide parameter Write: 0-9999
Torque Limit 0h03E7 0 Hex O
0h0395 Torque Bias 0.1 % Torque bias mode Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
0h0396- 0h399 Reserved - - - Lock parameter Write: 0-9999
0h03E8 0 Hex O
Set the CNF-20 value (refer to 5.36 Operation mode Read: 0: Unlock, 1: Lock
0h039A Anytime Para - - Easy start on
State Monitor on page 179)
Set the CNF-21 value (refer to 5.36 Operation 0h03E9 (easy parameter - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
0h039B Monitor Line-1 - - setup mode)
State Monitor on page 179)
Set the CNF-22 value (refer to 5.36 Operation Initializing power
0h039C Monitor Line-2 - - 0h03EA - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
State Monitor on page 179) consumption
Set the CNF-23 value (refer to 5.36 Operation Initialize inverter
0h039D Monitor Line-3 - - operation
State Monitor on page 179) 0h03EB - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
accumulative
Note time
Initialize cooling
A frequency set via communication using the common area frequency address (0h0380, 0h0005) is 0h03EC fan accumulated - - O 0: No, 1: Yes
not saved even when used with the parameter save function. To save a changed frequency to use operation time
after a power cycle, follow these steps:
1 Set DRV-07 to Keypad-1 and select a random target frequency.
2 Set the frequency via communication into the parameter area frequency address (0h1101).
3 Perform the parameter save (0h03E0: '1') before turning off the power. After the power cycle, the
frequency set before turning off the power is displayed.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 227 228 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 RS-485 Communication Features Table of Functions

Note
8 Table of Functions
O When setting parameters in the inverter memory control area, the values are reflected to the
inverter operation and saved. Parameters set in other areas via communication are reflected to This chapter lists all the function settings for SX2000 series inverter. Set the parameters required
the inverter operation, but are not saved. All set values are cleared following an inverter power according to the following references. If a set value input is out of range, the following messages will
cycle and revert back to its previous values. When setting parameters via communication, be displayed on the keyboard. In these cases, the inverter will not operate with the [ENT] key.
ensure that a parameter save is completed prior to shutting the inverter down.
O Set parameters very carefully. After setting a parameter to 0 via communication, set it to another O Set value not allocated: rd
value. If a parameter has been set to a value other than 0 and a non-zero value is entered again, O Set value repetition (multi-function input, PID reference, PID feedback related): OL
an error message is returned. The previously-set value can be identified by reading the O Set value not allowed (select value, V2, I2): no
parameter when operating the inverter via communication.
O The addresses 0h03E7 and 0h03E8 are parameters for entering the password. When the
password is entered, the condition will change from Lock to Unlock, and vice versa. When the
same parameter value is entered continuously, the parameter is executed just once. Therefore, if 8.1 Drive group (PAR→DRV)
the same value is entered again, change it to another value first and then re-enter the previous
value. For example, if you want to enter 244 twice, enter it in the following order: 244 à 0 à In the following table, data shaded in grey will be displayed when the related code has been selected.
244.
SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09)
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation
Comm. Initial Property
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
Address value *
It may take longer to set the parameter values in the inverter memory control area because all data is 00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 9 O O O p.45
saved to the inverter. Be careful as communication may be lost during parameter setup if parameter
Start frequency -
setup is continues for an extended period of time. Target Cmd
01 0h1101 Maximum 0.00 O O O p.58
frequency Frequency
frequency(Hz)
Torque Cmd
02 0h1102 -180~180[%] 0.0 O X O -
command Torque
Acceleration
03 0h1103 Acc Time 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O O O p.76
time
Deceleration
04 0h1104 Dec Time 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O p.76
time
0 Keypad
1 Fx/Rx-1
Command Cmd 1:
06 0h1106 2 Fx/Rx-2 X O O p.70
source Source Fx/Rx-1
3 Int 485
4 Field Bus
0 Keypad-1
1 Keypad-2
2 V1
Frequency 0:
Freq Ref 4 V2
07 0h1107 reference Keypad- X O O p.58
Src 5 I2
source 1
6 Int 485
8 Field Bus
12 Pulse
Torque 0 Keypad-1 0:
08 0h1108 Reference Trq Ref Scr 1 Keypad-2 Keypad- X X O p.142
Setting 2 V1 1

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 229 230 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Property Comm. Initial Property

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
Address value * Address value *
4 V2 1 Forward
16 0h1110 Fwd Boost 0.0-15.0(%) 2.0 X O X p.86
5 I2 Torque boost
6 Int485 3 Reverse
17 0h1111 Rev Boost 0.0-15.0(%) 2.0 X O X p.86
8 Fieldbus Torque boost
12 Pulse Base 30.00-
18 0h1112 Base Freq 50.00 X O O p.83
0 V/F frequency 400.00(Hz)
Slip p.83, Start
Control Control 2 19 0h1113 Start Freq 0.01-10.00(Hz) 0.50 X O O p.83
09 0h1109 Compen 0: V/F X O O p.121, frequency
mode Mode
IM p.133 40.00-
4 400.00(Hz)[V/F,
Sensorless
Torque Torque 0 No Maximum Slip Compen]
10 0h110A 0: No X X O p.141 20 0h1114 Max Freq 60.00 X O O p.92
Control Control 1 Yes frequency 40.00-
0.00, Start 120.00(Hz)[IM
Jog Jog frequency- Sensorless]
11 0h110B 10.00 O O O p.112 Hz
frequency Frequency Maximum 0
frequency(Hz) Select speed Display 0:Hz
21 0h1115 Hz/Rpm Sel O O O p.68
Jog run unit Rpm Display
Jog Acc 1
12 0h110C acceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O O O p.112 Display
Time (+) Torque
time 22
2
0h1116 (+) Trq Gain 50.0–150.0[%] 100[%] O X O -
Jog run Gain
Jog Dec (-)Torque
13 0h110D deceleration 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O p.112 232 0h1117 (-) Trq Gain 50.0–150.0[%] 80.0[%] O X O -
Time Gain
time
0: 0.2 kW, (-)Torque (-) Trq
242 0h1118 50.0–150.0[%] 80.0[%] O X O -
1: 0.4 kW Gain0 Gain0
2: 0.75 kW, (-)Torque (-) Trq
252 0h1119 0.0-100.0[%] 40.0[%] O X O -
3: 1.1 kW Offset Offset
4: 1.5 kW, Select ranges
5: 2.2 kW inverter displays
6: 3.0 kW, at power input
7: 3.7 kW Run
0
8: 4.0 kW, frequency
9: 5.5 kW Varies Accelerati
Motor Motor 1
14 0h110E 10: 7.5 kW, by Motor X O O p.130 on time
capacity Capacity Select 0: run
11: 11.0 kW capacity Decelerati
80 0h1150 ranges at - 2 frequenc O O O -
12: 15.0 kW, on time
power input y
13: 18.5 kW Comman
3
14: 22.0 kW d source
15: 30.0 kW Frequenc
16:37 kW y
4
17:45.0 kW reference
18:55.0 kW source
19:75 kW 5 Multi-step
20:90 kW
Torque boost Torque 0 Manual 0:
15 0h110F X O X 1
options Boost 1 Auto Manual Displayed when DRV-15 is set to 0 (Manual)
2
Displayed when DRV-10 is set to 1 (Yes)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 231 232 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Property Comm. Initial Property

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
Address value * Address value *
speed Torque
2
frequency (kgf ž m)
1 Display 0 View All
0:
Multi-step 89 0h03E3 changed - View O O O p.159
1 View All
speed parameter Changed
6
frequency Move to
2 0 initial
Multi-step [ESC] key position 0: p.72,
90 0h115A - X O O
speed functions 1 JOG Key None p.115
7
frequency Local/Re
3 2
mote
Output 0 No
8
current 1 All Grp
Motor 2 DRV Grp
9
RPM 3 BAS Grp
Inverter 4 ADV Grp
10 DC Parameter 5 CON Grp
voltage 93 0h115D - 0:No X O O p.156
initialization 6 IN Grp
User 7 OUT Grp
select 8 COM Grp
11
signal 9 APP Grp
(DRV-81)
12 PRT Grp
Currently
13 M2 Grp
12 out of
Password 0-
order 94 0h115E - O O O p.157
registration 9999
Select run
13 Parameter 0-
direction 95 0h115F - O O O p158
lock settings 9999
output
14 Software
current2 97 0h1161 - - - O O -
version
Motor
15 Display I/O
RPM2
98 0h1162 board IO S/W Ver - - O O
Inverter
version
16 DC
Multiple
voltage2 0
IO
User Display I/O
Standard Standar
select 99 0h1163 board HW IO H/W Ver 1 - O O -
17 IO d IO
signal2 version
Standard
(DRV-81) 2
IO (M)
Monitors user
selected code
Output
0 0:
Select voltage(V)
81 0h1151 - output O O O -
monitor code Output
voltage
electric
1
power(kW
)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 233 234 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

8.2 Basic Function group (PAR→BAS) Code

Comm.
Address
Name LCD Display Setting Range
Initial
Value
Property* V/F SL Ref.

In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been command 1 Keypad-2 Keypa
selected. source 2 V1 d-1
4 V2
SL: Sensorless vector control function (DRV-09) 5 I2
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation 6 Int 485
Comm. Initial 8 FieldBus
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. 12 Pulse
Address Value
00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 20 O O O p.45 0 Linear
0 None V/F pattern 1 Square 0:
07 0h1207 V/F Pattern X O X p.83
Auxiliary 1 V1 options 2 User V/F Linear
01 0h1201 reference Aux Ref Src 3 V2 0:None X O O p.108 3 Square 2
source 4 I2 Acc/dec 0 Max Freq 0:
Ramp T
6 Pulse 08 0h1208 standard Max X O O p.76
Mode 1 Delta Freq
0 M+(G*A) frequency Freq
1 Mx (G*A) 0 0.01 sec
Time scale 1:0.1
2 M/(G*A) 09 0h1209 Time Scale 1 0.1 sec X O O p.76
settings sec
3 M+[M*(G*A)] 2 1 sec
Auxiliary M+G*2(A- Input power 0 60 Hz 1:50
4 0: 10 0h120A 60/50 Hz Sel X O O p.154
3 command Aux Calc 50%) frequency 1 50 Hz Hz
02 0h1202 M+(GA X O O p.108
calculation Type Mx[G*2(A-
5 ) Number of
type 50%) 11 0h120B Pole Number 2-48 X O O p.121
motor poles
M/[G*2(A-
6 Rated slip Depen
50%)] 12 0h120C Rated Slip 0-3000(Rpm) X O O p.121
speed dent on
M+M*G*2(A
7 Motor rated motor
-50%) 13 0h120D Rated Curr 1.0-1000.0(A) X O O p.121
current setting
Auxiliary
Motor noload
03 0h1203 command Aux Ref Gain -200.0-200.0(%) 100.0 O O O p.108 14 0h120E Noload Curr 0.0-1000.0(A) X O O p.121
current
gain
Motor rated
0 Keypad 15 0h120F Rated Volt 170-480(V) 0 X O O p.87
voltage
1 Fx/Rx-1 1:
2nd command Depen
04 0h1204 Cmd 2nd Src 2 Fx/Rx-2 Fx/Rx- X O O p.94
source Motor dent on
3 Int 485 1 16 0h1210 Efficiency 70-100(%) X O O p.121
efficiency motor
4 FieldBus
setting
0 Keypad-1 Load inertia
1 Keypad-2 17 0h1211 Inertia Rate 0-8 X O O p.121
rate
2 V1 Trim power
0: 18 0h1212 Trim Power % 70-130(%) O O O -
2nd frequency 4 V2 display
05 0h1205 Freq 2nd Src Keypa O O O p.94
source 5 I2 Input power 220/38
d-1 19 0h1213 AC Input Volt 170-480 V O O O p.154
6 Int 485 voltage 0V
8 FieldBus 0 None
12 Pulse All (Rotation
06 0h1206 2nd Torque
nd
Trq 2 Src 0 Keypad-1 0: O X O 1
Auto type)
20 - Auto Tuning 0:None X X O p.130
Tuning ALL (Static
2
type)
Ñ
Displayed when BAS-01 is not set to 0 (None) 3 Rs+Lsigma
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 235 236 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Value
(Rotation Multi-step
0.00-Maximum
type) 546 0h1236 speed Step Freq-5 0.00 O O O p.68
frequency(Hz)
Tr (Static frequency5
6 Multi-step
type) 0.00-Maximum
21 - Stator resistor Rs X X O p.130 556 0h1237 speed Step Freq-6 0.00 O O O p.68
Depen frequency(Hz)
Leakage frequency6
22 - Lsigma Dependent on dent on X X O p.130 Multi-step
inductance 0.00-Maximum
motor setting motor 566 0h1238 speed Step Freq-7 0.00 O O O p.68
Stator frequency(Hz)
23 - Ls setting X X O p.130 frequency7
inductance
4 Rotor time Multi-step
24 - Tr 25-5000(ms) - X X O p.130 70 0h1246 acceleration Acc Time-1 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O O O p.78
constant
Stator time1
254 - inductance Ls Scale 50-150(%) 100 X X O - Multi-step
scale 71 0h1247 deceleration Dec Time-1 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O O O p.78
Rotor time time1
264 - Tr Scale 50-150(%) 100 X X O - Multi-step
constant scale 7
User 0.00-Maximum 72 0h1248 acceleration Acc Time-2 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O p.78
5
41 0h1229 User Freq 1 12.50 X O X p.85 time2
frequency1 frequency(Hz)
425 0h122A User voltage1 User Volt 1 0-100(%) 25 X O X p.85 Multi-step
0.00-0.00- 737 0h1249 deceleration Dec Time-2 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O p.78
User time2
435 0h122B User Freq 2 Maximum 25.00 X O X p.85
frequency2 Multi-step
frequency(Hz)
445 0h122C User voltage2 User Volt 2 0-100(%) 50 X O X p.85 747 0h124A acceleration Acc Time-3 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O O O p.78
time3
User 0.00-Maximum
455 0h122D User Freq 3 37.50 X O X p.85 Multi-step
frequency3 frequency(Hz)
757 0h124B deceleration Dec Time-3 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O O O p.78
465 0h122E User voltage3 User Volt 3 0-100(%) 75 X O X p.85
time3
User 0.00-Maximum
475 0h122F User Freq 4 50 X O X p.85 Multi-step
frequency4 frequency(Hz)
767 0h124C acceleration Acc Time-4 0.0-600.0(s) 50.0 O O O p.78
485 0h1230 User voltage4 User Volt 4 0-100(%) 100 X O X p.85
time4
Multi-step
6 0.00-Maximum Multi-step
506 0h1232 speed Step Freq-1 0.00 O O O p.68
frequency(Hz) 777 0h124D deceleration Dec Time-4 0.0-600.0(s) 50.0 O O O p.78
frequency1
time4
Multi-step
0.00-Maximum Multi-step
516 0h1233 speed Step Freq-2 0.00 O O O p.68
frequency(Hz) 787 0h124E acceleration Acc Time-5 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O O O p.78
frequency2
time5
Multi-step
0.00-Maximum Multi-step
526 0h1234 speed Step Freq-3 0.00 O O O p.68
frequency(Hz) 797 0h124F deceleration Dec Time-5 0.0-600.0(s) 40.0 O O O p.78
frequency3
time5
Multi-step
0.00-Maximum Multi-step
536 0h1235 speed Step Freq-4 0.00 O O O p.68
frequency(Hz) 807 0h1250 acceleration Acc Time-6 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O p.78
frequency4
time6
Multi-step
4 817 0h1251 Dec Time-6 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O p.78
Displayed when DRV-09 is set to 4(IM Sensorless) deceleration
5
Displayed when either BAS-07 or M2-25 is set to 2 (User V/F)
6 7
Displayed when one of IN-65-71 is set to Speed–L/M/H Displayed when one of IN-65-71 is set to Xcel–L/M/H
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 237 238 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Code
Comm.
Address
Name LCD Display Setting Range
Initial
Value
Property* V/F SL Ref. 8.3 Advanced Function group (PAR→ADV)
time6 In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been
Multi-step selected.
827 0h1252 acceleration Acc Time-7 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O O O p.78
time7 SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09)
Multi-step *O/X: Write-enabled during operation
837 0h1253 deceleration Dec Time-7 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O O O p.78 Comm. Initial
time7 Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value
00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 24 O O O p.45
Acceleration
01 0h1301 Acc Pattern 0 Linear X O O p.80
pattern 1: S-
Deceleration curve
02 0h1302 Dec Pattern 1 S-curve X O O p.80
pattern
S-curve
8 acceleration
03 0h1303 Acc S Start 1-100(%) 40 X O O p.80
start point
gradient
S-curve
acceleration
048 0h1304 Acc S End 1-100(%) 40 X O O p.80
end point
gradient
S-curve
9 deceleration
05 0h1305 Dec S Start 1-100(%) 40 X O O p.80
start point
gradient
S-curve
deceleration
069 0h1306 Dec S End 1-100(%) 40 X O O p.80
end point
gradient
0 Acc
07 0h1307 Start Mode Start Mode 0:Acc X O O p.88
1 DC-Start
0 Dec
1 DC-Brake
08 0h1308 Stop Mode Stop Mode 2 Free-Run 0:Dec X O O p.89
Power
4
Braking
Selection of 0 None
prohibited 1 Forward Prev 0:
09 0h1309 Run Prevent X O O p.73
rotation None
2 Reverse Prev
direction
Starting with Power-on 0 No
10 0h130A 0:No O O O p.74
power on Run 1 Yes
10
12 0h130C DC braking DC-Start 0.00-60.00(s) 0.00 X O O p.88

8
Displayed when ADV- 01 is set to 1 (S-curve)
9
Displayed when ADV- 02 is set to 1 (S-curve)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 239 240 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Value
time at startup Time Jump frequency
Jump
Amount of 13 lower limit1-
13 0h130D DC Inj Level 0-200(%) 50 X O O p.88 29 0h131D frequency Jump Hi 1 15.00 O O O p.93
applied DC Maximum
upper limit1
Output frequency(Hz)
11 blocking time DC-Block Jump 0.00-Jump
14 0h130E 0.00- 60.00(s) 0.10 X O O p.89 13
before DC Time 30 0h131E frequency Jump Lo 2 frequency upper 20.00 O O O p.93
braking lower limit2 limit2(Hz)
11 DC braking DC-Brake Jump frequency
15 0h130F 0.00- 60.00(s) 1.00 X O O p.89 Jump
time Time 13 lower limit2-
31 0h131F frequency Jump Hi 2 25.00 O O O p.93
11 DC braking DC-Brake Maximum
16 0h1310 0-200(%) 50 X O O p.89 upper limit2
rate Level frequency(Hz)
11 DC braking DC-Brake Start frequency- Jump 0.00-Jump
17 0h1311 0.5 X O O p.89 13
frequency Freq 60 Hz 32 0h1320 frequency Jump Lo 3 frequency upper 30.00 O O O p.93
Dwell Start frequency- lower limit3 limit3(Hz)
Acc Dwell p.11
20 0h1314 frequency on Maximum 5.00 X O O Jump frequency
Freq 9 Jump
acceleration frequency(Hz) 13 lower limit3-
33 0h1321 frequency Jump Hi 3 35.00 O O O p.93
Dwell Maximum
Acc Dwell p.11 upper limit3
21 0h1315 operation time 0.0-60.0(s) 0.0 X O O frequency(Hz)
Time 9
on acceleration 14 Brake release p.16
41 0h1329 BR Rls Curr 0.0-180.0(%) 50.0 O O O
Dwell Start frequency- current 5
Dec Dwell p.11 p.16
22 0h1316 frequency on Maximum 5.00 X O O 14 Brake release
Freq 9 42 0h132A BR Rls Dly 0.00-10.00(s) 1.00 X O O
deceleration frequency(Hz) delay time 5
Dwell Brake release
14 BR Rls Fwd 0.00-Maximum p.16
operation time Dec Dwell p.11 44 0h132C Forward 1.00 X O O
23 0h1317 0.0-60.0(s) 0.0 X O O Fr frequency(Hz) 5
on Time 9 frequency
deceleration Brake release
14 BR Rls Rev 0.00-Maximum p.16
0 No 45 0h132D Reverse 1.00 X O O
24 0h1318 Frequency limit Freq Limit 0:No X O O p.92 Fr frequency(Hz) 5
1 Yes frequency
Frequency 14 Brake engage p.16
12 0.00-Upper limit 46 0h132E BR Eng Dly 0.00-10.00(s) 1.00 X O O
25 0h1319 lower limit Freq Limit Lo 0.50 O O O p.92 delay time 5
frequency(Hz) p.16
value 14 Brake engage 0.00-Maximum
47 0h132F BR Eng Fr 2.00 X O O
Lower limit maxim frequency frequency(Hz) 5
Frequency
12 frequency- um 0 None
26 0h131A upper limit Freq Limit Hi X O O p.92 Energy saving E-Save 0:Non p.14
Maximum freque 50 0h1332 1 Manual X O X
value operation Mode e 1
frequency(Hz) ncy 2 Auto
Frequency 0 No
27 0h131B Jump Freq 0:No X O O p.93 15 Energy saving p.14
jump 1 Yes 51 0h1333 Energy Save 0-30(%) 0 O O X
level 1
Jump 0.00-Jump
13 Acc/Dec time
28 0h131C frequency Jump Lo 1 frequency upper 10.00 O O O p.93 Xcel Change 0.00-Maximum
60 0h133C transition 0.00 X/A O O p.79
lower limit1 limit1(Hz) Fr frequency(Hz)
frequency
Cooling fan 0 During Run 0:Duri p.15
64 0h1340 FAN Control O/A O O
10
Displayed when ADV- 07 is set to 1 (DC-Start) control 1 Always ON ng 3
11
Displayed when ADV- 08 is set to 1 (DC-Brake)
12 14
Displayed when ADV- 24 is set to 1 (Yes) Displayed when either OUT-31 or OUT-33 is set to 35 (BR Control)
13 15
Displayed when ADV- 27 is set to 1 (Yes) Displayed when ADV-50 is not set to 0 (None)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 241 242 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Value
2 Temp Control Run Regeneration
17 RegenAvd p.16
Up/down 0 No 77 0h134D evasion for 0.0- 100.0% 50.0 O/A O O
Pgain 7
operation U/D Save p.11 press P gain
65 0h1341 0:No O/A O O
frequency Mode 1 Yes 5 Regeneration
17 RegenAvd p.16
save 78 0h134E evasion for 20-30000(ms) 500 O/A O O
Igain 7
0 None press I gain
Output contact 1 V1 0 None
On/Off Ctrl 0:Non p.11
66 0h1342 On/Off control 3 V2 X/A O O Fire Mode Fire Mode 1 Fire Mode 0:Non p.10
Src e 5 80 0h1350 X O X
options 4 I2 Selection Sel Fire Mode e 4
2
6 Pulse Test
Fire Mode
Fire Mode p.10
Output contact Output contact off p.16 8118 0h1351 operation 0.00–60.00[Hz] 60.00 X O X
67 0h1343 On-Ctrl Level 90.00 X/A O O Freq 4
On level level- 100.00% 6 frequency
Fire Mode 0 Forward 0:
18 Fire Mode p.10
-100.00-output 82 0h1352 operation Forwa X O X
Output contact p.16 Dir 1 Reverse 4
68 0h1344 Off-Ctrl Level contact on level 10.00 X/A O O direction rd
Off level 6
(%) 18 Fire Mode Fire Mode p.10
83 - Not able to modify - - - -
Always 0:Alwa Count Cnt 4
0
Safe operation Run En Enable ys p.11
70 0h1346 X/A O O
selection Mode DI Enabl 8
1
Dependent e
0 Free-Run
16 Safe operation 1 Q-Stop 0:Free p.11
71 0h1347 Run Dis Stop X/A O O
stop options Q-Stop -Run 8
2
Resume
Safe operation
16 p.11
72 0h1348 deceleration Q-Stop Time 0.0-600.0(s) 5.0 O/A O O
8
time
Selection of 0 No
regeneration
RegenAvd p.16
74 0h134A evasion 0:No X/A O O
Sel 1 Yes 7
function for
press
Voltage level of 200 V : 300-400
350
regeneration RegenAvd V p.16
75 0h134B X/A O O
evasion motion Level 400 V : 600-800 7
700
for press V
Compensation
frequency limit
17 CompFreq p.16
76 0h134C of regeneration 0.00- 10.00 Hz 1.00 X/A O O
Limit 7
evasion for
press

16
Displayed when ADV-70 is set to 1 (DI Dependent)
17 18
Displayed when ADV-74 is set to 1 (Yes) Displayed when ADV-80 is set to 1(Yes)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 243 244 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

8.4 Control Function group (PAR→CON) Code

Comm.
Name LCD Display Setting Range
Initial
Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value
In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been display
selected. setting
Sensorless
SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09) speed
ASR-SL
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation 21 0h1415 controller 0-5000(%) O X O p.136
P Gain1
Comm. Initial proportiona Depend
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. l gain1 ent on
Address Value
Jump Jump Sensorless motor
00 - 1-99 4 O O O p.45 speed setting
Code Code ASR-SL I
V/F : 22 0h1416 controller 10-9999(ms) O X O p.136
Gain1
30– 1.0– 10.0 integral
45 [kHz] gain1
kW SL : 2.0– Sensorless
10.0 [kHz] speed
HD 3.0 O O O p.149 19 ASR-SL P
V/F : 23 0h1417 controller 1.0-1000.0(%) O X O p.136
Gain2
55– 1.0– 7.0 proportiona
75 [kHz] l gain2
kW SL : 2.0–7.0 Sensorless
[kHz] speed
Carrier Carrier 19 ASR-SL I
04 0h1404 V/F : 24 0h1418 controller 1.0-1000.0(%) O X O p.136
frequency Freq Gain2
1.0– 5.0 integral
30– gain2
[kHz]
45 Sensorless
SL :
kW speed
2.0–5.0 19 ASR-SL I
ND [kHz] 2.0 O O O p.149 25 0h1419 controller 1.0-999.9(%) O X O -
Gain0
V/F : integral
55– 1.0– 3.0 gain0 Depend
75 [kHz] Flux ent on
kW SL : 2.0– 19 estimator Flux P motor
26 0h141A 10-200(%) O X O p.136
3.0 [kHz] proportiona Gain setting
Normal l gain
0 Flux
Switching PWM PWM 0:Norm
05 0h1405 X O O p.149 19 estimator
mode Mode Lowleakage al PWM 27 0h141B Flux I Gain 10-200(%) O X O p.136
1 integral
PWM
Initial gain
09 0h1409 excitation PreExTime 0.00-60.00(s) 1.00 X X O p.136 Speed
time 19 0h141 estimator S-Est P
28 0-32767 O X O p.136
Initial C proportiona Gain1
10 0h140A excitation Flux Force 100.0-300.0(%) 100.0 X X O p.136 l gain
amount Speed
Continued 19 0h141 estimator S-Est I
29 100-1000 O X O p.136
11 0h140B operation Hold Time 0.00-60.00(s) 0.00 X X O p.136 D integral Gain1
duration gain1
19
Sensorless 0 No 30 0h141E Speed S-Est I 100-10000 O X O p.136
nd SL2 G
20 0h1414 2 0:No O X O p.136
View Sel 1 Yes 19
gain Displayed when DRV-09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless) and CIN-20 is set to 1 (YES)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 245 246 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Value
estimator Gain2 direction Lmt
integral regeneratio
gain2 n
Sensorless torque limit
current 0 Keypad-2
19 ACR SL
31 0h141F controller 10-1000 O X O p.136 1 V1
P Gain
proportiona 3 V2
l gain 21 Speed limit Speed Lmt 0:Keypa
62 0h143E 4 I2 X X O -
setting Src d-1
Sensorless 5 Int 485
current 6 FieldBus
19 ACR SL I
32 0h1420 controller 10 -1000 O X O p.136 7 Keypad-2
Gain
integral Positive-
gain 21 FWD 0.00–Maximum
63 0h143F direction 60.00 O X O -
Current Speed Lmt frequency [Hz]
ACR P speed limit
48 - controller P 0-10000 1200 O X O - Negative-
Gain REV 0.00–Maximum
gain 64
21
0h1440 direction 60.00 O X O -
Current Speed Lmt frequency [Hz]
ACR I speed limit
49 - controller I 0-10000 120 O X O - Speed limit
Gain Speed Lmt
gain 65
21
0h1441 operation 100~5000(%) 500 O X O -
Torque Gain
Torque Out gain
52 0h1434 controller 0-2000(ms) 0 X X O p.136 Speed 0 Flying Start-1
22
LPF 0:
output filter search
0 Keypad-1 70 0h1446 SS Mode Flying X O O p.144
mode 1 Flying Start-2
1 Keypad-2 Start-1
selection
Torque
2 V1 0: bit 0000- 1111
limit Torque Lmt
53 0h1435 4 V2 Keypad- X X O p.136 Selection of
setting Src
5 I2 1 0001 speed search
options
6 Int 485 on acceleration
8 FieldBus When starting
Positive- Speed 0010 on initialization
20 direction FWD search Speed after fault trip
54 0h1436 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O X O p.136 71 0h1447 0000 X O O p.144
reverse +Trq Lmt operation Search When restarting
torque limit selection after
Positive- 0100 instantaneous
direction power
20 FWD
55 0h1437 regeneratio 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O X O p.136 interruption
–Trq Lmt
n When starting
1000
torque limit with power on
Negative- Speed
23 SS Sup-
20 direction REV +Trq 72 0h1448 search 80-200(%) 150 O O O p.144
56 0h1438 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O X O p.136 Current
reverse Lmt reference
torque limit
20
57 0h1439 Negative- REV –Trq 0.0-200.0(%) 180 O X O p.136
21
The CON-62-65 codes are displayed when DRV-10 (Torque control) is set to Yes
20 22
Displayed when DRV-09 is set to 1 (Yes). This will change the initial value of the parameter at ADV- Will not be Displayed when DRV-09 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless)
23
74 (Torque limit) to 150%. Displayed when any of the CON-71 code bits are set to 1 and CON-70 is set to 0 (Flying Start-1)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 247 248 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Value
current proportiona
Flying l gain2
Speed Start-1 Flux
24 search : 100 27 estimator Flux P
73 0h1449 SS P-Gain 0-9999 O O O p.144 87 0h1457 0-500 100 O X O p.136
proportiona Flying proportiona Gain3
l gain Start-2 l gain3
25
: 600 Flux
Flying 27 estimator Flux I
88 0h1458 0-200 50 O X O p.136
Speed Start-1 integral Gain1
24 search : 200 gain1
74 0h144A SS I-Gain 0-9999 O O O p.144
integral Flying Flux
gain Start-2 27 estimator Flux I
89 0h1459 0-200 50 O X O p.136
: 1000 integral Gain2
Output gain2
blocking Flux
24 SS Block
75 0h144B time before 0.0-60.0(s) 1.0 X O O p.144 27 estimator Flux I
Time 90 0h145A 0-200 50 O X O p.136
speed integral Gain3
search gain3
Speed Sensorless
24 0h144 search Spd Est 27 voltage SL Volt
76 50-150(%) 100 O O O - 91 0h145B 0-60 30 O X O p.136
C Estimator Gain compensat Comp1
gain ion1
Energy 0 No Sensorless
0h144 KEB
77 buffering 0:No X O O p.140 27 0h145 voltage SL Volt
D Select 1 Yes 92 0-60 20 O X O p.136
selection C compensat Comp2
Energy ion2
26 KEB Start
78 0h144E buffering 110.0-140.0(%) 125.0 X O O p.140 Sensorless
Lev
start level 27 0h145 voltage SL Volt
93 0-60 20 O X O p.136
Energy D compensat Comp3
26 KEB Stop ion3
79 0h144F buffering 125.0-145.0(%) 130.0 X O O p.140
Lev
stop level Sensorless
Energy field
26 27 SL FW
80 0h1450 buffering KEB Gain 1-20000 1000 O O O p.140 94 0h145E weakening 80.0-110.0(%) 100.0 X X O p.133
Freq
gain start
Flux frequency
27 estimator Flux P Sensorless
85 0h1455 100-700 370 O X O p.136
proportiona Gain1 27 gain
95 0h145F SL Fc Freq 0.00-8.00(Hz) 2.00 X X O p.133
l gain1 switching
27 Flux Flux P frequency
86 0h1456 0-100 0 O X O p.136
estimator Gain2

24
Displayed when any of the CON-71 code bits are set to 1
25
The initial value is 1200 when the motor-rated capacity is less than 7.5 kW
26
Displayed when CON-77 is set to 1 (Yes)
27
Displayed when CON-20 is set to 1 (Yes)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 249 250 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

8.5 Input Terminal Block Function group (PAR→IN) Code

Comm.
Address
Name LCD Display Setting Range
Initial
Value
Property* V/F SL Ref.

In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been voltage (%)
selected. V1 rotation 0 No
16 0h1510 direction V1 Inverting 0: No O O O p.59
1 Yes
SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09) change
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation V1 29
0.00 , 0.04-
Comm. Initial 17 0h1511 quantization V1 Quantizing 0.04 X O O p.59
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. 10.00(%)
Address Value level
00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 65 O O O p.45 V2 input
30
Start Maximu 35 0h1523 voltage V2 Monitor(V) 0.00-12.00(V) 0.00 O O O p.65
Frequency for display
frequency- m
01 0h1501 maximum Freq at 100% O O O p.59 V2 input filter
Maximum frequenc 37
30
0h1525 V2 Filter 0-10000(ms) 10 O O O p.65
analog input time constant
frequency(Hz) y
Torque at 30 V2 Minimum
Torque 38 0h1526 V2 Volt x1 0.00-10.00(V) 0.00 O X X p.65
02 0h1502 maximum 0.0-200.0(%) 100.0 O X X - input voltage
at100% V2 output at
analog input 30 0.00-
V1 input 39 0h1527 Minimum V2 Perc y1 0.00 O O O p.65
-12.00- 100.00(%)
05 0h1505 voltage V1 Monitor(V) 0.00 O O O p.59 voltage (%)
12.00(V) V2 Maximum
display 40
30
0h1528 V2 Volt x2 0.00-10.00(V) 10 O X X p.65
V1 input 0 Unipolar input voltage
0: V2 output at
06 0h1506 polarity V1 Polarity X O O p.59 0.00-
1 Bipolar Unipolar 41
30
0h1529 Maximum V2 Perc y2 100.00 O O O p.65
selection 100.00(%)
Time constant voltage (%)
07 0h1507 of V1 input V1 Filter 0-10000(ms) 10 O O O p.59 V2 rotation 0 No
30
filter 46 0h152E direction V2 Inverting 0:No O O O p.65
1 Yes
V1 Minimum change
08 0h1508 V1 Volt x1 0.00-10.00(V) 0.00 O O O p.59 V2
input voltage 30
29
0.00 , 0.04-
V1 output at 47 0h152F quantization V2 Quantizing 0.04 O O O p.65
0.00- 10.00(%)
09 0h1509 Minimum V1 Perc y1 0.00 O O O p.59 level
100.00(%) I2 input
voltage (%) 31 I2 Monitor
V1 Maximum 50 0h1532 current 0-24(mA) 0.00 O O O p.63
10 0h150A V1 Volt x2 0.00-12.00(V) 10.00 O O O p.59 (mA)
input voltage display
V1 output at 31 I2 input filter
0.00- 52 0h1534 I2 Filter 0-10000(ms) 10 O O O p.63
11 0h150B Maximum V1 Perc y2 100.00 O O O p.59 time constant
100.00(%) I2 minimum 0.00-
voltage (%) 53
31
0h1535 I2 Curr x1 4.00 O O O p.63
28 V1 Minimum input current 20.00(mA)
12 0h150C V1 –Volt x1’ -10.00- 0.00(V) 0.00 O O O p.62 I2 output at
input voltage 31 0.00-
V1output at 54 0h1536 Minimum I2 Perc y1 0.00 O O O p.63
-100.00- 100.00(%)
13
28
0h150D Minimum V1 –Perc y1’ 0.00 O O O p.62 current (%)
0.00(%) I2 maximum 0.00-
voltage (%) 55
31
0h1537 I2 Curr x2 20.00 O O O p.63
28 V1 Maximum input current 24.00(mA)
14 0h150E V1 –Volt x2’ -12.00- 0.00(V) -10.00 O O O p.62 56
31
0h1538 I2 output at I2 Perc y2 0.00- 100.00 O O O p.63
input voltage
28 V1 output at -100.00-
15 0h150F V1 –Perc y2’ -100.00 O O O p.62
Maximum 0.00(%) 29
Quantizing is not used when set to 0.
30
Displayed when V is selected on the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW2
28 31
Displayed when IN-06 is set to 1 (Bipolar) Displayed when I is selected on the analog current/voltage input circuit selection switch (SW2)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 251 252 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Value
Maximum 100.00(%) I-Term
22 p.122
current (%) Clear
Changing 0 No PID
31 23 p.122
61 0h153D rotation I2 Inverting 0:No O O O p.63 Openloop
1 Yes
direction of I2 24 P Gain2 p.122
I2 29 25 XCEL Stop p.83
31 0.00 ,0.04-
62 0h153E quantization I2 Quantizing 0.04 O O O p.63 26 2nd Motor p.151
10.00(%)
level 34 Pre Excite -
0 None 38 Timer In p.164
P1 terminal
40 dis Aux Ref p.108
65 0h1541 function P1 Define 1:Fx X O O p.70
1 Fx 46 FWD JOG p.114
setting
47 REV JOG p.114
P2 terminal 49 XCEL-H
66 0h1542 function P2 Define 2 Rx 2:Rx X O O p.70 50 User Seq
p.78
setting 51 Fire Mode
P3 terminal 54 TI
67 0h1543 function P3 Define 3 RST 5:BX X O O p.203 Multi-function
setting 85 0h1555 input terminal DI On Delay 0-10000(ms) 10 O O O p.95
P4 terminal On filter
External
68 0h1544 function P4 Define 4 3:RST X O O p.192 Multi-function
Trip
setting 86 0h1556 input terminal DI Off Delay 0-10000(ms) 3 O O O p.95
P5 terminal Off filter
69 0h1545 function P5 Define 5 BX 7:Sp-L X O O p.202 P7 – P1
Multi-function
setting A contact
input 0 000
P6 terminal 87 0h1557 DI NC/NO Sel (NO) X O O p.95
contact 0000
70 0h1546 function P6 Define 6 JOG 8:Sp-M X O O p.112 B contact
selection 1
setting (NC)
P7 terminal Multi-step
71 0h1547 function P7 Define 7 Speed-L 9:Sp-H X O O p.68 89 0h1559 command InCheck Time 1-5000(ms) 1 X O O p.68
setting delay time
8 Speed-M p.68 P7 – P1
9 Speed-H p.68 Multi-function release(Off
0 000
11 XCEL-L p.78 90 0h155A input terminal DI Status ) O O O p.95
0000
12 XCEL-M p.78 status Connection
1
RUN (On)
13 p.118
Enable Pulse input
Pulse Monitor 0.00-
14 3-Wire p.117 91 0h155B amount 0.00 O O O p.65
(kHz) 50.00(kHz)
2nd display
15 p.94
Source TI input filter
92 0h155C TI Filter 0-9999(ms) 10 O O O p.65
16 Exchange p.152 time constant
17 Up p.115 TI Minimum 0.00-
93 0h155D TI Pls x1 0 O/A O O p.65
18 Down p.115 input pulse 32.00(kHz)
20 U/D Clear p.115 TI output at
0.00-
Analog 94 0h153E Minimum TI Perc y1 0.00 O/A O O p.65
21 p.67 100.00(%)
Hold pulse (%)

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 253 254 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Code
Comm.
Address
Name LCD Display Setting Range
Initial
Value
Property* V/F SL Ref. 8.6 Output Terminal Block Function group (PAR→OUT)
TI Maximum 0.00- In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been
95 0h155F TI Pls x2 32.00 O/A O O p.65
input pulse 32.00(kHz) selected.
TI Output at
96 0h1560 Maximum TI Perc y2 0-100(%) 100.00 O/A O O p.65 SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09)
pulse (%) *O/X: Write-enabled during operation
TI rotation 0 No Comm. LCD Initial
97 0h1561 direction TI Inverting 0:No O/A O O p.65 Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
1 Yes Address Display Value
change JumpC
TI 00 - Jump Code 1-99 30 O O O p.45
29
0.00 , 0.04- ode
98 0h1562 quantization TI Quantizing 0.04 O/A O O p.65 0 Frequency
10.00(%)
level 1 Output Current
Bit 00~11 2 Output Voltage
SW1(NPN/PN
00 V2, NPN 3 DCLink Voltage
P)/
99 0h1563 IO SW State 01 V2, PNP 00 O O O - 4 Torque
SW2(V2[I2])
10 I2, NPN 5 Output Power
Status display
11 I2, PNP 6 Idse 0:
Analog output 1 AO1
01 0h1601 7 Iqse Freque O O O p.168
item Mode
8 Target Freq ncy
9 Ramp Freq
10 Speed Fdb
12 PID Ref Value
13 PID Fdb Value
14 PID Output
15 Constant
Analog output 1 AO1
02 0h1602 -1000.0-1000.0(%) 100.0 O O O p.168
gain Gain
Analog output 1 AO1
03 0h1603 -100.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.168
bias Bias
Analog output 1 AO1
04 0h1604 0-10000(ms) 5 O O O p.168
filter Filter
AO1
Analog constant
05 0h1606 Const 0.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.168
output 1
%
Analog output 1 AO1
06 0h1606 0.0-1000.0(%) 0.0 O O p.168
monitor Monitor
0 Frequency
1 Output Current
2 Output Voltage
3 DCLink Voltage
Analog output 2 AO2 4 Torque
07 0h1607
item Mode 5 Output Power
6 Idse
7 Iqse
8 Target Freq
9 Ramp Freq
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 255 256 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
10 Speed Fdb 19 Speed Search
12 PID Ref Value 22 Ready
13 PID Fdb Value 28 Timer Out
14 PID Output 29 Trip
15 Constant 31 DB Warn%ED
Analog output 2 AO2 34 On/Off Control
08 0h1608 -1000.0~1000.0(%) 100.0 O O O p.169
gain Gain 35 BR Control
Analog output 2 AO2 36 CAP. Warning
09 0h1609 -100.0~100.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.169
bias Bias 37 Fan Exchange
Analog output 2 AO2 38 Fire Mode
10 0h160A 0~10000(ms) 5 O O O p.169
filter Filter 0 None
AO2 1 FDT-1
Analog constant
11 0h160B Const 0.0~100.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.169 2 FDT-2
output 2
% 3 FDT-3
Analog output 2 AO2 4 FDT-4
12 0h160C 0.0~1000.0(%) 0.0 O O p.169
monitor Monitor 5 Over Load
bit 000-111 6 IOL
1 Low voltage 7 Under Load
Any faults other 8 Fan Warning
Trip Out 2 than low 9 Stall
30 0h161E Fault output item 010 O O O p.177
Mode voltage 10 Over Voltage
Automatic 11 Low Voltage
3 restart final 12 Over Heat
failure 13 Lost Command
0 None Multi-function Q1 14 Run
33 0h1621 14:Run O O O p.172
1 FDT-1 output1 item Define 15 Stop
2 FDT-2 16 Steady
17 Inverter Line
3 FDT-3 18 Comm Line
19 Speed Search
4 FDT-4 22 Ready
5 Over Load 28 Timer Out
6 IOL 29 Trip
7 Under Load 31 DB Warn%ED
Multi-function 34 On/Off Control
31 0h161F Relay 1 8 Fan Warning 29:Trip O O O p.172
relay 1 item
9 Stall 35 BR Control
10 Over Voltage 36 CAP. Warning
11 Low Voltage 37 Fan Exchange
12 Over Heat 38 Fire Mode
13 Lost Command 39 TO
14 Run Multi-function DO
41 0h1629 - 00 X - - p.172
15 Stop output monitor Status
16 Steady Multi-function
DO On
17 Inverter Line 50 0h1632 output 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O O O p.178
Delay
18 Comm Line On delay
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 257 258 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Code
Comm.
Name
LCD
Setting Range
Initial
Property* V/F SL Ref. 8.7 Communication Function group (PAR→COM)
Address Display Value
Multi-function In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been
DO Off
51 0h1633 output 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O O O p.178 selected.
Delay
Off delay
Multi-function DO Q1, Relay1 SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09)
52 0h1634 output NC/NO 0 A contact (NO) 00 X O O p.178 *O/X: Write-enabled during operation
contact selection Sel 1 B contact (NC) Comm. LCD Initial Property
Fault output TripOut Code Name Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
53 0h1635 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O O O p.177 Address Display Value *
On delay OnDly 00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 20 O O O p.45
Fault output TripOut Built-in
54 0h1636 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O O O p.177 Int485 St
Off delay OffDly 01 0h1701 communication 1-250 1 O O O p.208
Timer TimerO ID
55 h1637 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O O O p.164 inverter ID
On delay n Delay Built-in 0:
Timer TimerO 32 Int485 ModBus
56 0h1638 0.00-100.00(s) 0.00 O O O p.164 02 0h1702 communication 0 ModBu O O O p.208
Off delay ff Delay Proto RTU
protocol s RTU
FDT 0 1200 bps
Detected 0.00-Maximum
57 0h1639 Freque 30.00 O O O p.172 1 2400 bps
frequency frequency(Hz)
ncy 2 4800 bps
Detected FDT 0.00-Maximum Built-in 3:
58 0h163A 10.00 O O O p.172 32 Int485 3 9600 bps
frequency band Band frequency(Hz) 03 0h1703 communication 9600 O O O p.208
BaudR 4 19200 bps
0 Frequency speed bps
5 38400 bps
1 Output Current 6 56 Kbps
2 Output Voltage 7 115 Kbps
33

3 DCLink Voltage 0 D8/PN/S1

4 Torque Built-in 0:
32 Int485 1 D8/PN/S2
5 Output Power 04 0h1704 communication D8/PN/ O O O p.208
Mode 2 D8/PE/S1
6 Idse frame setting S1
TO 3 D8/PO/S1
61 0h163D Pulse output gain 7 Iqse 0 O/A O O p.171 Transmission
Mode
8 Target Freq 05
32
0h1705 delay Resp Delay 0-1000(ms) 5ms O O O p.208
9 Ramp Freq after reception
10 Speed Fdb Communication
12 PID Ref Value 34 FBus S/W
06 0h1706 option - 0.00 O O O -
13 PID Fdb Value Ver
S/W version
14 PID Output Communication
34
15 Constant 07 0h1707 option FBus ID 0-255 1 O O O -
TO inverter ID
62 0h163E Pulse output gain -1000.0-1000.0(%) 100.0 O O O p.171
Gain FIELD BUS
34 FBUS 12Mbp
TO 08 0h1708 communication - - O O -
63 0h163F Pulse output bias -100.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.171 BaudRate s
Bias speed
TO Communication
64 0h1640 Pulse output filter 0-10000(ms) 5 O O O p.171 34 FieldBus
Filter 09 0h1709 option LED - - O O O -
LED
TO status
Pulse output
65 0h1641 Const 0.0-100.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.171
constant output 2
% 32
Will not be displayed when P2P and Multi KPD is set
Pulse output TO 33
66 0h1642 0.0-1000.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.171 115,200bps
monitor Monitor 34
Displayed only when a communication option card is installed
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 259 260 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Property Comm. LCD Initial Property

Code Name Setting Range V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value * Address Display Value *
Number of address6
ParaStatus
30 0h171E output 0-8 3 O O O p.213 Input
Num Para
parameters 57 0h1739 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X O O p.212
Control-7
Output address7
Para
31 0h171F Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 000A O O O p.212 Input
Stauts-1 Para
address1 58 0h173A Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X O O p.212
Control-8
Output address8
Para
32 0h1720 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 000E O O O p.212 Field bus data FBus Swap 0 No
Stauts-2 68 0h1744 0 X O O -
address2 swap Sel 1 Yes
Output Communication
Para
33 0h1721 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 000F O O O p.212 70 0h1746 multi-function Virtual DI 1 0 None 0:None O O O p.226
Stauts-3
address3 input 1
Output Communication
Para
34 0h1722 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O O O p.212 71 0h1747 multi-function Virtual DI 2 1 Fx 0:None O O O p.226
Stauts-4
address4 input 2
Output Communication
Para
35 0h1723 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O O O p.212 72 0h1748 multi-function Virtual DI 3 2 Rx 0:None O O O p.226
Stauts-5
address5 input 3
Output Communication
Para
36 0h1724 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O O O p.212 73 0h1749 multi-function Virtual DI 4 3 RST 0:None O O O p.226
Stauts-6
address6 input 4
Output Communication
Para External
37 0h1725 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O O O p.212 74 0h174A multi-function Virtual DI 5 4 0:None O O O p.226
Stauts-7 Trip
address7 input 5
Output Communication
Para
38 0h1726 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 O O O p.212 75 0h174B multi-function Virtual DI 6 5 BX 0:None O O O p.226
Stauts-8
address8 input 6
Number of input Para Ctrl Communication
50 0h1732 0-8 2 O O O p.213
parameters Num 76 0h174C multi-function Virtual DI 7 6 JOG 0:None O O O p.226
Input input 7
Para
51 0h1733 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0005 X O O p.212 7 Speed-L
Control-1
address1 8 Speed-M
Input 9 Speed-H
Para
52 0h1734 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0006 X O O p.212 11 XCEL-L
Control-2
address2 12 XCEL-M
Input RUN
Para 13
53 0h1735 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X O O p.212 Communication Enable
Control-3
address3 77 0h174D multi-function Virtual DI 8 14 3-Wire 0:None O O O p.226
Input input 8 15 2nd Source
Para
54 0h1736 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X O O p.212 16 Exchange
Control-4
address4 17 Up
Input 18 Down
Para
55 0h1737 Communication 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X O O p.212 20 U/D Clear
Control-5
address5 21 Analog Hold
Input Para 22 I-Term
56 0h1738 0000-FFFF Hex 0000 X O O p.212
Communication Control-6
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 261 262 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Code
Comm.
Address
Name
LCD
Display
Setting Range
Initial
Value
Property
*
V/F SL Ref. 8.8 Application Function group (PAR→APP)
Clear In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been
PID selected.
23
Openloop
24 P Gain2 SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09)
25 XCEL Stop *O/X: Write-enabled during operation
26 2nd Motor Comm. Initial
34 Pre Excite Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value
38 Timer In 00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 20 O O O p.45
40 dis Aux Ref Application 0 None
46 FWD JOG 0:
01 0h1801 function App Mode 1 - X O O p.122
47 REV JOG None
selection 2 Proc PID
49 XCEL-H Enable user 0 No
Communication 02 - User Seq En 0:No X O O p.98
Virt DI sequence 1 Yes
86 0h1756 multi-function - 0 X O O p.211 37 PID output
Status 16 0h1810 PID Output (%) 0.00 O O p.122
input monitoring monitor
Selection of data 0 Int485 37 PID reference
frame Comm 17 0h1811 PID Ref Value (%) 50.00 O O p.122
90 0h175A 0 O O O - monitor
communication Mon Sel 1 Keypad 37 PID feedback
monitor 18 0h1812 PID Fdb Value (%) 0.00 O O p.122
monitor
Data frame Rev Rev Frame PID reference -100.00-
91 0h175B 0-65535 0 O O O - 19
37
0h1813 PID Ref Set 50.00 O O O p.122
count Num setting 100.00(%)
Data frame Err Err Frame 0 Keypad
92 0h175C 0-65535 0 O O O -
count Num 1 V1
NAK 3 V2
NAK frame PID reference PID 0:
93 0h175D Frame 0-65535 0 O O O - 20
37
0h1814 4 I2 X O O p.122
count source Ref Source Keypad
Num 5 Int 485
35 Communication Comm 0 No 7 FieldBus
94 - 0:No - O O -
data upload Update 1 Yes 11 Pulse
0 Disable All 0 V1
P2P 0:
Int 485 1 P2P Master 2 V2
95 0h1760 communication Disable X O O p.96
Func 2 P2P Slave PID feedback PID 3 I2
selection All 21
37
0h1815 0:V1 X O O p.122
3 KPD-Ready source F/B Source 4 Int 485
0 No 6 FieldBus
Multi- 10 Pulse
1 function PID controller
36 DO setting P2P DO
96 - setting 0:No O O O p.96 22
37
0h1816 proportional PID P-Gain 0.0-1000.0(%) 50.0 O O O p.122
selection Sel
Multi- gain
2 function PID controller
37
output 23 0h1817 PID I-Time 0.0-200.0(s) 10.0 O O O p.122
integral time
PID controller
37
24 0h1818 differentiation PID D-Time 0-1000(ms) 0 O O O p.122
time
37
25 0h1819 PID controller PID F-Gain 0.0-1000.0(%) 0.0 O O O p.122
35
Displayed only when a communication option card is installed
36 37
Displayed when APP-01 is set to 2 (Proc PID) Displayed when APP-01 is set to 2 (Proc PID)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 263 264 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Value
feed-forward 5 Hz
compensation 6 rpm
gain 7 V
37 Proportional 8 I
26 0h181A P Gain Scale 0.0-100.0(%) 100.0 X O O p.122
gain scale 9 kW
37
27 0h181B PID output filter PID Out LPF 0-10000(ms) 0 O O O p.122 10 HP
0
Process 11 Ԩ
37
28 0h181C PID Mode PID Mode
PID
0 X O O - 12 Ԭ
Normal 37 0.00-
1 43 0h182B PID unit gain PID Unit Gain 100.00 O O O p.122
PID 300.00(%)
PID lower limit 0 x100
37 PID upper limit
29 0h181D PID Limit Hi frequency- 60.00 O O O p.122 1 x10
frequency PID Unit
300.00(Hz) 44
37
0h182C PID unit scale 2 x1 2:x 1 O O O p.122
-300.00 -PID Scale
37 PID lower limit 3 x 0.1
30 0h181E PID Limit Lo upper limit -60.00 O O O p.122 4 x 0.01
frequency
frequency(Hz) PID 2nd
37 PID output 0 No 45
37
0h182D proportional PID P2-Gain 0.0-1000.0(%) 100.0 X O O p.122
31 0h181F PID Out Inv 0:No X O O p.122
inverse 1 Yes gain
37 PID output
32 0h1820 PID Out Scale 0.1-1000.0(%) 100.0 X O O p.122
scale
PID controller 0.00-
37
34 0h1822 motion Pre-PID Freq Maximum 0.00 X O O p.122
frequency frequency(Hz) 8.9 Protection Function group (PAR→PRT)
37 PID controller
35 0h1823 Pre-PID Exit 0.0-100.0(%) 0.0 X O O p.122 In the following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been
motion level
selected.
PID controller
37
36 0h1824 motion delay Pre-PID Delay 0-9999(s) 600 O O O p.122 SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09)
time *O/X: Write-enabled during operation,
37 PID sleep mode
37 0h1825 PID Sleep DT 0.0-999.9(s) 60.0 O O O p.122 Comm. Initial Property
delay time Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
Address Value *
0.00-
37 PID sleep mode PID Sleep
38 0h1826 Maximum 0.00 O O O p.122 00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 40 O O O p.45
frequency Freq
frequency(Hz)
Normal
37 PID wake-up PIDWakeUp 0
39 0h1827 0-100(%) 35 O O O p.122 Load level Duty 1:Heavy
level Lev 04 0h1B04 Load Duty X O O p.185
setting Heavy Duty
Below 1
0 Duty
Level
PID wake-up PID WakeUp Above 0:Below bit 00-11
37
40 0h1828 1 O O O p.122
mode setting Mod Level Level Output
Beyond Input/output 01 open
2 Phase Loss
Level 05 0h1B05 open-phase phase 11 X O O p.191
Chk
0 % protection
1 Bar Input open
PID controller 10
37
42 0h182A PID Unit Sel 2 mBar 0:% O O O p.122 phase
unit selection
3 Pa
4 kPa
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 265 266 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Property Comm. Initial Property

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
Address Value * Address Value *
Overload alarm OL Warn
18 0h1B12 30-180(%) 150 O O O p.185
Input voltage level Level
06 0h1B06 range during IPO V Band 1-100(V) 15 X O O p.191 Overload OL Warn
19 0h1B13 0.0-30.0(s) 10.0 O O O p.185
open-phase warning time Time
0 None
Motion at OL Trip 1 Free-Run 1:Free-
Deceleration Trip Dec 20 0h1B14 O O O p.185
07 0h1B07 0.0-600.0(s) 3.0 O O O - overload fault Select Run
time at fault trip Time 2 Dec

0 No Overload fault OL Trip

Selection of 21 0h1B15 30-200(%) 180 O O O p.185
level Level
08 0h1B08 startup on trip RST Restart 0:No O O O p.147 Overload fault OL Trip
reset 1 Yes 22 0h1B16 0.0-60.0(s) 60.0 O O O p.185
time Time
Number of Underload 0 No
Retry UL Warn
09 0h1B09 automatic 0-10 0 O O O p.147 25 0h1B19 warning 0:No O O O p.198
Number Sel 1 Yes
restarts selection
Automatic Underload UL Warn
26 0h1B1A 0.0-600.0(s) 10.0 O O O p.198
10
38
0h1B0A restart Retry Delay 0.0-60.0(s) 1.0 O O O p.147 warning time Time
delay time 0 None
Underload fault
0 None 27 0h1B1B UL Trip Sel 1 Free-Run 0:None O O O p.198
selection
1 Free-Run 2 Dec
Motion 2 Dec Underload fault UL Trip
Lost Cmd 28 0h1B1C 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O p.198
12 0h1B0C at speed 0:None O/A O O p.193 time Time
Mode 3 Hold Input
command loss Underload lower
4 Hold 29 0h1B1D UL LF Level 10-30(%) 30 O O O p.198
limit level
Output
Lost
5 Underload
Time to decide Preset 30 0h1B1E UL BF Level 30-100(%) 30 O O O p.198
Lost Cmd upper limit level
39
13 0h1B0D speed 0.1-120(s) 1.0 O O O p.193
Time No motor 0 None
command loss No Motor
31 0h1B1F motion at 0:None O O O p.204
Operation Trip 1 Free-Run
Start detection
frequency
39 Lost Preset frequency- No motor
14 0h1B0E at speed 0.00 O O O p.193 No Motor
F Maximum 32 0h1B20 detection 1-100(%) 5 O O O p.204
command Level
frequency(Hz) current level
loss
No motor No Motor
33 0h1B21 0.1-10.0(s) 3.0 O O O p.204
Analog input 0 Half x1 detection delay Time
39 AI Lost 0:Half of
15 0h1B0F loss decision O O O p.193
Level x1 Electronic 0 None
level 1 Below x1 ETH Trip
40 0h1B28 thermal fault 1 Free-Run 0:None O O O p.183
Sel
Overload 0 No selection
OL Warn 2 Dec
17 0h1B11 warning 0:No O O O p.185
Select 1 Yes 0 Self-cool
selection
Motor cooling Motor 0:Self-
41 0h1B29 Forced- O O O p.183
fan type Cooling 1 cool
cool
38
Displayed when PRT-09 is set higher than 0 Electronic
39 42 0h1B2A ETH 1min 120-200(%) 150 O O O p.183
Displayed when PRT-12 is not set to 0 (NONE) thermal 1
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 267 268 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Property Comm. Initial Property

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref.
Address Value * Address Value *
minute rating CAP diagnosis CAP.
60 0h1B3C current level DiagCurr 10–100(%) 0 O O O -
Electronic Perc
thermal 0 None
43 0h1B2B ETH Cont 50-150(%) 120 O O O p.183
continuous CAP diagnosis
40 1 Ref Diag
rating 61 0h1B3D mode CAP. Diag 0 X O - -
2 Pre Diag
Free-
0 3 Init Diag
45 0h1B2D BX trip mode BX Mode Run 0 X O O - CAP
1 Dec 40 CAP Exchange
62 0h1B3E Exchange 50.0~95.0(%) 0 X O O -
Level
Level
0000-
bit 40 CAP Diag
1111 63 0h1B3F CAP Diag Level 0.0~100.0(%) 100.0 - O O -
Level
DB resistor DB
Accelera 66 0h1B42 0-30(%) 0 O O O p.196
0001 warning level Warn %ED
ting
Stall prevention Speed deviation Speed Dev 0 No
Stall 73 0h1B22 0:No O O O -
50 0h1B32 motion and flux At 1000 X O O p.187 trip Trip 1 Yes
Prevent
braking 0010 constant
Speed deviation Speed Dev
speed 74 0h1B23 1~20 5 O O O -
band Band
At
Speed deviation Speed Dev
0100 decelera 75 0h1B24 0~120 60 O O O -
decision time Time
tion
Cooling fan fault FAN Trip 0 Trip
Start 79 0h1B4F 0:Trip O O O p.199
frequency- selection Mode 1 Warning
51 0h1B33 Stall frequency1 Stall Freq 1 60.00 O O O p.187
Stall 0 None
frequency2(Hz) Motion selection Opt Trip 1:Free-
80 0h1B50 1 Free-Run O O O p.203
52 0h1B34 Stall level1 Stall Level 1 30-250(%) 180 X O O p.187 at option trip Mode Run
2 Dec
Stall
Low voltage
frequency1- p.200
53 0h1B35 Stall frequency2 Stall Freq 2 60.00 O O O p.187 81 0h1B51 fault decision LVT Delay 0.0-60.0(s) 0.0 X O O
Stall
delay time
frequency3(Hz)
0 No
54 0h1B36 Stall level2 Stall Level 2 30-250(%) 180 X O O p.187 82 0h1B52 LV2 Selection LV2 Enable 0: No X O O -
1 Yes
Stall Accumulated
frequency2- Fan Time
55 0h1B37 Stall frequency3 Stall Freq 3 60.00 O O O p.187 86 0h1B56 percent of fan 0.0~100.0(%) 0.0 - O O -
Stall Perc
usage
frequency4(Hz) Fan exchange Fan
87 0h1B57 0.0~100.0(%) 90.0 O O O -
56 0h1B38 Stall level3 Stall Level 3 30-250(%) 180 X O O p.187 warning level Exchange
Stall Fan Time 0 No
88 0h1B58 Fan reset time 0 X O O -
frequency3- Rst 1 Yes
57 0h1B39 Stall frequency4 Stall Freq 4 60.00 O O O p.187
Maximum Bit 00~10
frequency(Hz) CAP, FAN CAP, FAN 00 -
89 0h1B59 00 - O O -
58 0h1B3A Stall level4 Stall Level 4 30-250(%) 180 X O O p.187 Status State CAP
01
Flux braking Flux Brake Warning
59 0h1B3B gain 0~150 0 O O O -
Kp
40
The PRT-61–63 codes are displayed when the PRT-60 (CAP. DiagPerc) is set to more than 0.
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 269 270 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Property Comm. Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value * Address Value
FAN 13 18.5 kW
10
Warning 14 22.0 kW
15 30.0 kW
Warning
90 0h1B5A - - - O O - 16 37.0 kW
information
17 45.0 kW
91 0h1B5B Fault history 1 - - - O O - 18 55.0 kW
19 75.0 kW
92 0h1B5C Fault history 2 - - - O O - 20 90.0 kW
93 0h1B5D Fault history 3 - - - O O - M2-Base 30.00- p.15
07 0h1C07 Base frequency 50.00 X O O
Freq 400.00(Hz) 1
94 0h1B5E Fault history 4 - - - O O - 0 V/F
95 0h1B5F Fault history 5 - - - O O - Slip
M2-Ctrl 2 p.15
Fault history 0 No 08 0h1C08 Control mode Compen 0:V/F X O O
96 0h1B60 - 0:No O O - Mode 1
deletion 1 Yes IM
4
Sensorless
Number of M2-Pole p.15
10 0h1C0A 2-48 X O O
motor poles Num 1
Rated slip M2-Rated p.15
8.10 2nd Motor Function group (PAR→M2) 11 0h1C0B
speed Slip
0-3000(rpm) X O O
1
Motor rated M2-Rated p.15
The 2nd Motor function group will be displayed if any of IN-65-71 are set to 26 (2nd MOTOR). In the 12 0h1C0C 1.0-1000.0(A) X O O
current Curr 1
following table, the data shaded in grey will be displayed when a related code has been selected. Motor no-load M2-Noload p.15
13 0h1C0D 0.5-1000.0(A) X O O
current Curr 1
SL: Sensorless vector control (DRV-09)
Motor rated M2-Rated Depe p.15
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation 14 0h1C0E 170-480(V) X O O
voltage Volt ndent 1
Comm. Initial M2- on p.15
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. 15 0h1C0F Motor efficiency 70-100(%) X O O
Address Value Efficiency motor 1
00 - Jump Code Jump Code 1-99 14 O O O p.45 Load inertia settin p.15
Acceleration M2-Acc p.15 16 0h1C10 M2-Inertia Rt 0-8 X O O
04 0h1C04 0.0-600.0(s) 20.0 O O O rate gs 1
time Time 1 p.15
Deceleration M2-Dec p.15 17 - Stator resistor M2-Rs X O O
05 0h1C05 0.0-600.0(s) 30.0 O O O 1
time Time 1 Leakage Dependent on p.15
0 0.2 kW 18 - M2-Lsigma X O O
inductance motor settings 1
1 0.4 kW Stator p.15
2 0.75 kW 19 - M2-Ls X O O
inductance 1
3 1.1 kW 41 Rotor time p.15
4 1.5 kW 20 - M2-Tr 25-5000(ms) X O O
constant 1
5 2.2 kW
p.15 0 Linear
06 0h1C06 Motor capacity M2-Capacity 6 3.0 kW - X O O 0:
1 p.15
7 3.7 kW 25 0h1C19 V/F pattern M2-V/F Patt 1 Square Linea X O O
8 4.0 kW 1
r
9 5.5 kW 2 User V/F
10 7.5 kW 26 0h1C1A Forward Torque M2-Fwd 0.0-15.0(%) 2.0 X O O p.15
11 11.0 kW
12 15.0 kW
41
Displayed when M2-08 is set to 4 (IM Sensorless)
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 271 272 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Initial Comm. Setting Initial

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Value Address Range Value
boost Boost 1 Output address Link
16 0h1D10 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
Reverse Torque M2-Rev p.15 link6 UserOut6
27 0h1C1B 0.0-15.0(%) X O O
boost Boost 1 Output address Link
17 0h1D11 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
Stall prevention p.15 link7 UserOut7
28 0h1C1C M2-Stall Lev 30-150(%) 150 X O O
level 1 Output address Link
18 0h1D12 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
Electronic link8 UserOut8
M2-ETH p.15
29 0h1C1D thermal 1 100-200(%) 150 X O O Output address Link
1min 1 19 0h1D13 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
minute rating link9 UserOut9
Electronic Output address Link
20 0h1D14 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
thermal M2-ETH p.15 link10 UserOut10
30 0h1C1E 50-150(%) 100 X O O
continuous Cont 1 Output address Link
21 0h1D15 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
rating link11 UserOut11
Output address Link
22 0h1D16 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
link12 UserOut12
Output address Link
23 0h1D17 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
8.11 User Sequence group (USS) link13 UserOut13
Output address Link
24 0h1D18 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
This group appears when APP-02 is set to 1 (Yes) or COM-95 is set to 2 (P2P Master). The link14 UserOut14
parameter cannot be changed while the user sequence is running. Output address Link
25 0h1D19 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
link15 UserOut15
SL: Sensorless vector control function (DRV-09) Output address Link
26 0h1D1A 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
*O/X: Write-enabled during operation link16 UserOut16
Comm. Setting Initial Output address Link
Code Name LCD Display Property* V/F SL Ref. 27 0h1D1B 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
Address Range Value link17 UserOut17
00 - Jump code Jump Code 1-99 31 O O O p.45 Output address Link
28 0h1D1C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
0 Stop link18 UserOut18
User sequence Input constant
User Seq 1 Run 31 0h1D1F Void Para1 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
01 0h1D01 operation 0:Stop X O O p.98 setting1
Con Digital In
command 2 Input constant
Run 32 0h1D20 Void Para2 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
0 0.01s setting2
1 0.02s Input constant
33 0h1D21 Void Para3 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
User sequence setting3
US Loop 2 0.05s
02 0h1D02 operation loop 1:0.02s X O O p.98 Input constant
Time 3 0.1s 34 0h1D22 Void Para4 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
time setting4
4 0.5s
Input constant
5 1s 35 0h1D23 Void Para5 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting5
Output address Link
11 0h1D0B 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 Input constant
link1 UserOut1 36 0h1D24 Void Para6 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting6
Output address Link
12 0h1D0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 Input constant
link2 UserOut2 37 0h1D25 Void Para7 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting7
Output address Link
13 0h1D0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 Input constant
link3 UserOut3 38 0h1D26 Void Para8 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting8
Output address Link
14 0h1D0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 Input constant
link4 UserOut4 39 0h1D27 Void Para9 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting9
Output address Link
15 0h1D0F 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 Input constant
link5 UserOut5 40 0h1D28 Void Para10 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting10
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 273 274 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. Setting Initial Comm. Setting Initial

Code Name LCD Display Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name LCD Display Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Range Value Address Range Value
Input constant 85 0h1D55 Analog output P2P OutAO1 0-10,000 0 X O O p.98
41 0h1D29 Void Para11 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting11 89 0h1D58 Digital output P2P OutDO 0-0x03 0 X O O p.98
Input constant
42 0h1D2A Void Para12 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting12
Input constant
43 0h1D2B Void Para13 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting13
Input constant
8.12 User Sequence Function group(USF)
44 0h1D2C Void Para14 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting14 This group appears when APP-02 is set to 1 (Yes) or COM-95 is set to 2 (P2P Master). The
Input constant parameter cannot be changed while the user sequence is running.
45 0h1D2D Void Para15 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting15
Input constant SL: Sensorless vector control function (DRV-09)
46 0h1D2E Void Para16 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting16 *O/X: Write-enabled during operation
Input constant Comm. LCD Initial
47 0h1D2F Void Para17 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
setting17 Address Display Value
Input constant Jump
48 0h1D30 Void Para18 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 00 - Jump code 1-99 41 O O O p.45
setting18 Code
Input constant
49 0h1D31 Void Para19 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 0 NOP
setting19
Input constant 1 ADD
50 0h1D32 Void Para20 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting20 2 SUB
Input constant 3 ADDSUB
51 0h1D33 Void Para21 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting21
4 MIN
Input constant
52 0h1D34 Void Para22 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 5 MAX
setting22
Input constant 6 ABS
53 0h1D35 Void Para23 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting23
7 NEGATE
Input constant
54 0h1D36 Void Para24 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 8 MPYDIV
setting24
Input constant 9 REMAINDER
55 0h1D37 Void Para25 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting25 10 COMPARE-GT
Input constant User
56 0h1D38 Void Para26 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 01 0h1E01 User function1 11 COMPARE-GEQ 0:NOP X O O p.98
setting26 Func1
Input constant COMPARE-
57 0h1D39 Void Para27 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 12
setting27 EQUAL
Input constant COMPARE-
58 0h1D3A Void Para28 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 13
setting28 NEQUAL
Input constant 14 TIMER
59 0h1D3B Void Para29 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98
setting29 15 LIMIT
Input constant
60 0h1D3C Void Para30 -9999-9999 0 X O O p.98 16 AND
setting30
0h1D50 17 OR
80 Analog input 1 P2P In V1 0-12,000 O O p.98
S 18 XOR
-12,000- 19 ANDOR
81 0h1D51 Analog input2 P2P In I2 O O p.98
12,000
20 SWITCH
82 0h1D52 Digital input P2P In DI 0-0x7F O O p.98
21 BITTEST
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 275 276 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
22 BITSET 21 BITTEST
23 BITCLEAR 22 BITSET
24 LOWPASSFILTER 23 BITCLEAR
25 PI_CONTORL 24 LOWPASSFILTER
26 PI_PROCESS 25 PI_CONTORL
27 UPCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
28 DOWNCOUNT 27 UPCOUNT
User function User 28 DOWNCOUNT
02 0h1E02 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input1-A Input1-A User function User
User function User 07 0h1E07 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
03 0h1E03 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input2-A Input2-A
input1-B Input1-B User function User
User function User 08 0h1E08 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
04 0h1E04 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input2-B Input2-B
input1-C Input1-C User function User
User function User 09 0h1E09 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
05 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 input2-C Input2-C
output1 Output1 User function User
10 0h1E0A -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
0 NOP output2 Output2
1 ADD 0 NOP
2 SUB 1 ADD
3 ADDSUB 2 SUB
4 MIN 3 ADDSUB
5 MAX 4 MIN
6 ABS 5 MAX
7 NEGATE 6 ABS
8 MPYDIV 7 NEGATE
9 REMAINDER 8 MPYDIV
10 COMPARE-GT 9 REMAINDER
User 0:
06 0h1E06 User function 2 X O O p.98 User
Func2 11 COMPARE-GEQ NOP 11 0h1E0B User function3 10 COMPARE-GT 0:NOP X O O p.98
Func3
COMPARE- 11 COMPARE-GEQ
12
EQUAL COMPARE-
12
COMPARE- EQUAL
13
NEQUAL COMPARE-
13
14 TIMER NEQUAL
15 LIMIT 14 TIMER
16 AND 15 LIMIT
17 OR 16 AND
18 XOR 17 OR
19 ANDOR 18 XOR
20 SWITCH 19 ANDOR

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 277 278 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
20 SWITCH 19 ANDOR
21 BITTEST 20 SWITCH
22 BITSET 21 BITTEST
23 BITCLEAR 22 BITSET
24 LOWPASSFILTER 23 BITCLEAR
25 PI_CONTORL 24 LOWPASSFILTER
26 PI_PROCESS 25 PI_CONTORL
27 UPCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
28 DOWNCOUNT 27 UPCOUNT
User function User 28 DOWNCOUNT
12 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input3-A Input3-A User function User
17 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
User function User input4-A Input4-A
13 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input3-B Input3-B User function User
18 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
User function User input4-B Input4-B
14 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input3-C Input3-C User function User
19 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
User function User input4-C Input4-C
15 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
output3 Output3 User function User
20 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
0 NOP output4 Output4
1 ADD 0 NOP
1 ADD
2 SUB
2 SUB
3 ADDSUB 3 ADDSUB
4 MIN 4 MIN
5 MAX 5 MAX
6 ABS 6 ABS
7 NEGATE 7 NEGATE
8 MPYDIV 8 MPYDIV
9 REMAINDER 9 REMAINDER
User
16 0h1E0B User function4 10 COMPARE-GT 0:NOP X O O p.98 User 10 COMPARE-GT
Func4 21 0h1E0B User function5 0:NOP X O O p.98
Func5 11 COMPARE-GEQ
11 COMPARE-GEQ
COMPARE-
COMPARE- 12
12 EQUAL
EQUAL COMPARE-
13
COMPARE- NEQUAL
13
NEQUAL 14 TIMER
14 TIMER 15 LIMIT
15 LIMIT 16 AND
16 AND 17 OR
17 OR 18 XOR
18 XOR 19 ANDOR
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 279 280 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
20 SWITCH 18 XOR
21 BITTEST 19 ANDOR
22 BITSET 20 SWITCH
23 BITCLEAR 21 BITTEST
24 LOWPASSFILTER 22 BITSET
25 PI_CONTORL 23 BITCLEAR
26 PI_PROCESS 24 LOWPASSFILTER
27 UPCOUNT 25 PI_CONTORL
28 DOWNCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
User function User 27 UPCOUNT
22 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input5-A Input5-A 28 DOWNCOUNT
User function User
23 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 User function User
input5-B Input5-B 27 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input6-A Input6-A
User function User
24 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 User function User
input5-C Input5-C 28 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input6-B Input6-B
User function User
25 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 User function User
output5 Output5 29 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input6-C Input6-C
0 NOP User function User
30 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
1 ADD output6 Output6
2 SUB 0 NOP
3 ADDSUB 1 ADD
4 MIN 2 SUB
5 MAX
3 ADDSUB
6 ABS 4 MIN
7 NEGATE 5 MAX
8 MPYDIV 6 ABS
User 9 REMAINDER 0:
26 0h1E0B User function6 X O O p.98 7 NEGATE
Func6 NOP
10 COMPARE-GT User 8 MPYDIV
31 0h1E0B User function7 0:NOP X O O p.98
Func7
11 COMPARE-GEQ 9 REMAINDER
COMPARE- 10 COMPARE-GT
12
EQUAL 11 COMPARE-GEQ
COMPARE-
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL 12
EQUAL
14 TIMER
13 COMPARE-
15 LIMIT NEQUAL
14 TIMER
16 AND
15 LIMIT
17 OR
16 AND

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 281 282 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
17 OR 15 LIMIT
18 XOR 16 AND
19 ANDOR 17 OR
20 SWITCH 18 XOR
21 BITTEST 19 ANDOR
22 BITSET 20 SWITCH
23 BITCLEAR 21 BITTEST
24 LOWPASSFILTER 22 BITSET
25 PI_CONTORL 23 BITCLEAR
26 PI_PROCESS 24 LOWPASSFILTER
27 UPCOUNT 25 PI_CONTORL
28 DOWNCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
User function User 27 UPCOUNT
32 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input7-A Input7-A 28 DOWNCOUNT
User function User
33 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 User function User
input7-B Input7-B 37 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input8-A Input8-A
User function User
34 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 User function User
input7-C Input7-C 38 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input8-B Input8-B
User function User
35 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 User function User
output7 Output7 39 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input8-C Input8-C
0 NOP User function User
40 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
1 ADD output8 Output8
2 SUB 0 NOP
3 ADDSUB 1 ADD
4 MIN 2 SUB
5 MAX 3 ADDSUB
6 ABS 4 MIN
7 NEGATE 5 MAX
User
36 0h1E0B User function8 0:NOP X O O p.98 6 ABS
Func8 8 MPYDIV
User
9 REMAINDER 41 0h1E0B User function9 7 NEGATE 0:NOP X O O p.98
Func9
10 COMPARE-GT 8 MPYDIV
11 COMPARE-GEQ 9 REMAINDER
COMPARE- 10 COMPARE-GT
12
EQUAL 11 COMPARE-GEQ
COMPARE-
13 COMPARE-
NEQUAL 12
EQUAL
14 TIMER
13 COMPARE-

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 283 284 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
NEQUAL EQUAL
14 TIMER COMPARE-
13
NEQUAL
15 LIMIT
14 TIMER
16 AND
15 LIMIT
17 OR
16 AND
18 XOR
17 OR
19 ANDOR
18 XOR
20 SWITCH
19 ANDOR
21 BITTEST
20 SWITCH
22 BITSET
21 BITTEST
23 BITCLEAR
22 BITSET
24 LOWPASSFILTER
23 BITCLEAR
25 PI_CONTORL
24 LOWPASSFILTER
26 PI_PROCESS
25 PI_CONTORL
27 UPCOUNT
26 PI_PROCESS
28 DOWNCOUNT
27 UPCOUNT
User function User
42 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 28 DOWNCOUNT
input9-A Input9-A
User function User User function User
43 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 47 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input9-B Input9-B input10-A Input10-A
User function User User function User
44 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 48 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input9-C Input9-C input10-B Input10-B
User function User User function User
45 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 49 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
output9 Output9 input10-C Input10-C
0 NOP User function User
50 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
output10 Output10
1 ADD
0 NOP
2 SUB
1 ADD
3 ADDSUB
2 SUB
4 MIN
3 ADDSUB
5 MAX
User 4 MIN
46 0h1E0B User function10 6 ABS 0:NOP X O O p.98
Func10 User 5 MAX 0:
7 NEGATE 51 0h1E0B User function11 X O O p.98
Func11 6 ABS NOP
8 MPYDIV
7 NEGATE
9 REMAINDER
8 MPYDIV
10 COMPARE-GT
9 REMAINDER
11 COMPARE-GEQ
10 COMPARE-GT
12 COMPARE-
11 COMPARE-GEQ
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 285 286 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
COMPARE- 11 COMPARE-GEQ
12
EQUAL
COMPARE-
COMPARE- 12
13 EQUAL
NEQUAL
COMPARE-
14 TIMER 13
NEQUAL
15 LIMIT 14 TIMER
16 AND 15 LIMIT
17 OR 16 AND
18 XOR 17 OR
19 ANDOR 18 XOR
20 SWITCH 19 ANDOR
21 BITTEST 20 SWITCH
22 BITSET 21 BITTEST
23 BITCLEAR 22 BITSET
24 LOWPASSFILTER 23 BITCLEAR
25 PI_CONTORL 24 LOWPASSFILTER
26 PI_PROCESS 25 PI_CONTORL
27 UPCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
28 DOWNCOUNT 27 UPCOUNT
User function User 28 DOWNCOUNT
52 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input11-A Input11-A
User function User
User function User 57 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
53 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input12-A Input12-A
input11-B Input11-B
User function User
User function User 58 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
54 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input12-B Input12-B
input11-C Input11-C
User function User
User function User 59 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
55 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 input12-C Input12-C
output11 Output11
User function User
0 NOP 60 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
output12 Output12
1 ADD 0 NOP
2 SUB 1 ADD
3 ADDSUB 2 SUB
4 MIN 3 ADDSUB
User
56 0h1E0B User function12 5 MAX 0:NOP X O O p.98 User 4 MIN 0:
Func12 61 0h1E0B User function13 X O O p.98
6 ABS Func13 5 MAX NOP
7 NEGATE 6 ABS
8 MPYDIV 7 NEGATE
9 REMAINDER 8 MPYDIV
10 COMPARE-GT 9 REMAINDER

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 287 288 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
10 COMPARE-GT 9 REMAINDER
11 COMPARE-GEQ 10 COMPARE-GT
COMPARE- 11 COMPARE-GEQ
12
EQUAL COMPARE-
COMPARE- 12
13 EQUAL
NEQUAL COMPARE-
14 TIMER 13
NEQUAL
15 LIMIT 14 TIMER
16 AND 15 LIMIT
17 OR 16 AND
18 XOR 17 OR
19 ANDOR 18 XOR
20 SWITCH 19 ANDOR
21 BITTEST 20 SWITCH
22 BITSET 21 BITTEST
23 BITCLEAR 22 BITSET
24 LOWPASSFILTER 23 BITCLEAR
25 PI_CONTORL 24 LOWPASSFILTER
26 PI_PROCESS 25 PI_CONTORL
27 UPCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
28 DOWNCOUNT 27 UPCOUNT
User function User 28 DOWNCOUNT
62 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input13-A Input13-A User function User
User function User 67 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
63 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input14-A Input14-A
input13-B Input13-B User function User
User function User 68 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
64 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input14-B Input14-B
input13-C Input13-C User function User
User function User 69 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
65 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 input14-C Input14-C
output13 Output13 User function User
0 NOP 70 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
output14 Output14
1 ADD 0 NOP
2 SUB 1 ADD
3 ADDSUB 2 SUB
User 0:
66 0h1E0B User function14 4 MIN X O O p.98 User 3 ADDSUB
Func14 NOP 71 0h1E0B User function15 0:NOP X O O p.98
5 MAX Func15 4 MIN
6 ABS 5 MAX
7 NEGATE 6 ABS
8 MPYDIV 7 NEGATE

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 289 290 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
8 MPYDIV 7 NEGATE
9 REMAINDER 8 MPYDIV
10 COMPARE-GT 9 REMAINDER
11 COMPARE-GEQ 10 COMPARE-GT
COMPARE- 11 COMPARE-GEQ
12
EQUAL COMPARE-
COMPARE- 12
13 EQUAL
NEQUAL COMPARE-
13
14 TIMER NEQUAL
15 LIMIT 14 TIMER
16 AND 15 LIMIT
17 OR 16 AND
18 XOR 17 OR
19 ANDOR 18 XOR
20 SWITCH 19 ANDOR
21 BITTEST 20 SWITCH
22 BITSET 21 BITTEST
23 BITCLEAR 22 BITSET
24 LOWPASSFILTER 23 BITCLEAR
25 PI_CONTORL 24 LOWPASSFILTER
26 PI_PROCESS 25 PI_CONTORL
27 UPCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
28 DOWNCOUNT 27 UPCOUNT
User function User 28 DOWNCOUNT
72 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input15-A Input15-A User function User
User function User 77 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
73 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input16-A Input16-A
input15-B Input15-B User function User
User function User 78 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
74 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input16-B Input16-B
input15-C Input15-C User function User
User function User 79 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
75 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 input16-C Input16-C
output15 Output15 User function User
80 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
0 NOP output16 Output16
1 ADD 0 NOP
2 SUB 1 ADD
User 2 SUB
76 0h1E0B User function 16 3 ADDSUB 0:NOP X O O p.98 User 0:
Func16 81 0h1E0B User function 17 X O O p.98
4 MIN Func17 3 ADDSUB NOP
5 MAX 4 MIN
6 ABS 5 MAX

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 291 292 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Comm. LCD Initial Comm. LCD Initial

Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref. Code Name Setting Range Property* V/F SL Ref.
Address Display Value Address Display Value
6 ABS 5 MAX
7 NEGATE 6 ABS
8 MPYDIV 7 NEGATE
9 REMAINDER 8 MPYDIV
10 COMPARE-GT 9 REMAINDER
11 COMPARE-GEQ 10 COMPARE-GT
COMPARE- 11 COMPARE-GEQ
12
EQUAL
COMPARE-
COMPARE- 12
13 EQUAL
NEQUAL
COMPARE-
14 TIMER 13
NEQUAL
15 LIMIT 14 TIMER
16 AND 15 LIMIT
17 OR 16 AND
18 XOR 17 OR
19 ANDOR 18 XOR
20 SWITCH 19 ANDOR
21 BITTEST 20 SWITCH
22 BITSET 21 BITTEST
23 BITCLEAR 22 BITSET
24 LOWPASSFILTER 23 BITCLEAR
25 PI_CONTORL 24 LOWPASSFILTER
26 PI_PROCESS 25 PI_CONTORL
27 UPCOUNT 26 PI_PROCESS
28 DOWNCOUNT 27 UPCOUNT
User function User 28 DOWNCOUNT
82 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
input17-A Input17-A
User function User
User function User 87 0h1E0C 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
83 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input18-A Input18-A
input17-B Input17-B
User function User
User function User 88 0h1E0D 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
84 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98 input18-B Input18-B
input17-C Input17-C
User function User
User function User 89 0h1E0E 0-0xFFFF 0 X O O p.98
85 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98 input18-C Input18-C
output17 Output17
User function User
0 NOP 90 0h1E05 -32767-32767 0 O O p.98
output18 Output18
1 ADD
User 0:
86 0h1E0B User function 18 2 SUB X O O p.98
Func18 NOP
3 ADDSUB
4 MIN

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 293 294 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Table of Functions Table of Functions

8.13 Groups for LCD Keypad Only Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref.
Status window display
20 Anytime Para 0 Frequency 0: Frequency p.179
item
Monitor mode display
8.13.1 Trip Mode (TRP Last-x) 21
item1
Monitor Line-1 1 Speed 0: Frequency p.179

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref. Monitor mode display 2:Output
22 Monitor Line-2 2 Output Current p.179
item2 Current
00 Trip type display Trip Name(x) - - - 3 Output Voltage
Frequency reference at 4 Output Power
01 Output Freq - - -
trip 5 WHour
02 Output current at trip Output Current - - - Counter
6 DCLink Voltage
Acceleration/Deceleration 7 DI State
03 Inverter State - - -
state at trip 8 DO State
04 DC section state DCLink Voltage - - - 9 V1 Monitor(V)
05 NTC temperature Temperature - - - 10 V1 Monitor(%)
06 Input terminal state DI State - 0000 0000 - Monitor mode display 13 V2 Monitor(V) 3:Output
23 Monitor Line-3 p.179
07 ⁲㧦₁ ㌗䌲 state
Output terminal DO State - 000 - item3 14 V2 Monitor(%) Voltage
08 Trip time after Power on Trip On Time - 0/00/00 00:00 - 15 I2 Monitor(mA)
09 Trip time after operation 16 I2 Monitor(%)
10 Trip Run Time - 0/00/00 00:00 -
start 17 PID Output
0 No 18 PID Ref Value
10 Delete trip history Trip Delete?
1 Yes 19 PID Fdb Value
20 Torque
21 Torque Limit
8.13.2 Config Mode (CNF) 23 Speed Limit
Monitor mode 0 No
Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref. 24 Mon Mode Init 0:No p.179
initialization 1 Yes
00 Jump code Jump Code 1-99 42 p.45 30 Option slot 1 type display Option-1 Type 0 None 0:None p.163
0 English
31 Option slot 2 type display Option-2 Type 6 Ethernet 0:None p.163
1 Russian
Keypad language 32 Option slot 3 type display Option-3 Type 9 CANopen 0:None p.163
01 Language Sel 2 Spanish 0 : English p.179
selection
3 Italian 0 No
4 Turkish 1 All Grp
LCD constrast
02 LCD Contrast - - p.163 2 DRV Grp
adjustment
03 Multi keypad ID Multi KPD ID 3-99 3 p.96 3 BAS Grp
40 Parameter initialization Parameter Init p.156
10 Inverter S/W version Inv S/W Ver - - p.163 4 ADV Grp
11 LCD keypad S/W version Keypad S/W Ver - - p.163 5 CON Grp
12 LCD keypad title version KPD Title Ver - - p.163 6 IN Grp
7 OUT Grp
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 295 296 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Table of Functions Table of Functions

Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref. Code Name LCD Display Setting Range Initial Value Ref.
8 COM Grp Accumulated inverter Year/month/day
71 Run-time - p.182
9 APP Grp operation time hour:minute
12 PRT Grp 0 No 0:No
Accumulated inverter
13 M2 Grp 72 operation time Time Reset p.182
initialization 1 Yes
Display changed 0 View All
41 Changed Para 0:View All p.159
Parameter 1 View Changed
0 None Accumulated cooling fan Year/month/day
74 Fan Time - p.182
1 JOG Key operation time hour:minute
2 Local/Remote
42 Multi key item Multi Key Sel 0:None p.159 0 No
UserGrp Reset of accumulated
3 75 Fan Time Rst 0:No p.182
SelKey cooling fan operation time 1 Yes
4 Multi KPD
43 Macro function item Macro Select 0 None 0:None -
0 No
44 Trip history deletion Erase All Trip 0:No p.163
1 Yes
User registration code 0 No
45 UserGrp AllDel 0:No p.159
deletion 1 Yes
0 No
46 Read parameters Parameter Read 0:No p.155
1 Yes
Parameter 0 No
47 Write parameters 0: No p.155
Write 1 Yes
0 No
48 Save parameters Parameter Save 0:No p.155
1 Yes
50 Hide parameter mode View Lock Set 0-9999 Un-locked p.157
Password for hiding
51 View Lock Pw 0-9999 Password p.157
parameter mode
52 Lock parameter edit Key Lock Set 0-9999 Un-locked p.158
Password for locking
53 Key Lock Pw 0-9999 Password p.158
parameter edit
0 No
60 Additional title update Add Title Up 0:No p.163
1 Yes
0 No
61 Simple parameter setting Easy Start On 1:Yes p.162
1 Yes
Power consumption 0 No
62 WHCount Reset 0:No p.163
initialization 1 Yes
Accumulated inverter Year/month/day
70 On-time - p.182
motion time hour:minute

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 297 298 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

LCD Display Type Description

9 Troubleshooting Trip* and causes the current to exceed the specified value. The specified value
varies depending on inverter capacity.
This chapter explains how to troubleshoot a problem when inverter protective functions, fault trips, Displayed based on inverse time-limit thermal characteristics to prevent
warning signals, or a fault occurs. If the inverter does not work normally after following the suggested E-Thermal Latch
motor overheating. Operates when PRT-40 is set to a value other than 0.
troubleshooting steps, please contact the L&T Customer Interaction Center.
Out Phase Displayed when a 3-phase inverter output has one or more phases in an
Latch
Open open circuit condition. Operates when bit 1 of PRT-05 is set to 1.
In Phase Displayed when a 3-phase inverter input has one or more phases in an
Latch
Open open circuit condition. Operates only when bit 2 of PRT-05 is set to 1.
9.1 Trips and Warnings Displayed when the inverter has been protected from overload and
resultant overheating, based on inverse time-limit thermal characteristics.
When the inverter detects a fault, it stops the operation (trips) or sends out a warning signal. When a Inverter
Latch Allowable overload rates for the inverter are 150% for 1 min and 200% for
trip or warning occurs, detailed information is shown on the LCD display. Users can read the warning OLT
4 sec. Protection is based on inverter rated capacity, and may vary
message at PRT-90. When more than 2 trips occur at roughly the same time, the LCD keypad shows depending on the device’s capacity.
the information for the fault trip that occurred first. No Motor Displayed when the motor is not connected during inverter operation.
Latch
Trip Operates when PRT-31 is set to 1.
The fault conditions can be categorized as follows:
* SX2000 inverters rated for 4.0 kW or less do not support the ground fault trip (GFT) feature.
O Level: When the fault is corrected, the trip or warning signal disappears and the fault is not saved Therefore, an over current trip (OCT) or over voltage trip (OVT) may occur when there is a low-
in the fault history. resistance ground fault.
O Latch: When the fault is corrected and a reset input signal is provided, the trip or warning signal
disappears. Protection Functions Using Abnormal Internal Circuit Conditions and External Signals
O Fatal: When the fault is corrected, the fault trip or warning signal disappears only after the user
LCD Display Type Description
turns off the inverter, waits until the charge indicator light goes off, and turns the inverter on again.
Displayed when the tempertature of the inverter heat sink exceeds the
If the the inverter is still in a fault condition after powering it on again, please contact the supplier Over Heat Latch
specified value.
or the L&T Customer Interaction Center.
Over Displayed when the DC circuit in the inverter detects a specified level of
Latch
Current2 excessive, short circuit current.
Displayed when an external fault signal is provided by the multi-function
External Trip Latch terminal. Set one of the multi-function input terminals at IN-65-71 to 4
9.1.1 Fault Trips (External Trip) to enable external trip.
Protection Functions for Output Current and Input Voltage Displayed when the inverter output is blocked by a signal provided from the
BX Level multi-function terminal. Set one of the multi-function input terminals at IN-
LCD Display Type Description
65-71 to 5 (BX) to enable input block function.
Displayed when the motor overload trip is activated and the actual load
Displayed when an error is detected in the memory (EEPRom), analog-
Over Load Latch level exceeds the set level. Operates when PRT-20 is set to a value other
digital converter output (ADC Off Set), or CPU watchdog (Watch Dog-1,
than 0.
Watch Dog-2).
Displayed when the motor underload trip is activated and the actual load
Underload Latch level is less than the set level. Operates when PRT-27 is set to a value H/W-Diag Fatal
O EEP Err: An error in reading/writing parameters due to keypad or
other than 0.
memory (EEPRom) fault.
Over
Current1
Latch Displayed when inverter output current exceeds 200% of the rated current. O ADC Off Set: An error in the current sensing circuit (U/V/W terminal,
Over current sensor, etc.).
Latch Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage exceeds the specified value. Displayed when an error is detected in the temperature sensor of the
Voltage NTC Open Latch
Low Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT).
Level Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than the specified value. Displayed when an error is detected in the cooling fan. Set PRT-79 to 0 to
Voltage Fan Trip Latch
Low Displayed when internal DC circuit voltage is less than the specified value activate fan trip (for models below 22 kW capacity).
Latch Displayed when pre-PID is operating with functions set at APP-34–APP-36.
Voltage2 during inverter operation. Pre-PID Fail Latch
Ground Latch Displayed when a ground fault trip occurs on the output side of the inverter A fault trip occurs when a controlled variable (PID feedback) is measured

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 299 300 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

LCD Display Type Description 9.1.2 Warning Messages

below the set value and the low feedback continues, as it is treated as a
load fault. LCD Display Description
Operates when the external brake signal is provided by the multi-function Displayed when the motor is overloaded. Operates when PRT-17 is set to 1. To
Ext-Brake Latch terminal. Occurs when the inverter output starting current remains below Over Load operate, select 5. Set the digital output terminal or relay (OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 5
the set value at ADV-41. Set either OUT31 or OUT32 to 35 (BR Control). (Over Load) to receive overload warning output signals.
Safety A(B) Displayed when the motor is underloaded. Operates when PRT-25 is set to 1. Set the
Level Displayed when at least one of the two safety input signals is off.
Err Under Load digital output terminal or relay (OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 7 (Under Load) to receive
underload warning output signals.
Displayed when the overload time equivalent to 60% of the inverter overheat
INV Over
Protection Functions for Communication Options protection (inverter IOLT) level, is accumulated. Set the digital output terminal or relay
Load
(OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 6 (IOL) to receive inverter overload warning output signals.
LCD Display Type Description Lost command warning alarm occurs even with PRT-12 set to 0. The warning alarm
Displayed when a frequency or operation command error is detected occurs based on the condition set at PRT-13- 15. Set the digital output terminal or
Lost during inverter operation by controllers other than the keypad (e.g., using a Lost
Level relay (OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 13 (Lost Command) to receive lost command warning
Command terminal block and a communication mode). Activate by setting PRT-12 to Command
output signals. If the communication settings and status are not suitable for P2P, a
any value other than 0. Lost Command alarm occurs.
Displayed when the I/O board or external communication card is not Displayed when an error is detected from the cooling fan while PRT-79 is set to 1. Set
IO Board connected to the inverter or there is a bad connection. Fan Warning the digital output terminal or relay (OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 8 (Fan Warning) to receive
Latch
Trip fan warning output signals.
Displayed when the Sx200 error code continues for more than 5 sec.
Displayed when communication fails during parameter writing. Occurs An alarm occurs when the value set at PRT-86 is less than the value set at PRT-87. To
ParaWrite Fan
Latch when using an LCD keypad due to a control cable fault or a bad receive fan exchange output signals, set the digital output terminal or relay (OUT-31 or
Trip Exchange
connection. OUT-33) to 38 (Fan Exchange).
Displayed when a communication error is detected between the inverter An alarm occurs when the value set at PRT-63 is less than the value set at PRT-62
CAP
Option Trip-1 Latch and the communication board. Occurs when the communication option (the value set at PRT-61 must be 2 (Pre Diag)). To receive CAP exchange signals, set
Exchange
card is installed. the digital output terminal or relay (OUT-31 or OUT-33) to 36 (CAP Exchange).
DB Displayed when the DB resistor usage rate exceeds the set value. Set the detection
Warn %ED level at PRT-66.
Retry Tr Tr tune error warning alarm is activated when Dr.9 is set to 4. The warning alarm
Tune occurs when the motor’s rotor time constant (Tr) is either too low or too high.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 301 302 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

9.2 Troubleshooting Fault Trips Type Cause Remedy

The inverter load is greater than the rated Replace the inverter with a model that
When a fault trip or warning occurs due to a protection function, refer to the following table for capacity. has increased capacity.
possible causes and remedies. The set value for electronic thermal Set an appropriate electronic thermal
protection is too low. level.
Type Cause Remedy The inverter has been operated at low Replace the motor with a model that
The load is greater than the motor’s rated
Ensure that the motor and inverter have speed for an extended duration. supplies extra power to the cooling fan.
capacity. appropriate capacity ratings. The magnetic contactor on the output side Check the magnetic contactor on the
Over Load Output Phase has a connection fault. output side.
The set value for the overload trip levelIncrease the set value for the overload
(PRT-21) is too low. trip level. Open
The output wiring is faulty. Check the output wiring.
Replace the motor and inverter with The magnetic contactor on the input side Check the magnetic contactor on the
There is a motor-load connection problem.
models with lower capacity. has a connection fault. input side.
Under Load The set value for underload level (PRT-29,
Reduce the set value for the underload Input Phase The input wiring is faulty. Check the input wiring.
PRT-30) is less than the system’s
level. Open Replace the DC link capacitor. Contact
minimum load. The DC link capacitor needs to be
Acc/Dec time is too short, compared to Increase Acc/Dec time. the retailer or the L&T Customer
replaced.
load inertia (GD2). Interaction Center.
The inverter load is greater than the rated Replace the inverter with a model that The load is greater than the rated motor Replace the motor and inverter with
capacity. has increased capacity. Inverter OLT capacity. models that have increased capacity.
Over Current1 Operate the inverter after the motor has The torque boost level is too high. Reduce the torque boost level.
The inverter supplied an output while the
stopped or use the speed search There is a problem with the cooling Determine if a foreign object is
motor was idling.
function (CON-60). system. obstructing the air inlet, outlet, or vent.
The mechanical brake of the motor is The inverter cooling fan has been operated
Check the mechanical brake. Over Heat Replace the cooling fan.
operating too fast. for an extended period.
Deceleration time is too short for the load Keep the ambient temperature below
Increase the acceleration time. The ambient temperature is too high.
inertia (GD2). 50Ԩ.
A generative load occurs at the inverter
Over Voltage Use the braking unit. Output wiring is short-circuited. Check the output wiring.
output.
Determine if the input voltage is above Over Current2 There is a fault with the electronic Do not operate the inverter. Contact the
The input voltage is too high. retailer or the L&T Customer Interaction
the specified value. semiconductor (IGBT).
Determine if the input voltage is below Center.
The input voltage is too low. Keep the ambient temperature above -
the specificed value. The ambient temperature is too low.
A load greater than the power capacity is 10Ԩ.
NTC Open
Low Voltage connected to the system (e.g., a welder, Increase the power capacity. There is a fault with the internal Contact the retailer or the L&T Customer
direct motor connection, etc.) temperature sensor. Interaction Center.
The magnetic contactor connected to the A foreign object is obstructing the fan’s air Remove the foreign object from the air
Replace the magnetic contactor. FAN Lock vent. inlet or outlet.
power source has a faulty connection.
The input voltage has decreased during Determine if the input voltage is above The cooling fan needs to be replaced. Replace the cooling fan.
the operation. the specified value.
Low Voltage2 An input phase-loss has occurred. Check the input wiring.
The power supply magnetic contactor is
Replace the magnetic contractor.
faulty.
A ground fault has occurred in the inverter
Check the output wiring.
Ground Trip output wiring.
The motor insulation is damaged. Replace the motor.
E-Thermal The motor has overheated. Reduce the load or operation frequency.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 303 304 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

9.3 Troubleshooting Other Faults Type Cause Remedy

opposite (U/V/W) of the motor.
When a fault other than those identified as fault trips or warnings occurs, refer to the following table for direction to the
The signal connection between the
possible causes and remedies. command.
control circuit terminal (forward/reverse
Check the forward/reverse rotation
rotation) of the inverter and the
Type Cause Remedy wiring.
forward/reverse rotation signal on the
The inverter is in operation (driving Stop the inverter to change to program control panel side is incorrect.
mode). mode and set the parameter. Remove the reverse rotation
Check the correct parameter access Reverse rotation prevention is selected.
The parameter access is incorrect. The motor only prevention.
Parameters level and set the parameter. rotates in one The reverse rotation signal is not Check the input signal associated with
cannot be set. Check the password, disable the direction. provided, even when a 3-wire sequence the 3-wire operation and adjust as
The password is incorrect.
parameter lock and set the parameter. is selected. necessary.
Check the power input to resolve the Reduce the load.
Low voltage is detected.
low voltage and set the parameter. Increase the Acc/Dec time.
The frequency command source is set Check the frequency command source Check the motor parameters and set
incorrectly. setting. The load is too heavy. the correct values.
The operation command source is set Check the operation command source Replace the motor and the inverter with
incorrectly. setting. models with appropriate capacity for
Power is not supplied to the terminal Check the terminal connections R/S/T the load.
R/S/T. and U/V/W. The ambient temperature of the motor is Lower the ambient temperature of the
The charge lamp is turned off. Turn on the inverter. too high. motor.
The motor is
Turn on the operation command Use a motor that can withstand phase-
The operation command is off. overheating.
(RUN). to-phase voltages surges greater than
Unlock the motor or lower the load the maximum surge voltage.
The motor is locked. The phase-to-phase voltage of the Only use motors suitable for
level.
motor is insufficient. apllications with inverters.
The load is too high. Operate the motor independently.
Connect the AC reactor to the inverter
An emergency stop signal is input. Reset the emergency stop signal. output (set the carrier frequency to 2
The wiring for the control circuit terminal Check the wiring for the control circuit kHz).
The motor does
not rotate. is incorrect. terminal. The motor fan has stopped or the fan is Check the motor fan and remove any
The input option for the frequency Check the input option for the obstructed with debris. foreign objects.
command is incorrect. frequency command. The motor stops Reduce the load.
The input voltage or current for the Check the input voltage or current for during
frequency command is incorrect. the frequency command. acceleration or The load is too high. Replace the motor and the inverter with
when connected models with capacity appropriate for
The PNP/NPN mode is selected
Check the PNP/NPN mode setting. to load. the load.
incorrectly.
Check the frequency command and The frequency command value is low. Set an appropriate value.
The frequency command value is too
input a value above the minimum Reduce the load and increase the
low.
frequency. The load is too high. acceleration time. Check the
Check that the stoppage is normal, if so The motor does mechanical brake status.
The [STOP/RESET] key is pressed.
resume operation normally. not accelerate. The acceleration time is too long. Change the acceleration time.
Change the operation modes (V/F, IM, /The acceleration
and Sensorless). If the fault remains, The combined values of the motor
Motor torque is too low. time is too long.
replace the inverter with a model with properties and the inverter parameter are Change the motor related parameters.
increased capacity. incorrect.
The motor The wiring for the motor output cable is Determine if the cable on the output The stall prevention level during
Change the stall prevention level.
rotates in the incorrect. side is wired correctly to the phase acceleration is low.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 305 306 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Type Cause Remedy Type Cause Remedy

The stall prevention level during possible.
Change the stall prevention level.
operation is low.
The motor Check the input voltage and balance
Change to vector control operation
vibrates severely Phase-to-phase voltage of 3-phase the voltage.
mode. If the fault is still not corrected,
Starting torque is insufficient. and does not power source is not balanced.
replace the inverter with a model with Check and test the motor’s insulation.
rotate normally.
increased capacity.
Resonance occurs between the motor's
Replace the motor and inverter with Slightly increase or decrease the carrier
There is a high variance in load. natural frequency and the carrier
Motor speed models with increased capacity. frequency.
frequency.
varies during The input voltage varies. Reduce input voltage variation. The motor
Slightly increase or decrease the carrier
operation. makes humming,
Motor speed variations occur at a specific Adjust the output frequency to avoid a Resonance occurs between the motor's frequency.
or loud noises.
frequency. resonance area. natural frequency and the inverter’s Use the frequency jump function to
The motor output frequency. avoid the frequency band where
rotation is Set a V/F pattern that is suitable for the resonance occurs.
The V/F pattern is set incorrectly.
different from the motor specification. In situations of noise inflow on the
setting. The frequency input command is an analog input side that results in
The deceleration time is set too long. Change the setting accordingly. external, analog command. command interference, change the
The motor The motor input filter time constant (IN-07).
deceleration time If motor parameters are normal, it is
vibrates/hunts. Ensure that the total cable length
is too long even The motor torque is insufficient. likely to be a motor capacity fault.
The wiring length between the inverter between the inverter and the motor is
with Dynamic Replace the motor with a model with
and the motor is too long. less than 200m (50m for motors rated
Braking (DB) increased capacity.
3.7 kW or lower).
resistor The load is higher than the internal
Replace the inverter with a model with The motor does Adjust the DC braking parameter.
connected. torque limit determined by the rated
increased capacity. not come to a It is difficult to decelerate sufficiently,
current of the inverter. Increase the set value for the DC
Operation is complete stop because DC braking is not operating braking current.
The carrier frequency is too high. Reduce the carrier frequency.
difficult in when the inverter normally. Increase the set value for the DC
underload Over-excitation has occurred due to an Reduce the torque boost value to avoid output stops. braking stopping time.
applications. inaccurate V/F setting at low speed. over-excitation. The frequency reference is within the Set the frequency reference higher
While the Change the carrier frequency to the The output jump frequency range. than the jump frequency range.
inverter is in minimum value. frequency does Set the upper limit of the frequency
The frequency reference is exceeding the
operation, a Noise occurs due to switching inside the not increase to command higher than the frequency
upper limit of the frequency command.
control unit inverter. Install a micro surge filter in the inverter the frequency reference.
malfunctions or output. reference. Because the load is too heavy, the stall Replace the inverter with a model with
noise occurs. prevention function is working. increased capacity.
Connect the inverter to a ground The cooling fan The control parameter for the cooling fan Check the control parameter setting for
terminal. does not rotate. is set incorrectly. the cooling fan.
Check that the ground resistance is
When the less than 100 Ω for 200 V inverters and
inverter is less than 10 Ω for 400 V inverters.
An earth leakage breaker will interrupt Check the capacity of the earth
operating, the
the supply if current flows to ground leakage breaker and make the
earth leakage
during inverter operation. appropriate connection, based on the
breaker is
activated. rated current of the inverter.
Lower the carrier frequency.
Make the cable length between the
inverter and the motor as short as

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 307 308 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Maintenance Maintenance

Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection

10 Maintenance area item
Inspection details
method standard equipment
Is the capacitor
This chapter explains how to replace the cooling fan, the regular inspections to complete, and how to swollen?
store and dispose of the product. An inverter is vulnerable to environmental conditions and faults also Turn off the
occur due to component wear and tear. To prevent breakdowns, please follow the maintenance system and
recommendations in this section. Is there any
Cooling check Fan rotates
Cooling fan abnormal vibration -
system operation by smoothly
or noise?
rotating the fan
manually.
Check and
Check the Voltmeter,
O Before you inspect the product, read all safety instructions contained in this manual. Display
Measuring Is the display value
display value
manage
ammeter, etc.
O Before you clean the product, ensure that the power is off. device normal? specified
on the panel.
O Clean the inverter with a dry cloth. Cleaning with wet cloths, water, solvents, or detergents may values.
result in electric shock or damage to the product. Is there any
Visual
abnormal vibration
inspection
or noise?
Motor All No abnormality -
Check for
Is there any
overheating or
abnormal smell?
10.1 Regular Inspection Lists damage.

10.1.1 Daily Inspections

Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection
Inspection details
area item method standard equipment
No icing
Is the ambient (ambient
temperature and temperature: -
Refer to 1.3
humidity within the 10 - +40) and Thermometer,
Ambient Installation
design range, and no hygrometer,
environment Considerations
is there any dust or condensation recorder
on page 3.
foreign objects (ambient
present? humidity below
50%)
All
Is there any
Visual
Inverter abnormal vibration No abnormality
inspection
or noise?
Measure
Refer to 11.1
voltages
Are the input and Input and
Power between R/ S/ Digital
output voltages Output
voltage T-phases in. multimeter tester
normal? Specification on
the inverter
page 316.
terminal block.
Is there any
Input/Output Smoothing Visual
leakage from the No abnormality -
circuit capacitor inspection
inside?
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 309 310 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Maintenance Maintenance

10.1.2 Annual Inspections Inspection

Inspection item
Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection
area details method standard equipment
Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection Balance the
Inspection item
area details method standard equipment Check for Measure voltage
Disconnect output voltage voltage between
inverter and imbalance between the phases: within
short while the inverter output 4V for 200 V
Megger test
R/S/T/U/V/W Control inverter is in terminal U/ V/ series and
(between
terminals, and circuit Operation operation. W. within 8V for Digital multimeter or
input/output Must be
then measure Protection check 400 V series. DC voltmeter
terminals and above 5 MΩ
from each circuit Is there an Test the
and earth
terminal to the error in the inverter ouput The circuit
terminal)
ground DC 500 V Megger display circuit protection in must work
All
terminal using after the both short and according to
a Megger. sequence open circuit the sequence.
Is there protection test? conditions.
Tighten up all
anything loose Check all
screws.
in the device? Are any of the connected
No Cooling No
Is there any Cooling fan fan parts parts and -
abnormality system abnormality
evidence of Visual loose? tighten all
parts inspection screws.
overheating? Check the Specified and
Are there any Is the display command managed Voltmeter,
Display Display device
corroded value normal? value on the values must Ammeter, etc.
cables? display device. match.
Cable Visual No
Input/Output Is there any -
connections inspection abnormality
circuit damage to
cable
insulation?
Is there any Visual No
Terminal block -
damage? inspection abnormality
Measure Rated
Smoothing Measure with
electrostatic capacity over Capacity meter
condenser capacity meter.
capacity. 85%
Is there any
chattering Visual
noise during inspection
No
Relay operation? -
abnormality
Is there any
Visual
damage to the
inspection
contacts?
Is there any
Visual No
damage from
inspection abnormality
resistance?
Braking Digital multimeter /
Disconnect Must be within
resistor anaog tester
Check for one side and ±10% of the
disconnection. measure with a rated value of
tester. the resistor.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 311 312 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Maintenance Maintenance

10.1.3 Bi-annual Inspections 10.2.2 How to Replace the Cooling Fans

Inspection Inspection Inspection Inspection Judgment Inspection
area item details method standard equipment
Turn off the power when replacing cooling fans.
Megger test Disconnect the
(between the cables for
Insulation Must be
Motor input, output terminals U/V/ DC 500 V Megger Replace the cooling fans following the steps below:
resistance above 5 MΩ
and earth W and test the
terminals). wiring. 1 Refer to the illustration and remove the 4 bolts securing the fan bracket.
2 Remove the fan bracket and disconnect the fan connector.
3 Connect the new fan’s connector to the inverter’s fan connector.
4 Reinsert the 4 bolts and secure the fan bracket.
Do not run an insulation resistance test (Megger) on the control circuit as it may result in damage to
the product.

10.2 Replacing Major Components

Refer to following for information on replacing major components.

10.2.1 Exchange Cycle for Major Components

Following table shows the cycles and information for major components.

Components Exchange standard Symptom Action

Make inquiries to the A/S center
Cooling fan 3 years Spinning failure
and replace it with a new product.
Main circuit electrolytic Capacity Make inquiries to the A/S center
3 years
condenser reduction and replace it with a new product.
Main circuit relay - Operation failure Make inquiries to the A/S center.

Note
The life times of major components are based on the operating rated load consecutively. The lifetime
may be different according to conditions and environment.

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 313 314 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

10.3 Storage and Disposal 11 Technical Specification

10.3.1 Storage
11.1 Input and Output Specification
If you are not using the product for an extended period, store it in the following way:
3-Phase 400 V (30–75 kW)
O Store the product in the same environmental conditions as specified for operation (refer to 1.3 Model LTVF-S4□□□□BAA 0075 0091 0107 0142 0169
Installation Considerations on page 3). HP 40 50 60 75 100
Applied
O When storing the product for a period longer than 3 months, store it between 10˚C and 30˚C, to motor kW 30 37 45 55 75
prevent depletion of the electrolytic capacitor.
Rated capacity (kVA) 46 57 69 84 116
O Do not expose the inverter to snow, rain, fog, or dust.
O Package the inverter in a way that prevents contact with moisture. Keep the moisture level below Rated current Heavy load 61 75 91 110 152
Rated (A)
70% in the package by including a desiccant, such as silica gel. Normal load 75 91 107 142 169
output
Output frequency 0-400 Hz (IM Sensorless: 0-120 Hz)
Output voltage (V) 3-phase 380-480 V
Working voltage (V) 3-phase 380-480 VAC (-15% to +10%)
10.3.2 Disposal
Input frequency 50-60 Hz (±5%)
Rated input
When disposing of the product, categorize it as general industrial waste. Recyclable materials are Rated current Heavy load 56 69 85 103 143
included in the product, so recycle them whenever possible. The packing materials and all metal parts (A) Normal load 69 85 100 134 160
can be recycled. Although plastic can also be recycled, it can be incinerated under contolled Weight (lb /kg) 26 35 35 43 43
conditions in some regions.

If the inverter has not been operated for a long time, capacitors lose their charging characteristics and
are depleted. To prevent depletion, turn on the product once a year and allow the device to operate
for 30-60 min. Run the device under no-load conditions.
11.2 Product Specification Details
Items Description
Control method V/F control, slip compensation, sensorless vector
Frequency settings Digital command: 0.01 Hz
power resolution Analog command: 0.06 Hz (60 Hz standard)
Frequency accuracy 1% of maximum output frequency
Control
V/F pattern Linear, square reduction, user V/F
Heavy load rated current: 150% 1 min, normal load rated current:
Overload capacity
120% 1 min
Torque boost Manual torque boost, automatic torque boost
Operation type Select key pad, terminal strip, or communication operation
Analog type: -10–10 V, 0–10 V, 4–20 mA
Frequency settings
Digital type: key pad, pulse train input
Operation O PID control O Up-down operation
O 3-wire operation O DC braking
Operation function
O Frequency limit O Frequency jump
O Second function O Slip compensation

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 315 316 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

Items Description Items Description
O Anti-forward and reverse direction O Automatic restart O Motor normal load trip O Motor overload trip
rotation O Automatic tuning Command loss trip alarm, overload alarm, normal load alarm, inverter
O Commercial transition O Energy buffering Alarm overload alarm, fan operation alarm, resistance braking rate alarm,
O Speed search O Flux braking number of corrections on rotor tuning error
O Power braking O Fire Mode Heavy load less than16 ms (normal load less than 8 ms): continue
O Leakage reduction operation (must be within the rated input voltage and rated output
Select PNP (Source) or NPN (Sink) mode. Functions can be set Instantaneous blackout range)
according to IN-65–IN-71 codes and parameter settings. Heavy load more than 16 ms (normal load more than 8 ms ): auto
O Forward direction operation O Reverse direction operation restart operation
O Reset O External trip Cooling type Forced fan cooling structure
Multi O Emergency stop O Jog operation
Protection structure IP 20 (standard), UL Open & Enclosed Type 1 (option)
function O Multi step speed frequency- O Multi step acc/dec-
Heavy load: -10-50Ԩ (14–122°F), normal load: -10-40Ԩ (14–104°F)
terminal high/med/low high/med/low Ambient temperature
Input No ice or frost should be present.
(7EA) O DC braking during stop O Second motor selection
Structure/ Ambient humidity Relative humidity less than 90% RH (to avoid condensation forming)
P1-P7 O Frequency increase O Frequency reduction
O 3-wire working Storage temperature. -20°C-65°C (-4–149°F)
O Fix analog command
environment
O Local/remote operation mode frequency Prevent contact with corrosive gases, inflammable gases, oil stains,
Surrounding environment
transition O Transtion from PID to general dust, and other pollutants (Pollution Degree 2 Environment).
O Select acc/dec/stop operation Operation 2
No higher than 3280ft (1,000m). Less than9.8 m/sec (0.6G).
Pulse train 0-32 kHz, Low Level: 0-0.8 V, High Level: 3.5-12 V altitude/oscillation
Multi Pressure 70-106 kPa
function
open Less than DC 24 V, 50 mA
collector
Fault output and inverter
terminal
operation status output
Multi
Output
function Less than (N.O., N.C.) AC250 V 1A,
relay Less than DC 30 V, 1A
terminal
Analog 0-12Vdc (0-24 mA): Select frequency, output current, output voltage,
output DC terminal voltage and others
Pulse train Maximum 32 kHz, 10-12V
O Over current trip O Over voltage trip
O External signal trip O Temperature sensor trip
O ARM short circuit current trip O Inverter over heat
O Over heat trip O Option trip
O Input imaging trip O Output imaging trip
O Ground trip O Inverter overload trip
Protection O Motor over heat trip O Fan trip
Trip
function O I/O board link trip O Pre-PID operation failure
O No motor trip O External break trip
O Parameter writing trip O Low voltage trip during
O Emergency stop trip operation
O Command loss trip O Low voltage trip
O External memory error O Safety A(B) trip
O CPU watchdog trip O Analog input error

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 317 318 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 55–75 kW (3-Phase)
11.3 External Dimensions (IP 20 Type)
30 kW (3-Phase)

37–45 kW (3-Phase) Items W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 D1 A B

275 450
LTVF-S40075BAA 232 428.5 14
(10.8) (17.7) 284 7 7
LTVF-S40091BAA 510 (11.2) (0.28) (0.28)
282 486.5
LTVF-S40107BAA 325 (20.1)
16
LTVF-S40142BAA (12.8) 550 309
275 524.5 9 9
LTVF-S40169BAA (21.7) (12.2)
Units: mm (inches)

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 319 320 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

11.4 Peripheral Devices 11.6 Terminal Screw Specification
Compatible Circuit Breaker, Leakage Breaker and Magnetic Contactor Models Input/Output Terminal Screw Specification
(manufactured by L&T) Product (kW) Terminal Screw Size Screw Torque (Kgfžcm/Nm)
30~75 kW M8 61.2~91.8
Product (HD rating) L&T MCCB / Amp L&T Magnetic Contactor
30 kW-4 DN2-250M / 125 MO 95
Control Circuit Terminal Screw Specification
37 kW-4 DN2-250M / 160 MNX 140 Terminal Terminal Screw Size Screw Torque (Kgfžcm/Nm)
45 kW-4 DN2-250M / 160 MNX 140 P1~P7/CM/VR/V1/I2/AO1/AO2
55 kW-4 DN2-250M / 200 MNX 185 /Q1/EG/24/TI/TO/SA,SB,SC/S+ M2.6 0.4
,S-,SG/A1,B1,C1/A2,C2
75 kW-4 DN3-400M / 320 MNX 225

Apply the rated torque when tightening terminal screws. Loose screws may cause short circuits and
11.5 Fuse and Reactor Specifications malfunctions. Overtightening terminal screws may damage the terminals and cause short circuits and
malfunctions. Use copper conductors only, rated at 600 V, 90Ԩ for power terminal wiring, and rated at
AC Input Fuse 300 V, 75Ԩ for control terminal wiring.
Product ( HD rating )
Current (A) Voltage (V)
30 kW-4 600
125 A
37 kW-4
45 kW-4 160 A
55 kW-4
200 A
75 kW-4

Only use Class H or RK5, UL listed input fuses and UL listed circuit breakers. See the table above for
the voltage and current ratings for fuses and circuit breakers.

AC Input Reactor
Product Product
mH Amp mH Amp
( HD rating ) ( ND rating )
30 kW-4 0.287 80 37 kW-4 0.232 98
37 kW-4 0.232 98 45 kW-4 0.195 118
45 kW-4 0.195 118 55 kW-4 0.157 142
55 kW-4 0.157 142 75 kW-4 0.122 196
75 kW-4 0.122 196 90 kW-4 0.096 237

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 321 322 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Derating by Input Voltage
11.7 Braking Resistor Specification
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the input voltage. Refer to the
Product (kW) Resistance (Ω) Rated Capacity (W) following graph.
30 kW
12 5000
37 kW
45 kW
55 kW 6 10000
75 kW
O The standard for braking torque is 150% and the working rate (%ED) is 5%. If the working rate is
10%, the rated capacity for braking resistance must be calculated at twice the standard.

11.8 Continuous Rated Current Derating

Derating by Carrier Frequency
The continuous rated current of the inverter is limited based on the carrier frequency. Refer to the
following graph.

Derating by Ambient Temperature and Installation Type

The constant-rated current of the inverter is limited based on the ambient temperature and installation
type. Refer to the following graph.

Item Unit 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
fs, ND 2
fs, c [kHz] 6 4 Note : Above graph is for HD models. For ND models operation at 50 deg C needs deration
fs, max 10 7 of 2% per deg rise above 40 deg C upto 50 deg C.
% of DR [%] 70

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 323 324 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Index

11.9 Heat Emmission Index

The following graph shows the inverters’ heat emission characteristics (by product capacity). configuration via multi-function terminal ... 78
[
maximum frequency................................... 76
[DOWN] key..................................................... 31 operation frequency ................................... 77
[ESC] key ......................................................... 31 accumulated electric energy initialize .........163
[HAND] key ...................................................... 31 Add User group
[LEFT] key........................................................ 31 UserGrp SelKey........................................160
[MODE] key ..................................................... 31 ADV (A function group).................................240
[MULTI] key...................................................... 31 advanced features group ............................... 37
[OFF] key ......................................................... 31 Advanced function group ............ Refer to ADV
[PROG / Ent] key ............................................ 31 (advanced) function group
[RIGHT] key ..................................................... 31 analog frequency hold .................................... 67
[STOP/RESET] key ........................................ 31 Analog Hold................................................. 67
[UP] key............................................................ 31 analog input .............................................. 20, 37
I2 current input ............................................ 63
୎ I2 voltage input............................................ 65
2 square reducion ........................................... 56 TI Pulse input .............................................. 65
24 terminal ................................................ 21, 23 V1 voltage input .......................................... 59
Heat emission data is based on operations with default carrier frequencysettings, under normal 2nd Motor Function group..... Refer to M2 (2nd analog input selection switch(SW2) ....... 18, 65
operating conditions. For detailed information on carrier frequency, refer to 5.16 Operational Noise Motor Function group ) group analog output .......................................... 21, 168
Settings (carrier frequency settings) on page 149. 2nd Motor Operation.....................................151 analog output selection switch(SW3) ....... 18
nd
2 Operation mode ........................................ 94 AO terminal ................................................. 21
nd
2 command source.................................. 94 pulse output...............................................171
Shared command (Main Source) ............. 94 voltage and current output .......................168
analog output selection switch(SW3)..........168
୏ AO terminal .......................................21, 74, 168
APP(Application Function group) ................264
3-phase 415V (5.5~22 kW)..........................316 ARM short current fault trip ......... Refer to Over
3-Wire Operation........................................... 117 Current2
asynchronous communications system .....206
ଢ଼ auto restart settings.......................................148
auto torque boost ............................................ 87
A terminal (Normally Open) ........................... 95
auto tuning.......................................... 87, 130
A1/C1/B1 terminal........................................... 21
AC power input terminal ............ Refer to R/S/T auto tuning ............................................ 130, 236
terminal All(rotating) ................................................131
All(static) ....................................................131
Acc/Dec pattern........................................ 56, 80
default parameter setting .........................130
linear pattern ............................................... 80
Tr(static) .....................................................131
S-curve pattern ........................................... 80
auxiliary frequency ........................................108
Acc/Dec reference .......................................... 77
auxiliary frequency reference configuration
Delta Freq.................................................... 76
...............................................................108
Max Freq ..................................................... 76
auxiliary reference ....................................108
Acc/Dec reference frequency ........................ 76
auxiliary reference gain ............................109
Ramp T Mode ............................................. 76
configuration..............................................108
Acc/Dec stop ................................................... 83
final command frequency calculation ..... 110
Acc/Dec time ................................................... 76
main reference ..........................................108
Acc/Dec time switch frequency................. 79

Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 325 326 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )

 Index

୞ Command source ...........................................70 [LEFT] key ................................................... 31 protection (ETH)

fwd/rev command terminal ........................70 [RIGHT] key ................................................ 31 E-Thermal ......................................................205
B terminal (Normally Closed).........................95
keypad .........................................................70 [UP] key ....................................................... 31 Exciting Current .............................................135
BAS(Basic function group)...........................235
RS-485.........................................................71 external 24V power terminal ......... Refer to 24
basic configuration diagram............................. 9
run command/rotational direction ୠ terminal
Basic group.........Refer to BAS (Basic function
configuration ...........................................71 External Trip .......................................... 205, 300
group) DB resistor
commercial power source transition ...........152 External Trip
basic operation................................................30 braking resistor circuit ..............................196
common terminal ........... Refer to EG terminal External Trip Signal ..................................192
bit 95 DB Warn %ED ..........................................196
communication ..............................................206
bit (Off) .........................................................95 DB Warn %ED ........... Refer to DB Warn %ED
command loss protective operation .......210 ୢ
bit (On).........................................................95 DC braking
communication address...........................214
bit setting .....................................................95 DC braking after start ................................. 88 Fan Trip ........................................ 199, 205, 300
communication line connection...............207
multi-function input setting.........................95 DC braking after stop ................................. 89 Fan Warning ................................ 199, 205, 302
communication parameters.....................208
multi-function output setting ....................177 DC braking frequency ................................ 89 fatal .................................................................299
communication speed..............................208
speed search setting................................146 DC link voltage ..................................... 106, 140 fault .................................................................205
communication standards .......................206
stall prevention..........................................188 derating ..........................................................150 fatal.............................................................299
memory map.............................................212
Bootlace Ferrule..............................................22 Digital Output .................................................172 fault/warning list ........................................205
PLC ............................................................206
brake control..................................................165 digital source.................................................... 72 latch............................................................299
protocol ......................................................214
BR Control.................................................165 display .............................................................. 32 level ............................................................299
saving parameters defined by
brake engage sequence..........................165 display mode table ..................................... 36 major fault ..................................................205
communication.....................................212
brake release sequence ..........................165 display modes ............................................. 35 fault monitoring ................................................ 51
setting virtual multi-function input............211
brake resistor...................................................16 disposal ................................................. 309, 315 multiple fault trips ........................................ 52
Communication function group..Refer to COM
brake unit .......................................................167 draw operation...............................................106 fault signal output terminal Refer to A1/C1/B1
(communication function group)
braking resistance Drive group ...230, Refer to DRV (Drive group) terminal
compatible common area parameter..........217
braking torque...........................................323 Dwell Operation............................................. 119 fault trip mode .................................................. 36
CON (Control Function group) ....................245
braking resistors................................................ 9 Acc/Dec dewel frequency........................ 119 ferrite................................................................. 23
Considerations for the installation
built-in communication............Refer to RS-485 acceleration Dwell .................................... 119 fieldbus ...................................................... 58, 70
Air Pressure...................................................3
BX .......................................................... 205, 300 deceleration Dwell .................................... 119 communication option ................................ 94
Altitude/Vibration...........................................3
Fieldbus .................................... Refer to fieldbus
Ambient Humidity .........................................3
ୟ Environmental Factors.................................3 ୡ filter time constant ........................................... 59
filter time constant number ............................. 95
cable ......................................... 6, 14, 15, 16, 18 Considerations for the installation earth leakage breaker...................................307 flux braking.....................................................187
Ground Specifications.................................. 7 Ambient Temperature...................................3 EEP Rom Empty ...........................................155 free run stop ..................................................... 91
Power I/O Cable Specifications .................. 7 contact EG terminal ...................................................... 21 frequency jump ................................................ 93
selection.......................6, 14, 15, 16, 18, 335 A contact....................................................192 electronic thermal overheating protection frequency limit.................................................. 92
shielded twisted pair...................................27 B contact....................................................192 (ETH) .........................................................183 frequency jump ........................................... 93
signal(control) cable specifications............. 6 Control group.Refer to CON (Control Function emergency stop fault trip ................ Refer to BX
frequency upper and lower limit value...... 92
cable tie............................................................23 group) Enclosed Type 1............................................318 maximum/start frequency .......................... 92
carrier frequency .................................... 17, 149 control terminal board wiring..........................18 energy buttfering operation ..........................140 frequency reference ........................................ 88
derating......................................................323 cooling fan......................................................153 energy saving operation ...............................144 frequency setting ............................................. 58
factory default............................................150 cooling fan malfunction ............................199 automatic energy saving operation ........144 I2 current input ............................................ 63
charge indicator..............................13, 299, 305 Fan Control................................................153 manual energy saving operation ............144 I2 voltage input............................................ 65
charge lamp.....................................................13 fan Operation accumulated time.............182 ESC key keypad ......................................................... 58
cleaning..........................................................309 fan Operation accumulated time [ESC] key configuration ........................... 115 RS-485......................................................... 67
CM terminal .............................................. 20, 23 initialization............................................182 [ESC] key setup .......................................... 72 TI Pulse input .............................................. 65
CNF (configuration mode) .................... 36, 163 fan replacement........................................314 local/remote switching................................ 72 V1 voltage input .......................................... 59
COM(communication function group) ........260 CPU Watch Dog fault trip .............................205 multi-function key........................................ 72 frequency setting (Pulse train) terminal ...Refer
command.........................................................70 cursor keys.......................................................31 remote / local operation switching ............ 72 to TI terminal
configuration................................................70 [DOWN] key................................................31 ETH ... Refer to electronic thermal overheating
frequency setting(voltage) terminal Refer to V1
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 327 328 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Index

terminal basic configuration diagram ........................9 level ................................................................299 E-Thermal..................................................184

fuse.................................................................321 Installation flowchart .................................8 Lifetime diagnosis of components mounting bolt ................................................... 10
wiring............................................................13 lifetime diagnosis for fans ........................201 multi function input terminal
ୣ Installation lift-type load.................................80, 86, 87, 119 IN-65–71 ....................................................253
Mounting the Inverter .................................10 linear pattern .................................................... 80 Px terminal function setting .....................253
ground ..............................................................15
installation considerations ...............3, 309, 315 linear V/F pattern Operation........................... 83 multi function input terminal
class 3 ground ............................................15
IP 20 ...............................................................318 base frequency ........................................... 83 Px Define ...................................................253
ground terminal...........................................15
start frequency ............................................ 83 multi keypad
Ground Cable Specifications ...................... 7
୦ local operation Multi KPD..................................................... 97
ground fault trip.................Refer to Ground Trip
[ESC] key .................................................... 72 slave parameter .......................................... 97
Ground Trip........................................... 205, 299 Jog Operation................................................112
Local/Remote Mode Switching ................. 72 multi-drop Link System .................................206
ground fault trip.........................................299 FWD Jog ...................................................112
remote peration........................................... 72 Multi-function (open collector) output terminal
Jog frequency ...........................................112
local Operation ................................................ 72 Multi-function output item1(Q1 Define) ..258
୤ keypad .......................................................115
locating the installation site .............................. 4 Multi-function relay 1 item(Relay 1) ........257
jump frequency................................................93
half duplex system ........................................206 location .......................................................... 4 multi-function input terminal ........................... 20
Heavy Duty ........................................................ 3 loop ................................................................... 98 multi-function input terminal Off filter ........ 95
୧ loop time ....................................................101 multi-function input terminal On filter ........ 95
heavy load......................................................150
hunting............................................................139 keypad..............................................................30 Lost Command............................ 205, 301, 302 P1–P7..........................................................Refer
[ESC] key.....................................................31 command loss fault trip warning .............205 multi-function input terminal control............... 95
୥ [HAND] key .................................................31 command loss trip ....................................205 multi-function key
[MODE] key.................................................31 low voltage ............................................ 202, 299 Multi Key Sel .............................................297
I2 20, 63 low voltage fault trip......................... 202, 205 multi-function key options ........................297
[MULTI] key .................................................31
analog input selection switch(SW2) .........20 low voltage trip 2 .......................................204 multi-function output terminal
[OFF] key.....................................................31
frequency setting(current/voltage) terminal Low Voltage ...................................................205 multi-function output on/off control..........166
[PROG / Ent] key........................................31
.................................................................20 LowLeakage PWM .......................................150 multi-function output terminal and relay
[STOP/RESET] key....................................31
In Phase Open ..................................... 205, 300 settings ..................................................172
configuration mode.....................................36
IN(Input Terminal Block Function group)....251 ୩ multi-function output terminal delay time
cursor keys ..................................................31
input open-phase fault trip....Refer to In Phase settings ..................................................178
display................................................... 30, 32 M2(2nd Motor Function group)....................271
Open trip output by multi-function output terminal
display mode...............................................35 magnetic contactor ................................ 17, 321
input phase open and relay ...............................................177
monitor mode..............................................36 maintenance ..................................................309
input open-phase protection....................191 multi-function(open collector) output terminal
navigating between groups .......................35 manual torque boost ....................................... 86
input power frequency..................................154 ....................................... Refer to Q1 terminal
operation keys.............................................30 Master ............................................................207
input power voltage.......................................154 multi-keypad .................................................... 97
parameter mode .........................................36 master inverter................................................. 97
input terminal ...................................................20 master parameter ....................................... 97
S/W version...............................................163 master unit ....................................................... 96
CM terminal.................................................20 setting........................................................... 97
trip mode......................................................36 megger test .................................................... 311
I2 terminal....................................................20 multi-step frequency........................................ 68
keypad display.................................................32 micro surge filter .............................................. 17
P1–P7 terminal ...........................................20 setting........................................................... 68
keypad features momentary power interruption... 140, 146, 147
SA terminal..................................................20 Speed-L/Speed-M/Speed-H ..................... 69
fault monitoring ...........................................51 monitor
SB terminal..................................................20
selecting a display mode ...........................38 Operation State Monitor ..........................179
SC terminal .................................................20 ୪
Keypad Language.........................................179 Operation time monitor ............................182
TI terminal....................................................20
V1 terminal ..................................................20 monitoring N- terminal(- DC link terminal) ....................... 16
୨ monitor mode .............................................. 36 no motor trip ................................. 204, 205, 300
VR terminal .................................................20
Input terminal function group Refer to IN (Input latch ................................................................299 monitor mode display................................. 32 noise ................................................................. 61
terminal function group) LCD display .....................................................32 motor output voltage adjustment ................... 87 Normal Duty....................................................... 3
inspection LCD keypad motor protection ............................................183 normal load ....................................................150
annual inspection......................................311 LCD brightness/contrast adjustment......163 motor rotational direction ................................ 29 Normal PWM .................................................150
bi-annual inspection)................................313 wiring length ................................................23 motor thermal protection(ETH) NPN mode(Sink) ............................................. 24
installation .......................................................... 8 leakage breaker.............................................321 ETH trip......................................................184
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 329 330 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Index

୫ ୬ power terminal board wiring........................... 16 /SG terminal

power terminals run prevention
open-phase protection..................................191 P/Igain ............................................................147
R/S/T terminals ........................................... 16 Fwd .............................................................. 73
Operation frequencyRefer to frequency setting P1+ terminals(+ DC link terminals) ...............16 Power-on Run ......... Refer to start at power-on Rev ............................................................... 73
operation noise..............................................149 P2P...................................................................96
pre-exciting time ............................................136
carrier frequency.......................................149 communication function.............................96
Preinsulated Crimp Terminal.......................... 22 ୯
frequency jump ...........................................93 master parameter .......................................96
Press regeneration prevention ....................167
Operation time...............................................182 setting...........................................................96 S/W version ...................................................163
P gain/I gain ..............................................167
operation accumulated time....................182 slave parameter..........................................96 keypad .......................................................163
protocol...........................................................214
operation accumulated time initialization parameter product .......................................................163
PRT(Protection Function group) .................266
...............................................................182 display changed parameter.....................159 S+/S-/SG terminal ........................................... 21
Pulse output terminal ..... Refer to TO terminal
option trip.................203, Refer to Option Trip-x hide parameters........................................157 S100 expansion common area parameter
PWM...............................................................149
Option Trip-x ..................................................205 initialization ................................................156 control area parameter(Read/Write) ......226
frequency modulation ..............................149
option trip...................................................205 initializing the parameters ..........................54 memory control area
Out Phase Open .................................. 205, 300 parameter lock ..........................................158 parameter(Read/Write) .......................228
୭
OUT(Output terminal function group) .........256 parameter settings......................................46 monitor area parameter (read only)........220
output block by multi-function terminal .......202 password ................................. 157, 158, 229 Q1 terminal ...................................................... 21 SA terminal....................................................... 20
output open-phase fault trip .......... Refer to Out read/write/save..........................................155 Quantizing ........................................................ 61 Safe Operation mode ................................... 118
Phase Open parameter mode..............................................36 noise ............................................................ 61 safety information ...............................................ii
output terminal..............Refer to R/S/T terminal parameter setting mode .........................37 safety input power terminal ............ Refer to SC
Output terminal function group ... Refer to OUT parameter view lock......................................157 ୮ terminal
(Output terminal function group) part names.........................................................2 safety inputA terminal ...... Refer to SA terminal
output/communication terminal................21 parts illustrated ..................................................2 R/S/T terminals................................. 16, 17, 305 Safety inputB terminal...... Refer to SB terminal
24 terminal...................................................21 Peripheral devices ........................................321 rating SB terminal ...................................................... 20
A1/C1/B1 terminal ......................................21 phase-to-phase voltage................................306 braking resistance rated capacity ...........323 SC terminal ...................................................... 20
AO terminal .................................................21 PID control .....................................................122 rated motor current ...................................121 screw specification
EG terminal .................................................21 basic PID operation..................................122 rated motor voltage ..................................130 control circuit terminal screw ...................322
Q1 terminal..................................................21 configuration..............................................122 rated slip frequency ..................................121 input/output terminal screw......................322
S+/S-/SG terminal ......................................21 Differential time(PID D-Time) ..................125 rated slip speed ........................................121 screw size ..................................................322
TO terminal..................................................21 integral time(PID I-Time)..........................125 rated torque current..................................169 screw torque..............................................322
over current trip ............Refer to Over Current1 oscillation...................................................125 reactor ....................................................... 9, 321 S-curve pattern ................................................ 80
Over Current1....................................... 205, 299 Pgain..........................................................125 regenerated energy ............................... 91, 140 actual Acc/Dec time.................................... 82
Over Current2....................................... 205, 300 PID control block diagram .......................127 remote operation ............................................. 72 sensorless vector control..............................133
Over Heat.............................................. 205, 300 PID feedback ............................................300 [ESC] key .................................................... 72 configuration..............................................135
over heat fault trip................Refer to Over Heat PID Operation Sleep mode .....................129 local operation............................................. 72 Hold Time ..................................................136
over load ........................................................205 PID output .................................................124 Local/Remote Mode Switching ................. 72 Igain............................................................136
Reset Restart........refer to restarting after a trip
Over Load ......................................................299 PID reference............................................124 IM Sensorless ...........................................135
overload warning ............................. 205, 302 PID Switching............................................129 resonance frequency ...................................... 93 Pgain ..........................................................136
Over Voltage......................................... 205, 299 Pre-PID Operation....................................128 carrier frequency.......................................149 pre-exciting time .......................................136
over voltage trip..............Refer to Over Voltage PNP/NPN mode selection switch(SW1).......18 frequency jump ........................................... 93 sensorless vector control operation guide
overload .............................. Refer to Over Load NPN mode(Sink) ........................................24 restarting after a trip ........................................ 75 ...............................................................139
overload fault trip ......................................205 PNP mode(Source)....................................23 RS-232 ...........................................................207 sequence common terminal ......... Refer to CM
overload overload trip...............................185 post-installation checklist................................26 communication .........................................207 terminal
overload warning ......................................185 power consumption..............................180, 181 RS-485 ...........................................................206 serge killer ........................................................ 26
overload rate..................................................150 power slot.......................................................163 communication .........................................207 setting virtual multi-function input ................ 211
overload trip ........................ Refer to Over Load power terminal converter....................................................207 Slave...............................................................207
N- terminal...................................................16 integrated communication ......................... 67 slave inverter ............................................... 97
P2+/B terminal ............................................16 signal terminal ...................................... 21, 67 slave unit...................................................... 96
U/V/W terminal............................................16 RS-485 signal input terminal.... Refer to S+/S- Slip ..................................................................121
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 331 332 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )
 Index

slip compensation operation........................121 0.1sec ..........................................................77 using the keypad voltage/current output terminal ...... Refer to AO
speed command loss ...................................193 1sec..............................................................77 parameter settings...................................... 46 terminal
speed search operation................................145 time scale setting.............................................76 using the keypad ............................................. 38 VR terminal ............................................... 20, 59
Flying Start-1.............................................145 Timer...............................................................164 navigating through the codes (functions). 43
Flying Start-2.............................................145 protection features group ........PRT (protection switching between groups in parameter ୳
options .......................................................146 features) group display mode .......................................... 42
Warning ..........................................................299
P/Igain........................................................147 TO terminal ............................................. 21, 171 USS ................................................................273
fault/warning list ........................................205
speed unit selection (Hz or Rpm)..................68 torque ...............................................................17
wiring ................................................................ 13
Square reduction torque control ............................................141 ୲
3 core cable................................................. 17
Square reduction load................................84 torque reference setting option ...............142
V/F control........................................................ 83 circuit breaker............................................321
V/F pattern Operation ................................84 torque boost.....................................................86
linear V/F pattern Operation ...................... 83 control terminal board wiring ..................... 18
stall auto torque boost........................................87
Square reductionV/F pattern Operation... 84 copper cable................................................ 13
bit on/off .....................................................188 manual torque boost ..................................86
user V/F pattern Operation........................ 85 cover disassembly...................................... 14
stall prevention..........................................187 overexcitation..............................................86
V1 terminal................................................ 20, 59 ferrite ............................................................ 23
Stall.................................................................187 trip ...................................................................299
V2 ground.......................................................... 15
start at power-on .............................................74 erase trip history .......................................163
analog input selection switch(SW2) ......... 20 power terminal board wiring ...................... 16
start mode........................................................88 fault/waring list ..........................................205
V2 input ............................................................ 65 re-assembling the covers .......................... 25
acceleration start ........................................88 trip mode......................................................36
I2 voltage input............................................ 65 signal wiring................................................. 22
start after DC braking.................................88 trip status reset..........................................203
variable torque load ............................... 84, 141 torque ........................................................... 13
Station ..............................................................97 troubleshooting .........................................303
voltage drop ..................................................... 17 wiring length ......................................... 17, 23
Station ID .......................................................214 troubleshooting..............................................299
stop mode ........................................................89 other faults.................................................305
DC braking after stop .................................89 troubleshooting fault trips.........................303
deceleration stop ........................................89
free run stop ................................................91 ୱ
power braking .............................................91
U/V/W terminals ...............................16, 17, 305
storage ...........................................................315
Under Load
Storing Temperature ......................................... 3
underload fault trip....................................205
surge killer........................................................17
underload trip ............................................299
switch................................................................18
underload warning....................................302
analog input selection switch(SW2) .........18
Underload ......................................................205
analog output selection switch(SW3).......18
underload trip ............................................198
PNP/NPN mode selection switch(SW1)..18
underload warning...........................198, 205
terminal resistor DIP switch(SW4)............18
update.............................................................163
Up-Down Operation......................................115
୰
user group......................................................159
target frequency delete parameters ....................................160
Cmd Frequency........................................230 parameter registration..............................160
technical specification...................................316 User mode .............................................. 35, 160
terminal.............................................................95 user sequence.................................................98
A terminal............................................ 95, 178 function block parameter .........................101
B terminal ........................................... 95, 178 setting...........................................................98
terminal for frequency reference setting..Refer user function operation condition............101
to VR terminal USF group...................................................98
test run..............................................................28 USS group...................................................98
TI terminal ................................................. 20, 65 void parameter................................... 98, 101
time scale user V/F pattern Operation ............................85
0.01sec ........................................................77 USF.................................................................276
Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND ) 333 334 Sx2000 AC Drive ( 30 kW HD to 90 kW ND )